Pastries Like a Pro

  • Home
  • Recipes
  • About Helen
  • Mother's Day
  • Subscribe
  • Contact
menu icon
go to homepage
  • Home
  • Recipes
  • About Helen
  • Mother's Day
  • Subscribe
  • Contact
    • Facebook
    • Instagram
    • LinkedIn
    • Pinterest
    • Twitter
  • subscribe
    search icon
    Homepage link
    • Home
    • Recipes
    • About Helen
    • Mother's Day
    • Subscribe
    • Contact
    • Facebook
    • Instagram
    • LinkedIn
    • Pinterest
    • Twitter
  • ×
    Home

    No Bake Chocolate Coconut Tart

    Modified: May 5, 2026 · Published: Oct 9, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 17 Comments

    A slice of the Chocolate Coconut Tart sits on a lace edged white plate with a red napkin and a fork behind it.

    The only way to adequately describe this Chocolate Coconut Tart is to think Mounds Bars. This unusual tart comprises a sublime mixture of cream of coconut, white chocolate, a touch of sour cream and a lot of coconut in a chocolate crust. You'll especially like the no bake aspect of making this.

    A slice of the Chocolate Coconut Tart sits on a lace edged white plate with a red napkin and a fork behind it.

    While completely optional, the white chocolate swirl on top adds visual appeal. Easy to make, easier to eat!

    If you love tarts, you'll also love this Chocolate Cranberry Curd Tart and my Strawberry Crumb Tart.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love This Recipe

    • It's past easy to make. The crust is a chocolate version of the graham cracker crust.
    • It freezes completely made for several months.
    • It can be made several days ahead and refrigerated.
    • The ingredients are easily available. The cream of coconut can be found in the liquor department of grocery stores.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Chocolate Graham Cracker Crust

    The ingredients for the chocolate graham cracker crust include:  Graham crackets, powdered sugar, unsalted butter and cocoa.

    FRONT ROW: Unsalted butter, cocoa powder (either natural or Dutch)

    BACK ROW: Graham Crackers, powdered sugar

    Coconut Filling

    Ingredients for the coconut filling are:  cream of coconut, sweetened coconut, white chocolate, sour cream and unsalted butter.

    FRONT ROW: White chocolate, sour cream, unsalted butter

    BACK ROW: Cream of Coconut, sweetened coconut

    Chocolate Glaze and Finish

    The glaze ingredients are: semisweet chocolate, heavy cream, corn syrup, unsalted butter, and white chocolate.

    FRONT ROW: White Chocolate

    MIDDLE ROW: Corn syrup, unsalted butter

    BACK ROW: Semisweet Chocolate, heavy cream

    Important Ingredients

    • Graham crackers made from different companies take more or less butter. Start with ½ cup and add a tablespoon more at a time until they stick together when a small amount is pressed between your fingers.
    • Either natural or Dutch cocoa can be used.
    • Real Cream of Coconut is the brand I like because it is a translucent liquid with no lumps of coconut in it.
    • Full fat or Light sour cream can be used.
    • Honey or Golden syrup can be subbed for the corn syrup.
    • Make sure to use heavy cream for the ganache
    • I found another white chocolate I like a lot. It can be found at Aldi's, among other places, and is a less expensive than the Ghirardelli. They are both 4 ounces. The Moser Roth is a bit creamier and has specs of Madagascar vanilla bean in it. Both are good.
    Photo of Ghirardelli and Moser Roth white chocolate.

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    Chocolate Graham Cracker Crust

    The first collage for the chocolate graham cracker crust shows the dry ingredients in a processor bowl, then processed, the butter added and everything mixed in a bowl.

    Step 1. Place the dry ingredients - graham crackers, cocoa and powdered sugar in the bowl of a food processor. Step 2. Process until uniform fine crumbs form. Step 3. Remove the crumbs to a medium size bowl and add ½ cup of the melted butter. Step 4. Toss with a fork until all of the crumbs are coated. Pick up a few and press them between your fingers. If they don't stick together well, add the remaining butter 1 tablespoon at a time. Retest to see if they need the last tablespoon.

    The last collage for the crust shows crumbs loosley around the edge of a tart pan, then pressed into the rim of the pan, a measurng cup pre

    Step 5. Place the called for amount of crumbs evenly around the rim of the tart pan. Step 6. Press them firmly into the sides of the pan Step 7. Place the remaining crumbs evenly on the bottom of the pan With your hand or a measuring cup, press them firmly into the bottom and along the sides of the pan. Step 8. Refrigerate the finished crust while the filling is being made.

    Coconut Filling

    The first collage for the coconut filling shows the white chocolate chopped, in the bowl with the cream, combined and the butter added.

    Step 1. Coarsely chop the white chocolate to make it easier to melt. Step 2. Place it in a medium size bowl with the cream of coconut. Microwave at ½ power for about a 1 to 1 ½ minutes. Be careful to start on the low side as white chocolate burns very, very easily. Alternatively, make a double boiler by placing the bowl over a saucepan filled with a couple of inches of water. Bring the water to a bare simmer - no more. Do not let the water touch the bottom of the bowl. Step 3. Whisk to smooth out the chocolate. If it isn't smooth, heat again very briefly. It is easier to control in a double boiler. Step 4. Add the butter.

    In this collage the butter has been melted in, the sour cream added and whisked in followed by the coconut.

    Step 5. Whisk in the butter. If the mixture is too cool, reheat briefly - just enough to melt the butter. Step 6. Add the sour cream. Step 7. Whisk it in. Step 8. Add all of the coconut.

    In the collage the coconut has been stirred into the liquid, poured into the chocolate shell, smoothed out and covered with film.

    Step 9. Stir the mixture to coat all of the coconut. Step 10. Remove the crust from the fridge and spoon the filling into the chocolate shell. Step 11. Smooth the top. Step 12. Cover it with plastic wrap and place it in the refrigerator for 4 hours or overnight to firm up.

    The last collages shows the chocolate, cream, corn syrup and butter in a small bowl, the ganache on the tart, the white chocolate circles on top and the finished, marbelized tart.

    Step 13. Place the cream, corn syrup, butter and chocolate in a medium size bowl. Heat at half power for 20 t0 30 seconds to melt the chocolate or place over a double boiler. Whisk to smooth out. It should be pourable but not runny. Step 14. Pour the ganache over the tart and level it with a small offset spatula or by picking it up and carefully tilting in each direction to let the ganache run to the edge of the filling. Do not go over the edge of the crust. Step 15. Melt the 2 ounces of white chocolate very carefully at half power in the microwave, starting at abut 10 to 15 seconds. Do not over heat or it will burn. Dip a soup spoon into the white chocolate and wave it over the chocolate ganache in circles. Step 16. Quickly, with a toothpick or small wooden skewer, marbleize the white chocolate by dragging the toothpick through the white chocolate in a random pattern. The dark chocolate needs to be unset to do this. Refrigerate.

    Recipe FAQS

    What are the different types of coconut?

    Desiccated coconut, shredded and flaked. Desiccated coconut involves finely grating coconut meat and drying it until only 3% moisture remains. It is very dry and usually unsweetened. Shredded coconut is fresh or dried. Fresh has a higher moisture content but drier versions last longer. Last, Coconut Flakes are larger and fatter than shredded. They can be sweetened which are most often used for baking and decorating or unsweetened.

    Is coconut a fruit or a nut?

    Despite having the word nut at the end, coconut is a type of fruit known as a drupe.

    What should I look for when buying white chocolate?

    White chocolate isn't chocolate at all but it is made from cocoa butter, milk solids and sugar. It contains no cocoa solids which make chocolate dark. When buying white chocolate check to make sure cocoa butter is listed in the ingredients. If it isn't then it isn't real white chocolate.

    Expert Tips

    • The most important tip is to use very little heat for the shortest time when melting white chocolate if there is little or no liquid with it. It burns very easily and there is no saving it after that.
    • Keep a couple of tablespoons of butter out when adding to the crumbs. I have also found, that stirring the butter into the crumbs requires less butter than if added to the crumbs while in the processor.
    • Always chop any chocolate when melting it. Large pieces will melt unevenly and the smaller pieces can burn while the others need more time to melt.
    • When melting any chocolate, it should be heated until about half of the chocolate is hot and melty. Stirring, will melt the remainder. The general rule is chocolate melts between 86 and 90 degrees so very little heat is needed to melt it.
    • The most delicate chocolate to melt is white chocolate. It burns very easily.
    This photo shows a slice of the tart,  partially eaten, on a white plate with a red napkin in the background and a fork on the plate.

    More No Bake Treats to Share

    • A slice of Pina Colada cheesecake with caramelized pineapple sits on a tan plate.
      Easy Pina Colada No Bake Cheesecake
    • Lemonade Cake with blueberry sauce on a green plate wiht a yellow napkin.
      Lemonade Cake with Blueberry Sauce
    • A cookie crust, peanut butter filling and chocolate topping make up the No Bake Peanut Butter Bars
      No Bake Peanut Butter Bars
    • A slice of Tropical Macadamia & Coconut Tart sits on a clear plate with a teal colored napkin and cup and saucer beside it.
      Macadamia and Coconut Tart

    A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it and I appreciate you.  

    A slice of the Chocolate Coconut Tart sits on a lace edged white plate with a red napkin and a fork behind it.

    Chocolate Coconut Tart

    Helen S. Fletcher
    The only way to adequately describe this no bake Chocolate Coconut Tart is to think Mounds Bars. This unusual tart comprises a sublime mixture of cream of coconut, white chocolate, a touch of sour cream and a lot of coconut in a chocolate crust.
    4.50 from 8 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 45 minutes mins
    Chilling time 4 hours hrs
    Total Time 4 hours hrs 45 minutes mins
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Servings 12 servings
    Calories 562 kcal

    Equipment

    • 1 9 x 1" tart pan with removable bottom.
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Chocolate Crumb Crust

    • 1 ⅓ cups graham crackers (170 grams)
    • ¼ cup cocoa, natural or Dutch (20 grams)
    • ⅓ cup powdered sugar (45 grams)
    • 10 tablespoons unsalted butter, melted (150 grams or 1 stick + 2 tablespoons)

    Coconut Filling

    • ¾ cup cream of coconut
    • 4 ounces white chocolate (114 grams)
    • ⅓ cup sour cream, full fat or light
    • 6 tablespoons unsalted butter (90 grams)
    • 3 cups sweetened coconut flakes, packed (255 grams)

    Chocolate Ganache

    • ¼ cup heavy cream
    • 3 tablespoons unsalted butter (45 grams)
    • 2 tablespoons clear corn syrup
    • 4 ounces semisweet chocolate (114 grams)
    • 2 ounces white chocolate (60 grams)

    Instructions
     

    Chocolate Crumb Crust

    • Place the graham crackers, cocoa and powdered sugar in the bowl of a processor. Process until uniform, fine crumbs form.
    • Remove the crumbs to a medium size bowl and add ½ cup of the melted butter. Toss with a fork until all of the crumbs are coated. Pick up a few and press them between your fingers. If they don't stick together well, add the remaining butter 1 tablespoon at a time.
    • Spray the bottom only of the tart pan with a non-stick baking release. Place ⅔ of the crumbs (about 200 grams) evenly around the rim of the pan. Press them firmly into the sides of the pan.
    • Place the remaining crumbs evenly in the bottom of the pan. With your hand or the bottom of a ⅓ cup measure, press the crumbs firmly against the bottom of the pan and the sides of the pan joining those at the bottom of the rim.
    • Refrigerate while preparing the filling.

    Coconut Filling

    • Coarsely chop the white chocolate to make it easier to melt. Place it in a medium size bowl with the cream of coconut.
    • Microwave on half power for about 1 minute. Whisk to smooth out. Microwave for about 20 seconds more if it isn't smooth.The times given are for my microwave and may be different than yours. In any case, err on the side of less heat as white chocolate burns very easily.
    • The bowl may also be placed over barely simmering water that does not touch the bottom of the bowl. Heat, stirring often until the chocolate is melted.
    • Add the butter and whisk in. If it doesn't melt completely, reheat briefly.
    • Whisk in the sour cream until everything is smooth.
    • Add all of the coconut and stir with a spoon to blend the ingredients. Remove the chocolate crust from the fridge and pour the filling into the crust, using an offset spatula to smooth it out. Cover the top with plastic wrap and refrigerate for about 4 hours or overnight.

    Chocolate Ganache and Finishing

    • Place the cream, butter, corn syrup and chocolate in a medium size bowl and microwave for 20 to 30 seconds at half power. Stir (do not whisk or there is a chance of air bubbles forming) until smooth. This may be done over a double boiler also. The ganache should be pourable but not runny. If it is too loose, let it sit at room temperature to thicken.
    • Just before pouring the ganache over the coconut, melt the 2 ounces of white chocolate with very low heat and stir until smooth. Have a toothpick or small wooden skewer close to the tart.
    • Pour the chocolate ganache on top of the coconut filling. Either pick it up and carefully rotate it around so the ganache slides to the inside edge of the tart covering the coconut or spread it with an offset spatula.
    • Immediately, using a soup or serving spoon, dip it into the white chocolate and wave it in circles over the ganache. Quickly, drag the toothpick or skewer through the white chocolate to make a marbleized finish. Try not to go through to the filling. Refrigerate to set up.
    • The tart can be made several days ahead and refrigerated as long as there are no strong smells from other food. Butter and chocolate pick them up. It can also be frozen, then wrapped well in foil and frozen for several months. Thaw in the fridge.
    • This is best served near room temperature - although I have been known to eat it anyway it's available.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
    Unless otherwise noted, salt refers to table salt.
    ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­Nutrition information provided is an estimate and will vary based on cooking methods and brands of ingredients used.
    ______________________________________________________
    The most important tip is to use very little heat for the shortest time when melting white chocolate if there is little or no liquid with it. It burns very easily and there is not saving it after that.
    Always chop any chocolate when melting it. Large pieces will melt unevenly and the smaller pieces can burn while the others need more time to melt.
    When melting any chocolate, it should be heated until about half of the chocolate is hot and melty. Stirring, will melt the remainder. The general rule is chocolate melts between 86 and 90 degrees so very little heat is needed to melt them. 
    The most delicate chocolate to melt is white chocolate. It burns very easily.
    Keep a couple of tablespoons of butter out when adding to the processed crumbs. I have also found, that stirring the butter into the crumbs requires less butter than if added to the processor.
     

    Nutrition

    Serving: 12servingsCalories: 562kcalCarbohydrates: 53gProtein: 4gFat: 39gSaturated Fat: 26gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 8gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 59mgSodium: 161mgPotassium: 239mgFiber: 5gSugar: 41gVitamin A: 657IUVitamin C: 0.2mgCalcium: 65mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Apple Spice Bundt Cake

    Modified: May 1, 2026 · Published: Oct 3, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 9 Comments

    A slice of the Caramel Apple Spiced Cake sits on a white plate with colored leaves with an apple, plaid napkin and the cake in the background.

    What if I were to tell you this Apple Spice Bundt Cake is as easy to make as falling off a log? What's more it has no apples to peel, core and slice and features a secret ingredient. Finished with a Caramel Cream Cheese Frosting, this cake is filled with the warm spices of fall and is sure to be your newest fall cake.

    A slice of the Caramel Apple Spiced Cake sits on a white plate with colored leaves with an apple, plaid napkin and the cake in the background./

    This cake is so easy to make it will go together in about 20 minutes after you measure the ingredients.

    Other cakes I suggest are: Poppyseed Cake with Orange Curd and White Chocolate Buttercream, Chocolate Raspberry Marzipan Gateau, Lemon Rum Bundt Cake, Double Chocolate Mousse Cake and the, Amaretto Truffle Torte. If you are looking for more fall baking ideas, check out Fill Your Home With Autumn Baking.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    The Secret Ingredient Is........

    Apple Butter!! This is not to be confused with applesauce. Apple butter is made during the fall and is often offered then and retired until the next year. Apples are very slowly cooked with sugar and spices until they are dark, sweet, thick and very much apple! It makes the perfect addition to a simple bundt cake and takes it from good to outstanding.

    And About the Caramel Cream Cheese Frosting

    The second surprise is the Caramel Cream Cheese Frosting. Homemade caramel (it's very easy so don't be intimidated!) is teamed with cream cheese for an intense tasting finish to this special cake. That's it. No additional powdered sugar or butter. It's all in the caramel.

    Why both Butter and Oil in the Cake?

    This combination is often used in cakes to insure flavor from the butter and oil to keep the cake moist give it a longer shelf life.

    You're Going to Love this Because:

    • It's super easy to make.
    • The frosting is smooth, delicious and easy to make.
    • It's a fall cake with a difference. No apples to peel, core and slice. That alone has to intrigue you.
    • The flavors pack a punch that makes this memorable.
    • The frosting has the tang of cream cheese and the irresistible flavor of real caramel. It uses no additional ingredients and it's a dream to pipe.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Caramel

    Ingredients for the caramel are water, granulated sugar, heavy cream, butter, vanilla and corn syrup.

    FRONT ROW: Unsalted butter, vanilla, corn syrup

    BACK ROW: Water, granulated sugar, heavy cream

    Apple Spice Bundt Cake

    Ingredients for the Apple Spice Bundt Cake are all-purpose flour, baking soda, baking powder, cinnamon, ginger, nutmeg, cloves, salt, unsalted butter, canola oil, brown sugar, granulated sugar, eggs, vanilla and apple butter.

    FRONT ROW: Salt, ginger, baking soda, cloves, cinnamon

    SECOND ROW: Nutmeg, baking powder, unsalted butter, vanilla

    THIRD ROW: Eggs, brown sugar, granulated sugar

    BACK ROW: All-purpose flour, canola or vegetable oil, apple butter

    Caramel Cream Cheese Frosting

    Ingredietns for the caramel cheesecake filling are homemade caraamel and cream cheese.

    LEFT TO RIGHT: Caramel and Cream Cheese

    Main Ingredients

    • Heavy cream is essential to the outcome of the caramel.
    • Thick apple butter (not applesauce) is used.
    • Either canola or vegetable oil should be used.
    • The cream cheese can be full fat or ⅓ fat.

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    Caramel

    Heat the cream in a microwave or on the stove until steamy hot but not boiling. Set aside. For more information on making caramel, please see my post, Caramel, a Building Block of Pastry.

    The first collage for caramel shows sugar and water in saucepan, the saucepan covered, the syrup at a rolling boil and the bronze color of the sugar syrup.

    Step 1. Stir the water, corn syrup and sugar in a medium saucepan over medium high heat. Bring it to a boil. Step 2. Cover the pan tightly for 3 minutes or brush down the sides of the pan with cold water to remove any sugar crystals that could cause the caramel to granulate after cooling. Step 3. Bring the mixture to a rolling boil. Step 4. Boil it until it reaches a medium golden color.

    The second caramel collage shows the butter added to the bronze syrup, the cream and vanilla added, the caramel brought to a hard boil again and the finished caramel in a bowl.

    Step 5. Remove the pan from the heat and stir in the butter until it is melted. Step 6. Add the hot cream and stir it in. If it wasn't hot enough and it lumps somewhat, that's fine. It will be corrected in the next step. Step 7. Return to the heat and bring it back to a boil until the temperature reaches 228°F. Remove from the heat immediately and pour it into a bowl to cool or if in a hurry, pour it into a rimmed sheet pan where it can spread out.

    Apple Spice Bundt Cake

    The first collage for the Apple Spice Bundt Cake shows the flour, spices, baking powder and baking soda in a bowl, then mixed, the butter, brown and granulated sugar and butter in the bowl of a mixer, then mixed.

    Step 1. Place the flour, spices, salt, baking powder and baking soda in a medium bowl. Step 2. Whisk them together and set aside. Step 3. Place the brown and granulated sugar, the softened butter and oil in the bowl of a mixer fitted with a paddle attachment. Step 4. Mix on low to bring together and then raise to medium. Mix to combine, scraping often, especially on the bottom.

    This collages for the cakes shows the eggs and vanilla added to the mixing bow and mixed, half  the applesauce added, followed by the flour and the whole mixed.

    Step 5. Add the eggs and vanilla to the batter and mix to combine. Step 6. Add half the apples butter and beat until combined. Step 7. Add half the flour. Step 8. Beat in on low, scraping often. Repeat with the remaining apple butter and flour.

    This collage shows the batter in the bundt pan and baked.  The caramel and cream in a mixing bowl and the finished frosting.

    Step 9. Spray the bundt pan well with a non-stick baking spray. Dollop the batter evenly into the bundt pan and smooth it out. Step 10. Bake as called for. Step 11. Place the room temperature caramel and cream cheese in the bowl of a mixer. Step 12. Beat on low to mix and then raise to medium or medium high and beat until smooth and completely combined. Scrape often to ensure an even frosting.

    The last collage shows the cake turned out cooling on a rack, the buttercream being applied and the finished ake.

    Step 13. Cool the cake in its pan for about 20 minutes. Turn it out onto a rack to cool completely, then transfer to a serving dish or cardboard round. Step 14. Place a ½" plain tip in a piping bag and pipe frosting between the lines starting about 2" above the bottom as shown. Step 15. Pipe the frosting up the side of the bake in the natural divide, then up and over the top into the hole. Step 16. After all of these have been piped, go back and pipe in the same manner between the already piped lines as seen in the this photo. Alternatively, omit the frosting and dust with powdered sugar.

    Recipe FAQS

    Why are Bundt cakes so popular?

    They are easy to make, require no filling and no fancy finishes.

    Are there more than one design of the bundt pan?

    There used to be one design, but in ensuing years, there are many different designs including seasonal ones. Just make sure the cup size is correct for the recipe being made.

    How much batter does a bundt cake pan hold?

    There are different sizes so it's important to check to make sure the pan you have will hold enough batter. The traditional Nordic Bundt pan holds 12 cups. However, the pan should only be filled to ⅔ to ¾ full with cake batter to allow it to rise without going over the edge of the pan.

    Expert Tips

    • Use a scale to measure the flour - it makes all the difference in the world. I just bought a new one that can be recharged - love the no more batteries. You can find it here. (I am not an affiliate.)
    • Use a thick apple butter.
    • The caramel can be made a week ahead. Just bring it to room temperature or microwave it briefly. Don't get it hot.
    • ⅓ less cream cheese works as well as full fat.
    • McCormick Imitation vanilla is fine here.
    A slice of the Caramel Apple Spiced Cake sits on a white plate with colored leaves with an apple, plaid napkin and the cake in the background.

    More Fall Treats

    • Pumpkin Mousse with a graham cracker crust, cheesecake layer topped with pumpkin mousse finished with a wreath of whipped cream
      Pumpkin Mousse Torte Recipe
    • Finished Whole, Cut
      27 Layer Tuile Torte
    • Orange Bread Pudding
      Orange Bread Pudding
    • Four Halloween cookies on a white plate wih a glass of milk and several gourds in the background,
      Halloween Cookie Recipe

     
    A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it and I appreciate you.  

    A slice of the Caramel Apple Spiced Cake sits on a white plate with colored leaves with an apple, plaid napkin and the cake in the background.

    Caramel Apple Spice Bundt Cake

    Helen S. Fletcher
    What if I were to tell you this Caramel Apple Spiced Bundt Cake is as easy to make as falling off a log? What's more it has no apples to peel, core and slice and features a secret ingredient. Finished with a Caramel Cream Cheese Frosting, this cake is filled with the warm spices of fall, is sure to be your newest fall cake.
    5 from 5 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 35 minutes mins
    Cook Time 45 minutes mins
    Total Time 1 hour hr 20 minutes mins
    Course Cake
    Cuisine American
    Servings 12 servings
    Calories 687 kcal

    Equipment

    • 10 to 12 cup Bundt Pan
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Caramel

    • 1 cup water
    • ½ cup corn syrup
    • 1 ¼ cup granulated sugar (250 grams)
    • 4 tablespoons butter (60 grams)
    • 1 cup heavy cream
    • 2 teaspoons vanilla

    Apple Spice Bundt Cake

    • 2 cups +2 tablespoons all-purpose flour (300 grams)
    • 2 teaspoons baking powder
    • 1 teaspoon baking soda
    • 2 teaspoons cinnamon
    • ¾ teaspoon ginger
    • ½ teaspoon nutmeg
    • ¼ teaspoon cloves
    • ½ teaspoon table salt
    • ½ cup unsalted butter, softened (114 grams) or 1 stick
    • ½ cup canola or vegetable oil
    • ⅞ cup brown sugar, packed (175 grams) [1 cup less 2 tablespoons]
    • ½ cup granulated sugar (100 grams)
    • 3 large eggs
    • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract
    • 1 ½ cups thick apple butter (430 grams)

    Caramel Cheesecake Frosting

    • 8 ounces caramel, room temperature (225 grams)
    • 8 ounces cream cheese, room temperature (225 grams)

    Instructions
     

    Caramel

    • Heat the cream until hot to make it easier to mix with the sugar syrup. Set aside.
    • Place the water, sugar and corn syrup in a 2 quart saucepan.
    • Stir over medium high heat until the sugar is dissolved completely. Bring to a boil. Cover the pan with a tight fitting lid for 3 minutes. Remove the lid and continue boiling. Alternatively, wash the sides of the pan down with a natural bristle pastry brush dipped in cold water.
    • Boil without stirring until the mixture becomes a medium golden color. Swirl in the pan to even out the color.
    • Remove from the heat and immediately add the butter to the saucepan and stir until melted.
    • Pour the hot cream in all at once and stir. If some of the cream lumps up, don't worry.
    • Clip a thermometer onto the side of the pan if possible. Return to medium high heat and bring to a hard boil.
    • Continue to boil until the thermometer reaches 228°F. Cool to room temperature. To cool it quickly, after it comes to temperature, pour it onto a rimmed sheet pan where it will spread out and cool while you prepare the cake.
    • This yields 2 cups are about 1 pound.

    Apple Spice Bundt Cake

    • Preheat the oven to 350°F with the rack in the center of the oven. Have the bundt pan nearby.
    • In a medium bowl, combine the flour, baking powder, baking soda, spices and salt. Whisk to mix.
    • Place the softened butter, oil, brown and granulated sugars in the bowl of a mixer fitted with a paddle attachment. Beat until completely combined.
    • Add the eggs and vanilla and incorporate into the mixture, scraping often and into the bottom of the bowl.
    • Mix in half of the apple butter, followed by half of the flour. Repeat with the remaining apple butter and flour.
    • Spray the bundt pan well with a non-stick baking release. Dollop the batter evenly into the pan. Smooth it out.
    • Bake for 40 to 45 minutes or until a cake tester comes out clean. Place the pan on a cooling rack and allow to cool for about 15 to 20 minutes. Place a round cake cooling rack over the top of the bundt pan and carefully flip it over to release the cake. Allow it to cool completely before finishing.

    Caramel Cream Cheese Frosting

    • It is important that the ingredients are at room temperature. Place them in the bowl of a mixer fitted with the paddle attachment.
    • Beat them on low to bring them together and then on medium high until they are completely combined. Scrape the sides and bottom often.

    Finishing the Cake

    • Fit a pastry bag with a ½" plain pastry tip. Fill the bag and pipe the frosting onto the cake as shown in the pictures above.
    • Let the frosting set up briefly and the cake is ready to cut and serve. It can be held at room temperature for a day and then refrigerated if held longer. Bring to room temperature to serve.
    • Alternatively, omit the frosting and dust with powdered sugar.
    • Yields 12 servings.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
     Unless otherwise noted, salt refers to table salt.
    ­­­­­­­­­­­­­Nutrition information provided is an estimate and will vary based on cooking methods and brands of ingredients used.
    _____________________________________________________
    Use a scale to measure the flour - it makes all the difference in the world. I just bought a new one that can be recharged - love the no more batteries. You can find it  here. (I am not an affiliate.)
    Use a thick apple butter. Do not  use apple sauce.
    The caramel can be made a week ahead. Just bring it to room temperature or microwave it briefly. Don't get it hot.
    ⅓ less cream cheese works as well as full fat.
    McCormick Imitation vanilla is fine here.
    For more information on making caramel please see my post on Caramel, a Building Block of Pastry

    Nutrition

    Serving: 12servingsCalories: 687kcalCarbohydrates: 88gProtein: 4gFat: 37gSaturated Fat: 17gPolyunsaturated Fat: 5gMonounsaturated Fat: 13gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 120mgSodium: 439mgPotassium: 164mgFiber: 1gSugar: 82gVitamin A: 983IUVitamin C: 0.4mgCalcium: 132mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Cheddar Bacon Popovers Recipe

    Modified: May 1, 2026 · Published: Sep 30, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 5 Comments

    A single Cheddar Bacon Popover in it's pan sits on a cooling rack.

    This Cheddar Bacon Popovers Recipe will be the easiest you will ever make. There is easy and then there is POPOVER EASY! Think about this. All of the ingredients, except the cheese and bacon go into a processor or blender and that's pretty much it. Process or blend, portion out the bacon, pour the batter over, sprinkle with cheese and in the oven they go.

    A single Cheddar Bacon Popover in it's pan sits on a cooling rack.

    With its cheesy top and bits of bacon, this is the perfect accompaniment to almost anything or just for a snack. The bacon and cheese really come through.

    Often compared to Yorkshire pudding and crepes, popovers can be plain, enhanced as I did or add parmesan cheese, basil and oregano for an Italian version, or lemon and feta for a Greek version.

    Other quick breads I think you'll enjoy are: Buttermilk Flatbreads, Cream Biscuits, Cinnamon Filled Buttermilk Scones, and Traditional Irish Soda Bread. For more incredible bread inspiration, check out Unforgettable Breads to Bake and Share

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    The Popover Pan

    A rack of 6 popover molds sits on a baking pan.

    This is the traditional popover pan. There are 6 cups attached between rails so the heat can get around them evenly. It is easier and safer to put them on a half sheet pan to move them in and out of the oven. The cups are tapered at the bottom to encourage the "popover".

    Do you have to bake in these? No, the popovers can be made in muffin cups but they don't have the same look but are just as good.

    Why is it called a Popover?

    Because it can literally turn over in the pan while baking. You can see it here on the front and back left side.

    Here are six popovers in their pan on a cooling rack.

    Custard or No Custard?

    I'm not sure who came up with the description that includes the custardy inside. What is inside is unbaked dough! The definition of custard is a mixture of milk, sugar and eggs as its base where the eggs act as the thickener. It has a smooth, creamy texture with no flour in site.

    The doughy inside comes from either overfilling the popover cups or underbaking the popover or both. Very little batter goes into the cup which is why it is so amazing that they rise so high. The dough inside is also the reason so many recipes call for rushing to the table before they deflate. The uncooked dough inside retains heat and steam which quickly deflates the popovers and they become soft and soggy.

    But the bottom line is there is no custard in a popover. My popovers are a crispy outside surrounding a hole in the middle. You can see it here along with the bacon and the cheese. There is no need to rush them to the table because they don't deflate. They stay crisp.

    This photo shows a open popover with the inside empty,

    Recipe Ingredients

    Ingredients for the pOpovers include eggs, milk, butter, bread flour, salt, cooked bacon and cheddar cheese..

    FRONT ROW: Cheddar cheese, salt, cooked bacon

    BACK ROW: Eggs, bread flour, 2% milk

    Essential Ingredients

    Bread flour is used for its strength. It will hold the popover up while they get set in the oven. It also makes a crisper crust that stays that way.

    2% milk or a combination of whole milk and water is important to the end result of the the popovers. I give you the choice in the recipe.

    While I give you a weight for the bacon, it depends upon the bacon. Some render out more fat than others.

    The eggs are size large.

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    This collage for the Cheddar Bacon Popvers include the bacon being cut, the cooked bacon, the ingredients in the food processor and then processed.

    Step 1. I have found the easiest way to cut the bacon for this is the just slice it vertically. Step 2. Place the slices in a frying pan and fry it over low to medium heat until they are crisp and the fat is rendered out. The bacon will separate out into individual pieces as it fries. Step 3. Place the eggs, 2% milk or the milk and water, melted butter, bread flour and salt in the bowl of a processor or blender. Step 4. Process or blend until smooth.

    The second collage shows a popover cup well sprayed with baking release, the bacon in the bottom, the batter being poured in and the cheese on top,

    Step 5. Spray the cups and lips of the cups very well with a non-stick baking release. Step 6. Place 1/12 of the bacon in each cup. Step 7. Pour ¼ cup batter over the bacon. Step 8. Top with 1/12 of the grated cheese.

    The last collage shows a 6 cup popover pan filled, the baked popovers on a rack, a knife slitting the top of one and a popover opened up to expose the inside.

    Step 9. Place the rack of popover pans on a half sheet pan. Step 10. Bake as called for. You can see some of them have popped over. Step 11. Immediately, upon taking the popovers out of the oven, slit the top to release any steam inside. Step 12. One of the popovers opened up. This is how they should look. They should not be doughy inside.

    Recipe FAQS

    How does a popover rise so high with no leavening agent?

    There are four ways products rise. They are yeast, chemical leaveners like baking powder and baking soda, air (think angel food cake) and steam (think choux paste for cream puffs and popovers).

    Is the thickness of the batter important?

    Yes, the batter needs to the very thin and pourable. That is one reason 2% milk is better than whole milk in this recipe because it is thinner. Water can be used to dilute the whole milk.

    Why are popovers baked at such a high temperature?

    It is important to heat the popovers quickly so the steam can push them up. Too low a temperature will result in popovers that are not as high and crisp and may end up doughy inside.

    Expert Tips

    • There is a lot of discussion about whether to rest the batter, refrigerate overnight, use it cold, bring it to room temperature and more. I usually let mine rest for an hour at room temperature like I do my crepe batter. It's mainly to let the gluten relax for the highest lift. If you don't have time, just use it right away.
    • For me, popovers are a super quick bread to make for a meal or a snack. This aren't rocket science.
    • The oven temperature is of great importance. Make sure to preheat at least 15 to 20 minutes before baking them. The liquid needs to get hot as soon as possible to make the steam that will cause the lift.
    • Also, there are a lot of people that say you can't open the oven ever, ever, ever until they are done. That too is a bunch of poppycock. I usually wait until they are risen and then peek if I feel the need to. No need? Don't peek!
    The last photo shows baked popovers out of their pans on a cooling rack.

    Here's a Few Other Quick Breads to Enjoy

    • Slices of Date Nut Bread on a plate with walnut halves and dates around it.
      Date Nut Bread
    • Scone with Cranberry Strawberry Jam on a plate
      Scones with Cranberry Strawberry Jam
    • Two slices of Chocolate Orange Raisin bread on a white plate with a cup of tea next to it and lavender flowers.
      Chocolate Orange Raisin Bread-A Favorite Homemade Bread
    • Slices of Banana Bread in a circle with strawberries in the middle on a blue and white plate.
      Best Two Step Banana Nut Bread

    A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it and I appreciate you.  

    A single Cheddar Bacon Popover in it's pan sits on a cooling rack.

    Cheddar Bacon Popovers Recipe

    Helen S. Fletcher
    This Cheddar Bacon Popovers Recipe will be the easiest you will ever make. There is easy and then there is POPOVER EASY! All of the ingredients, except the cheese and bacon go into a processor or blender and that's pretty much it. Just bake and eat!
    5 from 1 vote
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 25 minutes mins
    Cook Time 35 minutes mins
    Total Time 1 hour hr
    Course Popovers, Quick Bread
    Cuisine American
    Servings 9 servings
    Calories 224 kcal

    Equipment

    • 2 6 well popover pans or regular muffin pans
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    • 8 ounces bacon
    • ⅔ cup sharp cheddar cheese, shredded
    • 3 tablespoons unsalted butter, melted (45 grams)
    • 4 large eggs
    • 1 ½ cups 2% milk*
    • 1 ½ cups bread flour (210 grams)**
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • *1 ¼ cup whole milk + ¼ cup water may be substituted.
    • **All-purpose flour can be used but the they will be less crisp and may not rise as high.

    Instructions
     

    • Cut the bacon vertically about ½" wide strips and fry until golden and crisp. See the photo above for the easiest way to cut this.
    • Place all the remaining ingredients in the bowl of a processor or blender. Process or blend to mix completely so it is smooth with no lumps.
    • The batter can be used at once but if you let it rest an hour at room temperature, the popovers will rise a bit higher.
    • Preheat the oven to 450°F with the baking rack on the lowest rung. Position the other rack on the very top rung of the oven. Spray the popover wells, including the top rims with a non-stick baking release.
    • Place the popover pans on half sheet pans to make it easier and safer to move in and out of the oven. Divide the fried bacon between the 12 cups. Pour ⅓ cup batter over the bacon. Divide the cheese evenly over the batter.
    • Make sure the oven is at temperature before putting the popovers in - this is very important for the rise.
    • The popovers can be baked one pan at a time if there isn't room in the oven. Just leave the second pan out at room temperature.
    • Bake the popovers for 20 minutes. Lower the heat to 350°F. Bake for an additional 10 to 15 minutes until they are a deep golden brown.
    • Immediately upon removing them from the oven, release the steam inside by sticking the tip of a knife in the top of the popover. Remove them from their pans immediately. Serve warm or cool and freeze.
    • To reheat: Preheat the oven to 350°F. Place them on a bakong while frozen. Heat for 10 to 15 minutes oruntil warmed through. Serve Warm.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above. If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article. Many of them will be answered there. 
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency. Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume. For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
     Unless otherwise noted, salt refers to table salt.
    ­­­­­­­­­­­­Nutrition information provided is an estimate and will vary based on cooking methods and brands of ingredients used.
    _________________________________________________
    There is a lot of discussion about whether to rest the batter, refrigerate overnight, use it cold, bring it to room temperature and more. I usually let mine rest for an hour at room temperature like I do my crepe batter. It's mainly to let the gluten relax for the highest lift. If you don't have time, just use it right away. 
    For me, popovers are a super quick bread to make for a meal or a snack. These aren't rocket science. 
    The oven temperature is of great importance. Make sure to preheat at least 15 to 20 minutes before baking them. The liquid needs to get hot as soon as possible to make the steam that will cause the lift. 
    Also, there are a lot of people that say you can't open the oven ever, ever, ever until they are done. That too is a bunch of poppycock. I usually wait until they are risen and then peek if I feel the need to. No need? Don't peek!
     

    Nutrition

    Serving: 9servingsCalories: 224kcalCarbohydrates: 17gProtein: 14gFat: 11gSaturated Fat: 6gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 3gTrans Fat: 0.2gCholesterol: 104mgSodium: 739mgPotassium: 114mgFiber: 1gSugar: 2gVitamin A: 361IUVitamin C: 0.1mgCalcium: 123mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Chocolate Babka Recipe

    Modified: May 1, 2026 · Published: Sep 23, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 5 Comments

    Several slices of the swirly Chocolate Babka is shown along with the whole in the background.

    My Chocolate Babka Recipe is a visually stunning sweet bread that has a couple of tips to help you shape this marvelous filled yeast dough. For the chocolate filling, I simply used Nutella to highlight the sweet dough for an unparalleled treat that is easier to make than it looks. It's very straight forward to make and easy to twist using a much easier technique than most recipes. So if you're thinking twice about making this, let me assure you, you can make this!

    Several slices of the swirly Chocolate Babka is shown along with the whole in the background.

    Babka is a sweet bread from old world Poland and Ukraine and while many recipes fill it with cinnamon sugar, when the new world took a look at it the filling quickly changed to chocolate or almost anything.

    Other sweet breads I love are: Lemon Sugar Buns, Orange Macadamia Rolls Recipe, Brandied Chocolate Cherry Almond Garmisch, and my Best Cinnamon Rolls with Cinnamon Crunch Topping (think Panera's Cinnamon Crunch Bagel topping). For more baking inspiration, check out Kick-Start Your Holiday Spirit: Cookies & Breads to Bake Now.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What's so special about this Babka

    Everything is the answer! The dough is enriched with butter, eggs, and sugar providing an easy to roll out dough which is filled with Nutella. I used my mothers enriched yeast dough from European Nut Roll with Three Fillings.

    Babka is recognizable from it's distinctive swirly inside made by rolling the dough as if making cinnamon rolls then twisting it to further shape it inside. It can be finished with a crumb coating or a shiny, simple sweet glaze. I chose the glaze for a beautiful finish that enhances the Babka.

    The basic steps are to make the dough, let it rise then chill overnight to make it a snap to roll out with no spring back. It is then filled, rolled tightly like a cinnamon roll dough but there the difference stops. Most recipes call for the dough to be slit from top to bottom and then twisted. I did this the first time and there is no way to adequately describe the mess it makes. There was chocolate all over the table, my hands, and me. So much so, I almost gave up at that point.

    Since I'm not easily defeated in the kitchen, I went back and researched some more. I found a recipe for Chocolate Babka from Martha Stewart where I found the perfect method for shaping and swirling the dough without the mess Unfortunately, when I went to her site to link it, it is no longer there. I am sharing this method with you.

    Why You'll Love this Recipe

    • The dough is a snap to make and roll out.
    • The filling is Nutella - what more can I say?
    • The shaping is sooooo much easier than the traditional method.
    • It is a treat for your taste buds.
    • Make sure you serve it to special friends who will thank you over and over!
    • It isn't difficult to make, just follow the pictures and the steps and you'll have a stunner that looks like you bought it from a European bakery.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Yeast Dough

    Ingredients for the Chocolate Babka Recipe include: Yeast, milk, sugar, salt, unsalted butter, whole egg, egg yolk, vanilla flour and  Nutella.

    COUNTERCLOCKWISE FROM TOP LEFT: Bread flour, egg + egg yolk, milk, unsalted butter, vanilla, salt, yeast.

    IN MIDDLE: Water, granulate sugar

    Filling, Shaping and Finishing

    The ingredients for the fillings and finishes of the Chocolate Babka are granulated sugar, nutella, water, cream and egg yolk.

    FRONT ROW (egg wash): Cream, egg yolk

    BACK ROW: Granulated sugar, Nutella, Water (sugar & water for the simple syrup, Nutella for the filling

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients and instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    Yeast Dough

    The first collage shows the milk being heated, the butter, sugar and salt added to the hot milk then transferred to a mixing bowl, and being whisked.

    Step 1. Stir the yeast into the water and set aside. Heat the milk to simmering. Step 2. Add the butter, sugar and salt. Stir to melt the butter. If all of it doesn't melt, reheat briefly. Step 5. Pour into the bowl of a mixer. Step 4. Whisk together and cool to lukewarm. Whisk in the water and yeast.

    This collage shows the flour added ot the mixing bowl, the dough hanging off the dough hook, a small piece of dough stretched into a window pane and the finished dough in a rising container.

    Step 5. Add the flour all at once to the mixing bowl. Step 6. Fit the mixer with a dough hook if available. Mix on low until it comes together and then on whatever speed your mixer suggests for yeast doughs. Beat until it cleans the side of the bowl. Step 7. Take a small piece of dough and stretch it between your fingers. If you can see through it the dough is finished. This is called a windowpane test. If the dough breaks and will not stretch, then beat it for a couple of more minutes. Repeat the windowpane test. Step 8. For the first rise, place the finished dough in a container at least twice as big that has been sprayed with a non-stick baking release. Cover the dough and mark the top with the time. Allow the dough to rise until doubled in bulk. This can be a slow riser due to the enrichment of egg, sugar and butter. Deflate the dough and refrigerate overnight to make it easier to roll the next day. It can be refrigerated up to 3 days before using.

    This collage shows the dough rolled out, the nutella spread on, the dough rolled up and he seam being moistened, the dough and ends being pinched together.

    Step 9. Remove the dough from the fridge. Spray a 9x5" pan with a non-stick baking release. Roll the dough into an 18" x 24" rectangle on a lightly floured surface. If the dough is really soft, fold it in quarters, place it on a parchment paper lined sheet pan and put it int the freezer for a few minutes to firm up. . Step 10. Turn the dough so the 18" side is in front of you. Spread the nutella to within ½" inch of the edges of the dough. If the nutella is too stiff to spread easily, microwave it briefly to a spreadable consistency. Step 11. Roll the dough tightly. When you get to the end, wet it lightly with water. Step 12. Pinch the seam together as well as the ends to seal them.

    This collage shows the roll being twisted, nutella spread on half of the twisted roll, the the plain half folded over the nutella, the babka with the pan behind it and the babka in the pan.

    Step 13. Take the roll in each hand and twist each hand in the opposite direction. Twist has hard as possible to make them very tight. Twist a second time. Step 14. Spread the reserved 2 tablespoons nutella over half of the twist. Step 15. Fold the plain side over the nutella. Step 15. Spray a 9x5" loaf pan with a non-stick baking release. Twist the babka again as much as you can and tuck it into the prepared loaf pan. Flatten it with your hand. Cover and give it a second rise until doubled.

    The last collage shows the babka in the pan, it is baked, holes are bing punched with a cake tester and the simple syrup poured over the chocolate babka.

    Step 17. When the Chocolate Babka has doubled in the pan, brush it with the egg wash. Brush it again just before it goes into the oven. Step 18. Bake it on the middle rack of the oven as directed. While the babka is baking, prepare the simple syrup. Let it simmer for 1 minutes. Step 19. Poke holes all over the babka with a cake tester. Go almost to the bottom but not through it. Step 20. Pour the prepared simple syrup mixture over the babka and let it cool. Serve or freeze.

    Recipe FAQS

    Where did Babka come from?

    We have the Jewish settlements in Poland and Ukraine to thank for Babka. In the 1800's the bakeries would use their traditional challah bread that is enriched with eggs and butter as a base, roll it out, fill it with cinnamon sugar or jam, roll it up and bake it in a round pan for a sweet treat.

    What doughs are used for Babka?

    Doughs that are enriched with eggs, butter and sugar are used. Think, challah, brioche dough or any enriched yeasted sweet dough.

    What fillings can be used for Babka?

    Anything you fill a sweet roll with - cinnamon and sugar, poppyseed filling, cream cheese, chocolate, jams or preserves, almond paste, apricot or prune lekvar are just a few of the possibilities

    Expert Tips

    • The butter, eggs and sugar in the dough are referred to as a rich dough as opposed to lean doughs that refer to breads which contain flour, water,salt and yeast.
    • Refrigerating this dough allows the gluten to rest as well as firm up the dough with it's high butter content making it really easy to roll out with no spring back.
    • Rolling the dough up tightly and then twisting it as much as possible makes the swirly inside that is indicative of babka.
    • If at any point the dough becomes too soft to work, simply put it on a parchment lined baking sheet and refrigerate or freeze briefly to firm it up again.
    • I prefer to cover my dough when rising with a tea towel and not plastic wrap. If the item rises above the rim of the pan, the plastic wrap can inhibit any further rise if it is too tightly bound to the pan.
    • To make a proofer If the room is really cool, place the container in the oven with the light on. Do not turn the oven on. The light will provide enough heat to make a proofer. Check the temperature after about an hour. Make sure it isn't over about 90°F. If it is, place a wooden spoon in the door to keep it ajar about ½" to moderate the temperature. This works with any yeast dough.
    • Do not store this in the refrigerator. Refrigeration drys out breads.

    Storage and Freezing

    The babka will last, covered at room temperature for several days. Do not refrigerate. For longer storage, bake it and soak it, then freeze it. Wrap it well and it will last for several months in the freezer. Thaw it at room temperature and freshen it in a 350°F oven. Wrap it in aluminum foil, leaving a small opening in the top and heat for about 20 minutes.

    Several slices of the swirly Chocolate Babka is shown along with the whole in the background.

    More Sweet Breads to Tempt You

    • Five Mexican sweet rolls, Conchas with different toppings.
      Conchas - A Mexican Sweet Bread
    • Gibassier - A French Breakfast Treat
    • A Swedish Cardamom Knot sits on a blue and white plate
      Swedish Cardamom Yeast Rolls
    • A slice of Lemon Glazed Lemon Twists made with Sixty Second Brioche
      60 Second Brioche

    A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it and I appreciate you.  

    Several slices of the swirly Chocolate Babka is shown along with the whole in the background.

    Chocolate Babka Recipe

    Helen S. Fletcher
    My Chocolate Babka Recipe with its nutella filling is a visually stunning sweet bread that has a couple of tips to help you shape this marvelous swirlly filled yeast dough.
    5 from 2 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 1 hour hr
    Cook Time 45 minutes mins
    Course Sweet Bread
    Cuisine American
    Servings 10 servings
    Calories 426 kcal

    Equipment

    • 9 x 5" loaf pan
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Yeast Dough

    • 2 ¼ teaspoon active dry yeast
    • 2 tablespoons water
    • ⅓ cup milk, whole or 2%
    • ¼ cup granulated sugar (50 grams)
    • ½ teaspoon table salt
    • ½ cup unsalted butter (114 grams or 1 stick)
    • 1 large egg
    • 1 large egg yolk
    • ½ teaspoon vanilla
    • 2 ½ cups bread flour (350 grams)

    Filling and Finishing

    • 1 cup + 2 tablespoons Nutella (320 grams)
    • 1 large egg yolk
    • 1 tablespoon cream
    • ½ cup water
    • ½ cup granulated sugar (100 grams)

    Instructions
     

    Yeast Dough

    • Dissolve the yeast in the water. Set aside.
    • Heat the milk to simmering. Remove from the heat and add the sugar, butter and salt. Stir to dissolve and cool to lukewarm.
    • Transfer to a mixing bowl and add the egg, egg yolk and vanilla. Fit the mixer with a dough hook. Add half the flour and beat until smooth. Add the remaining flour and again, beat until smooth. Knead in the machine for 3 minutes, turning it half way through. It will be a very soft dough.
    • Take a small piece of dough and stretch it between your fingers. If you can see through it, it's fine. If it doesn't or if it breaks, knead it for another minute or two in the machine. Test it until you can see through it. (See the photo in the Step by Step instructions). This is referred to as the windowpane test and should be used on yeast doughs to determine the strength of the gluten.
    • Spray a container at least twice the size of the dough with a non-stick baking release. Remove the dough from the mixer and place in the container turning it over so the top will be greased also. Cover with a piece of plastic wrap and allow to rise until doubled - about 1 ½ hours.
    • If the room is really cool, place the container in the oven with the light on. Do not turn the oven on. The light will provide enough heat to make a proofer. Check the temperature after about an hour. Make sure it isn't over about 90°F. If it is, place a wooden spoon in the door to keep it ajar about ½" to moderate the temperature. This works with any yeast dough.
    • Deflate, cover again and refrigerate overnight or up to 3 days.

    Filling, Shaping and Finishing

    • Spray a 9" x 5" loaf pan with a non-stick baking release. Set aside.
    • Roll the dough into an 18" x 24" rectangle. Turn the dough so the 18" side is in front of you. If at any point the dough softens too much and is difficult to work, place it on a baking sheet (fold it to fit) and place it in the fridge or freezer to firm it up. Unfold, smooth out any wrinkles and continue.
    • Reserving 2 tablespoons of nutella, spread the remainder (1 cup) over the dough to within ½" of all the edges. Roll up tightly to within the last inch. Lightly wet the edge of the dough and finish rolling. Pinch the seam and ends together.
    • Taking one end of the roll in each hand, twist in opposite directions. Twist as hard as you can or several times to maximize the twists.
    • Spread the last 2 tablespoons of nutella on half the twisted roll. Fold the plain twist on top of the nutella and press down. Twist it again as much as you can.
    • Place it in the the prepared pan and press down to flatten. Cover and let rise until doubled.
    • Preheat the oven to 350°F.
    • While the oven is preheating, combine the egg yolk and cream. Just before putting the babka in the oven, brush it with the egg wash. Let it sit for 5 minutes and brush again to give it that really deep, shiny finish when baked.
    • Bake for 45 to 55 minutes until dark brown and a tester comes out clean and the babka sounds hollow when tapped.
    • While the babka is baking, combine the ½ cup water and ½ cup granulated sugar in a small saucepan. Bring to a boil and boil for 1 minute. Remove from the heat and cool.
    • When the babka is baked, immediately poke holes all over the cake with a cake tester. Spoon the simple syrup evenly over the babka. Cool for about 30 minutes and then turn it out if all of the syrup has been absorebed onto a cooling rack to cool completely.
    • Slice and serve. The babka will keep covered for a couple of days at room temperature. For longer storage, freeze, wrap well and keep frozen for several months. Thaw at room temperature. To freshen, wrap in foil, leaving a small opening at the top. Place in a preheated 350°F oven for about 20 minutes until warmed through.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
    Unless otherwise noted, salt refers to table salt.
    ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­Nutrition information provided is an estimate and will vary based on cooking methods and brands of ingredients used.
    _____________________________________________________
    The butter, eggs and sugar in the dough are referred to as a rich dough as opposed to lean doughs that refer to breads which contain flour, water,salt and yeast.
    Refrigerating this dough allows the gluten to rest as well as firm up the dough with it's high butter content making it really easy to roll out with no spring back. 
    Rolling the dough up tightly and then twisting it as much as possible makes the swirly inside that is indicative of babka.
    If at any point the dough becomes too soft to work, simply put it on a parchment lined baking sheet and refrigerate or freeze briefly to firm it up again.
    I prefer to cover my dough when rising with a tea towel and not plastic wrap. If the item rises above the rim of the pan, the plastic wrap can inhibit any further rise if it is too tightly bound to the pan. 
    To make a proofer f the room is really cool, place the container in the oven with the light on. Do not turn the oven on. The light will provide enough heat to make a proofer. Check the temperature after about an hour. Make sure it isn't over about 90°F. If it is, place a wooden spoon in the door to keep it ajar about ½" to moderate the temperature. This works with any yeast dough.
    Do not store this in the refrigerator. Refrigeration drys out breads. 
     

    Nutrition

    Serving: 10servingsCalories: 426kcalCarbohydrates: 55gProtein: 7gFat: 20gSaturated Fat: 14gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 3gTrans Fat: 0.4gCholesterol: 82mgSodium: 143mgPotassium: 174mgFiber: 2gSugar: 30gVitamin A: 396IUVitamin C: 0.01mgCalcium: 55mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Best Spiced Shortbread Cookies

    Modified: May 1, 2026 · Published: Sep 19, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 9 Comments

    A white bowl holds single Spiced Shortbread cookies on a marble background with a broken sandwiched cookie in the foreground.

    These Best Spiced Shortbread Cookies are one of the easiest and simplest to make. Three ingredients plus the two flavorings are all that is needed and I'll bet they're in you pantry and fridge already. Now imagine these are sandwiched with a chocolate sour cream ganache. This shortbread uses Chinese 5 Spice powder or cinnamon.

    A white bowl holds single Spiced Shortbread cookies on a marble background with a broken sandwiched cookie in the foreground.

    This is the same basic shortbread we used at the bakery. I am so in love the shortbread cookies, there is a whole chapter in my Craving Cookies cookbook. If available, European Butter is perfect for these cookies.

    While I include mixing methods for both the processor and mixer, I am showing you the mixer in the instructions.

    Other interesting shortbread cookies include: Viennese Whirls, Easy Decorated Shortbread Cookies, Tropical Shortbread Cookies (think coconut and macadamia nuts), Peppermint Ravioli Cookies, and everybody's favorite, the savory Cheddar Pecan Shortbreads. And lets not forget about Irresistible White Chocolate Pistachio Cookies.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What is Chinese 5 Spice Powder

    Chinese 5 Spice is typically a blend of five different spices -  star anise, cloves, Chinese cinnamon, Sichuan peppercorns, and fennel seeds. It is use in savory recipes as well as sweet. Star anise and fennel both taste to a greater or lesser degree like licorice.

    The same amount of cinnamon can be substituted if desired.

    What Makes a Shortbread Cookie

    Traditional shortbread cookies are basically made with butter, flour, and sugar, either granulated or powdered sugar. No eggs, baking powder or baking soda are used. They are tender and have a melt in your mouth texture. Having said that, additions are anything you want from nuts to citrus zest, and extracts. The dough can be used for cookies, cookie bases, and pastry crusts.

    These are one of the easiest cookies to make.....and to enjoy!

    Why You'll Want to Make This Cookie

    • They're really easy to make either in a food processor or mixer.
    • They last forever in an airtight tin.
    • The size and shape can be changed with cookie cutters for any holiday - or just make bars.
    • The Basic Shortbread (butter, flour and sugar) can be sandwiched with you're favorite filling.
    • They can be baked plain, with sanding or pearl sugar on top or iced as in Painted Cookies.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Best Spiced Shortbread Cookies

    Ingredients for the Best Spiced Shortbread Cookies are all-purpose flour, granulated sugar, unsalted butter, 5 spice powder and orange zest.

    FRONT ROW: 5 Spice Powder, orange zest

    MIDDLE ROW: Unsalted butter

    BACK ROW: All-purpose flour, granulated sugar

    Chocolate Sour Cream Ganache

    Ingredients for the chocolate  sour cream  ganache are semisweet chocolate and sour cream.

    Left to Right: Semisweet chocolate (not chocolate chips), sour cream

    This photo shows the  decorative sanding on the left and Swedish Pearl sugar on the right.

    Left to Right: Sanding Sugar and Swedish Pearl Sugar

    Key Ingredients

    • Chinese 5 Spice powder is used for it's unique flavor. Cinnamon may be substituted if desired.
    • European butter is great to use here. I usually use Kerry Gold but in this instance I was out and subbed American butter with good results.
    • Grating oranges, lemons or limes with a microplaner is recommended over using a box grater. The box grater yields less zest and is often wetter than using microplane grater. The microplanes come with different size shreds from small to large.
    • While I used full fat sour cream, low fat could also be used.
    • The chocolate should be semisweet chocolate not chocolate chips. My chocolate of choice is Callebaut #811 semisweet callets (the look like chocolate chips but are pure chocolate in a form that melts quickly and easily.
    • The two sugars are Sanding sugar which is a sparkly larger version of granulated sugar that won't melt in the oven. The Second one is Swedish Pearl Sugar which is a larger very white sugar that stays that way under the heat of the oven. Both are used for decoration. Do not get Belgian Pearl Sugar as it is much too large for cookies.

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients and instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    This collage shows the butter and sugar in the mixer, the spices and orange zest added, the flour added and the finished dough.

    Step 1. Place the softened butter and granulated sugar in the bowl of a mixer. Step 2. Beat until the mixture is light and fluffy, then beat in the 5 spice powder or cinnamon and orange zest. Step 3. Add the flour all at once. Step 4. Beat until it comes together.

    This collages shows the dough has come together, it's shaped into a round, rolled out between waxed paper and being moved with a spatula.

    Step 5. Continue mixing until it forms a solid mass. Step 6. Remove it from the mixer and shape into a disc. If it is very soft, refrigerate or freeze briefly to firm up. Step 7. Divide the dough in half. Cover one half. Roll between sheets of waxed paper to the thickness of about ¼". (See the Cut Out Cookies using the Waxed Paper Technique). If the dough has softened, place it on a cookie sheet and refrigerate or freeze briefly to firm it up for the best looking cookies. Cut the cookies out. I used a 2" daisy cutter. Step 8. To easily remove the cookies, chill or freeze until hard. Lift them off with a pancake turner or just pop them out and place them on parchment lined cookie sheets or half sheet pans about 1" apart. Sprinkle half of them with either sanding sugar or Swedish Pearl Sugar. Bake as directed. Cool completely before sandwiching.

    The last collage shows the cookies being assembled into sandwiches with the cookie top and bottom lined up, the sour cream ganache made, dropped on the bottom cookie and spread out.

    Step 9. Line the cookies up so the bottoms are turned upward and the tops are facing bottom down. Step 10. Melt the chocolate at half power in the microwave or over simmering water in a double boiler. Cool to lukewarm and stir in the room temperature sour cream. Step 11. Pipe or spoon the ganache in the middle of the bottom cookie. Spread it flat leaving a bit of room around the edge. Place the top sugared cookie on and press lightly to make sure it adheres.

    See the recipe card if using the food processor.

    Recipe FAQS

    What is the best sugar for shortbread cookies?

    It depends upon the texture you want. Granulated sugar makes a crisp shortbread while powdered sugar makes a more tender one. However, they cannot be exchanged for each other by volume - only by weight. ½ cup granulated sugar weighs 100 grams. ½ cup powdered sugar weighs 65 grams.

    What is the best butter for shortbread cookies?

    Many people believe that European style butter which has a higher fat content makes the best tasting cookie since the flavor of the cookie comes from the butter.

    Can additional ingredients be added?

    Of course. Vanilla, peppermint, and almond extracts are popular additions. Finely ground nuts, coconut, mini chocolate chips, lemon or orange zest, many things can be added.

    Expert Tips

    • The butter must be cold if using the food processor.
    • If using the mixer the butter must be very soft.
    • If using mixer the dough may need to be chilled to firm it up before rolling. Do not let it get rock hard which it will if left in the fridge too long.
    • My preference is to roll between waxed paper as it is easier to see through it. The waxed paper needs to flipped over from time to time, the paper removed and then put back on without the wrinkles for the dough to continue to roll out evenly.
    • These shortbreads do not need to be chilled before baking to keep their shape. However, if they are add a few more minutes to the baking time.
    • The cookies benefit from being made ahead so the flavor has time to develop. They last at least a week in an airtight tin.
    • If desired, the cookies can be cut out, frozen hard and then wrapped well and frozen. Bake them from the frozen state adding additional time.
    A white bowl holds single Spiced Shortbread cookies on a marble background with a broken sandwiched cookie in the foreground.

    A Few Holiday Worthy Cookies

    • White, star shaped cinnamon Zimtsterne cookies are flowing fro a container surounded by holiday ornaments.
      Zimtsterne - German Cinnamon Stars
    • A plate of Cuccidati, fig and nut filled Italian Cookies sprinkled with multi-colored nonpariels.
      Cuccidati - Italy's Finest Cookie
    • A wicker basket with a doilie holds black and white glazed Pryaniki cookies.
      Pryaniki - Russian Honey Spice Cookies
    • Finished trio of cookies
      Holiday Cookies

    A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it and I appreciate you.  

    A white bowl holds single Spiced Shortbread cookies on a marble background with a broken sandwiched cookie in the foreground.

    Best Spiced Shortbread Cookies

    Helen S. Fletcher
    These Best Spiced Shortbread Cookies use only three ingredients plus two flavorings. Now imagine these are sandwiched with a chocolate sour cream ganache.
    4.75 from 4 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 1 hour hr 30 minutes mins
    Cook Time 12 minutes mins
    Total Time 1 hour hr 42 minutes mins
    Course Cookies
    Cuisine American
    Servings 25 cookies
    Calories 153 kcal
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Shortbread Cookies

    • 1 cup unsalted butter (225 grams)
    • 2 ½ cups all-purpose flour (350 grams)
    • ½ cup granulated sugar (100 grams
    • 1 teaspoon Chinese 5 spice powder or cinnamon
    • Rind of one small orange
    • Sanding Sugar or Swedish Pearl Sugar as needed

    Sour Cream Ganache

    • 3 ounces semisweet chocolate (85 grams)
    • 3 ounces sour cream (85 grams)

    Instructions
     

    Shortbread Cookies

      Mixer Methods - the butter needs to be softened

      • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Line several baking sheets with parchment paper and set aside.
      • Combine the softened butter with the sugar in the bowl of a mixer. Beat until very light and fluffy. Add the flour, 5 spice or cinnamon and orange zest and mix until it comes together in a sold mass.

      Processor Method - the butter needs to be cold for this version.

      • Add the flour, 5 spice or cinnamon and orange zest to the bowl of a processor. Pulse several times to mix. Place the cold, cut up butter in a circle on top of the flour.
      • Process until the butter is indistinguishable. Add the sugar and process until a ball forms. The dough may need to be re-distributed and processed again.

      For Both Mixing Methods

      • Divide the dough in half. Wrap the other half while working on this one. Roll between two sheets of wax paper to a thickness of about ¼" (see Cut Out Cookies Technique Using Wax paper. Cut the cookies out with a 2" cutter or your desired shape and size.
      • Place the cookies, still on the waxed paper, on a baking sheet and freeze until hard. Remove the cookies with a pancake turner or simply pop them out. This ensures they have sharp, clean edges with no stretching or distortion.. Place on the prepared baking sheets about 1" apart.
      • Repeat with the second half of the dough. Sprinkle half of the cookies with Swedish Pearl sugar or sanding sugar.
      • Re-roll the scraps and cut more cookies out.
      • Bake for 10 to 12 minutes until lightly browned around the edges.. Cool completely.

      Sour Cream Ganache and Sandwiching

      • Microwave the chocolate at half power or over a double boiler until some of it is melted and appears shiny. Stir to smooth out the chocolate. Cool to lukewarm then stir in the room temperature sour cream.
      • Line the cookies up with a top and bottom. Turn the bottom cookie, bottom side up. Turn the top cookie sugar side up. Pipe or spoon some of the ganache onto the bottom cookie. Spread it out flat leaving a slight edge with no ganache. Top with the top sugared cookie and very lightly press down to make sure it adheres to the ganache.
      • These will last for a week in an airtight tin.

      Notes

      There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
      As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
       Unless otherwise noted, salt refers to table salt.
      ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­Nutrition information provided is an estimate and will vary based on cooking methods and brands of ingredients used.
      ___________________________________________________
      The butter must be cold if using the food processor.
      If using the mixer it must be very soft.
      If using mixer the dough may need to be chilled to firm it up before rolling. Do not let it get rock hard which it will if left in too long. 
      My preference is to roll between waxed paper as it is easier to see what is going on. The waxed paper needs to flipped over from time to time, the paper removed and then put back on without the wrinkles for the dough to continue to roll out evenly. 
      These shortbreads do not need to be chilled before baking to keep their shape. However, if they are add a few more minutes to the baking time. 
      The cookies benefit from being made ahead as the flavor has time to develop. They last a long time in an airtight tin.
      If desired, the cookies can be cut out, frozen hard and then wrapped well and frozen. Bake them from the frozen state adding additional time.

      Nutrition

      Serving: 25cookiesCalories: 153kcalCarbohydrates: 16gProtein: 2gFat: 9gSaturated Fat: 6gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.4gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gTrans Fat: 0.3gCholesterol: 22mgSodium: 3mgPotassium: 40mgFiber: 1gSugar: 5gVitamin A: 250IUVitamin C: 0.03mgCalcium: 10mgIron: 1mg
      Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

      Butter-Rum Pecan Tart Recipe

      Modified: Sep 17, 2025 · Published: Sep 16, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 13 Comments

      A slice of the Butter Run Pecan Tart sists on a brown striped plate with a dollup of whipped cream.

      This Butter-Rum Pecan Tart screams fall is just about here. Fresh pecans abound and are perfect for the amazingly easy pastry tart shell. Golden syrup and a bit of dark rum accentuates the flavor of the toasted nuts for an unbeatable combination that is sure to find a place in your repertoire.

      With Thanksgiving just around the corner, this could very well be the easy recipe you were looking for.  

      A slice of Butter Rum Pecan Tart on a plate with whipped cream to the side.

      Fall is a wonderful time of the year.  I also especially like it since it brings fresh apples just off the trees and a new crop of pecans.  Both are among my favorite foods.

      A few more of my favs: Chocolate Truffle Raspberry Curd Tart, Easy Almond Raspberry Tart, Chocolate Cranberry Curd Tart, Cinnamon Whiskey Apple Tart, Strawberry Crumb Tart, and everyone's favorite, the S'Mores Tart. If you enjoy delicious Autumn recipes, check out Fill Your Home With Autumn Baking and Chocolate Cranberry Curd Tart.

      This post was originally published on November 8, 2021. It has been updated in the new format with additional information and a recipe card.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      The Pecans

      Although there are exceptions, I toast all of the nuts I use to deepen their flavor.  The toasted pecans are used in both the crust and the filling.  I generally toast the nuts when I buy them, cool them completely, and then freeze them for longer storage.  That way, they are ready to use when needed.

      To toast the nuts, preheat the oven to 350°F.  Place the pecans on a rimmed baking sheet in a single layer and toast for about 7 minutes.  Stir, then toast for 3 to 5 minutes more until fragrant and lightly colored.  Cool completely before using. Freeze for longer storage.

      The Crust

      This crust is easily made in the processor.  I found a new, easier way to make the bottom of the tart crust, which I show you below in the step by step photos.  I then press in the sides to complete it.  The crust can be frozen for several months, well wrapped, so it is at hand and ready to be partially baked from the freezer.

      The crust needs to be par baked before the pecans and filling are added.

      Butter-Rum Pecan Tart Filling

      Less gooey than a regular pecan pie, this tart is every bit, if not more, sinfully rich.  The use of golden syrup instead of corn syrup adds one more layer of flavor to this already best of all pecan tarts.

      This filling couldn’t be easier to make.  A whisk and a bowl, and you’re ready to go. 

      I know you'll love this recipe because

      • It's super easy
      • It can be done in part or in whole, and frozen
      • It's the perfect holiday dessert
      • And it's a new take on a holiday favorite

      Recipe Ingredients

      Pecan Crust

      The ingredients for the crust are toasted pecans, all-purpose flour, granulated sugar, salt, unsalted butter, and heavy cream.

      COUNTERCLOCKWISE: Pecans, all-purpose flour, unsalted butter, salt, granulated sugar, and cream in the middle.

      Butter-Rum Pecan Tart Filling

      Ingredients for the filling are toasted pecans, golden syrup, brown sugar, egg, egg yolk, heavy cream, dark drum, unsalted butter, and salt.

      FRONT ROW: Egg yolk, dark rum, whole egg

      MIDDLE ROW: Brown sugar, heavy cream, melted butter

      BACK ROW: Toasted Pecans, Golden Syrup

      Whipped Cream

      Heavy cream and powdered sugar for the whipped cream accompaniment.

      Powdered Sugar, heavy cream

      Key Ingredients

      • Pecan halves that have been toasted are important to the look and taste of the tart
      • Golden syrup, which can be found on Amazon, enhances the taste of the tart, but clear corn syrup can also be used.
      • Dark rum should be used for the best taste. My favorite is Meyer's Dark Rum. Look for the little individual serving bottles - that's more than you'll need.

      Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions.

      Step by Step Instructions

      It is easiest to toast all of the pecans at once, using the amounts called for in the crust and filling.

      Pecan Crust

      The first collage for the Butter-Rum Pecan Tart Recipe shows the toasted pecans in the processor blow wth the flour, sugar and salt, then processed, the butter added and   then processed.

      Step 1. Toast the pecans and cool them. Place them in the processor along with the flour, sugar, and salt. Step 2. Pulse to cut them coarsely. Step 3. Cut the butter into pieces and place them over the flour/pecan mixture. Step 4. Process until it looks like sand.

      In this collage, cream is poured over the mixture in the processor and processed unti large crumbs form, the crumbs are poured onto a work surface and the bottom of the tin is place on a piece of parchment paper.

      Step 5. Add the cream to the processor. Step 6. Process until large crumbs form. Take a little of the dough and pinch it together. If it is too dry to hold, process in a teaspoon of cream until it forms large, moist crumbs. Step 7. Pour it out onto a work surface and push it together to form a round. Knead it a couple of times into a smooth ball. Step 8. Place the bottom round of the tart pan on a piece of waxed paper.

      This collage shows the circle made on parchment paper, part of the dough rolled to fit within the circle, the bottom of the tart pan placed over the dough and then inserted into the rim of the tart pan.

      Step 9. Using the bottom of the tart pan as the guide, draw a circle on a piece of wax paper. Flip the paper over so the ink is on the bottom. Step 10. If the dough is really soft, refrigerate it to firm it. Divide the dough in half (about 160 grams). Cover the remaining dough. Shape the half into a round and then flatten it in the middle of the circle. Place another piece of wax paper on top and roll it evenly to fill in the circle. Step 11. Remove the top piece of waxed paper. Place the bottom of the tin on top of the dough. Step 12. Flip the dough over so the bottom of the tart pan is on the work surface and the wax paper is on top.  Remove the wax paper.  Place the pan bottom, dough side up, into the tart pan. If the dough has gotten soft at any point, refrigerate or freeze it to firm it up to make it easier to roll or flip.

      This collage shows the sides of the dough being added to the tart pan with a rope of dough being rolled out, place on the side of half of the pan, the ends of the ropes covering the side of the pan joined and pressed against the rim.

      Step 13. Divide the remaining dough in half again (about 80 grams each). Roll one piece into a 14" rope. Step 14. Place it inside the rim halfway around. Step 15. Repeat with the second piece of dough, overlapping the two edges. Step 16. Press the dough firmly against the rim of the pan.

      This collages shows the pecan crust completed, the brown sugar, egg and egg yolk in a bowl, whisked together and the golden syrup added.

      Step 17. Make sure the bottom edge is at a 90° angle is is firmly attached to the side crust. Freeze the crust until hard. Either wrap and store for later or bake as called for and set aside. If baking immediately, place on a parchment lined baking pan and bake as called for. Set aside while preparing the crust. Step 18. Place the brown sugar, egg, and egg yolk in a medium size bowl. Step 19. Whisk them together until completely blended. Step 20. Whisk in the golden syrup.

      The final collage shows the rum, butter and salt added to the bowl, the toasted pecan halves lining the par baked crust in a single layer, the liquid poured over and the tart baked.

      Step 21. Whisk in the cream, rum, butter, and salt completely. Step 22. While still on the baking pan, fill the crust with the toasted pecan halves. Place them in the pecan shell in an even layer. For the prettiest look, turn the halves right side up. Step 23. Whisk the filling one more time, and carefully and gently pour the liquid filling over the pecans. Submerge any pecans not covered with the filling. Step 24. Bake as called for. Cool. The Butter-Rum Pecan Tart can be served immediately, or it can be left in the tin, cooled completely, wrapped wel,l and frozen for a month or so.

      Serve with whipped cream as on the recipe card.

      Recipe FAQS

      What is the difference between a pie and a tart?

      Pies usually have a top of some kind. It can have two crusts, one on top and one on the bottom, or a crumb or streusel topping. They are also usually, but not always, deeper than a tart. A tart is distinguished by the lack of a top finish when baked, the sides of the pan are rippled, and it is shorter, in most cases, than a pie. They are often very rich.

      Can a regular pie crust be substituted for the pecan crust?

      It isn't advisable as the crust has to be partially baked. Regular pie crusts shrink during baking, but the tart crust, which is a short crust, doesn't if frozen first.

      Where can things go wrong when making a Pecan Tart?

      Using stale pecans, not toasting the nuts first, over or under baking, not par baking the crust, overfilling the crust, using the wrong crust can make a disappointing finished tart.

      Storage and Freezing

      The crust may be made and frozen in the pan, well wrapped, for a couple of months unbaked. Bake straight from the freezer as called for.

      The tart as a whole can be frozen in the pan, well wrapped, for a couple of months also. Thaw the tart at room temperature. Warm it in a 350°F oven for 20 to 25 minutes to refresh it.

      Expert Tips

      • Make sure the pecans are fresh. I buy them in the fall when they are and store them in the freezer to make sure they don't become rancid. At the bakery, we would toast 30# boxes of nuts all at once, replace them in their box when cooled, and store them in the freezer so they would be ready when we needed them. Worked perfectly.
      • Be sure to toast the pecans. It makes all the difference in the taste of the tart.
      • Individual, small bottles of most liquors and liqueurs can be purchased anywhere alcohol is sold. They contain ¼ cup, which is a bit more than needed for this recipe.
      • Please use dark rum (Meyer's Dark Rum is my go-to) for the best flavor. Lighter rums are too mild to carry the flavor.
      • Keep a small piece of the raw crust dough out and use it to patch the crust if it separates anywhere where it was joined. Just use a small spatula to smear a bit of the raw crust over the opening to seal it. It doesn't have to be baked again.
      • While I highly recommend Tate & Lyle's Golden Syrup, corn syrup or honey can be substituted.
      • Dark or light brown sugar can be used. Dark will give the best flavor to the tart.
      A slice of the Butter Run Pecan Tart sists on a brown striped plate with a dollup of whipped cream.

      More Tarts for Your Pleasure

      • Slice of Caramel Apple Tart
        Caramel Apple Tart
      • A slice of Tropical Macadamia & Coconut Tart sits on a clear plate with a teal colored napkin and cup and saucer beside it.
        Macadamia and Coconut Tart
      • A slice of the pumpkin tart finished with a lattice design and whipped cream sits on a white plate with an orange and green gourd behind it as well as the pumpkin tart itself
        (Almost) No Bake Pumpkin Tart
      • A slice of Pumpkin Cheesecake Tart on a plate with Rum Caramel Sauce and the tart in the bakground
        Pumpkin Cheesecake Tart with Caramel Rum Sauce

      A lot of work goes into each of my recipes, and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it.  

      A slice of the Butter Run Pecan Tart sists on a brown striped plate with a dollup of whipped cream.

      Butter-Rum Pecan Tart Recipe

      Helen S. Fletcher
      This Butter-Rum Pecan Tart screams fall is just about here. Fresh pecans abound and are perfect for the amazingly easy tart. With Thanksgiving just around the corner, this could very well be that easy recipe you were looking for.  
      5 from 3 votes
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 40 minutes mins
      Cook Time 40 minutes mins
      Total Time 1 hour hr 20 minutes mins
      Course Dessert
      Cuisine American
      Servings 10 servings
      Calories 523 kcal

      Equipment

      • 9x¾" tart pan with removable bottom
      Prevent your screen from going dark

      Ingredients

      Pecan Crust - it is easiest to toast all of the pecans at once and separate them as the recipe calls for.

      • 1 cup all-purpose flour (140 grams)
      • 2 tablespoons granulated sugar (25 grams)
      • ¼ teaspoon table salt
      • ½ cup pecan halves (60 grams)
      • 6 tablespoons unsalted butter, cold (90 grams)
      • 2 tablespoons heavy cream

      Butter-Rum Pecan Filling

      • ¼ cup dark brown sugar, packed (50 grams)
      • 1 large egg
      • 1 large egg yolk
      • ⅔ cup golden syrup
      • ⅓ cup heavy cream
      • 3 tablespoons dark rum
      • 3 tablespoons unsalted butter, melted (45 grams)
      • ¼ teaspoon table salt
      • 1 ½ cups toasted pecan halves (180 grams)

      Whipped Cream Accompaniment

      • 1 cup heavy cream
      • ¼ cup powdered sugar ((32 grams)

      Instructions
       

      Pecan Crust - It will be easiest to toast all of the pecans at once using them as called for in the recipe.

      • Preheat the oven to 350°F.
      • Place the flour, sugar, salt and pecans in the bowl of a food processor. Pulse to coarsely cut in the pecans.
      • Cut the butter into smaller pieces and add to the processor. Pulse to cut in and mix well. It will look like sand.
      • Add the cream and pulse it in to make large crumbs. Take a bit between your fingers and press together. If it is too dry to stay together, add about 1 teaspoon cream at a time, pulsing it in.
      • Pour the dough out onto a work surface and push it together. Knead several times to make a smooth dough. Reserve a walnut size piece of dough. Divide it in half (about 160 grams). Cover the remaining dough. If at any time it becomes too soft to work, chill or freeze it to firm it up.
      • Using the bottom of the tart pan as a guide, draw a circle on a piece of waxed paper. Flip the paper over so the ink is on the bottom.
      • Place half of the dough in the center of the circle and flatten it. Place another piece of waxed paper on top and roll it out evenly to fit the circle. If there is a bit of overhang, trim it off.
      • Remove the top piece of waxed paper. Place the bottom of the tart pan on top of the dough.
      • Flip the dough over, so the bottom of the pan is on the work surface and the waxed paper is on top. Remove the paper. Place the pan bottom, dough side up, in the tart pan. If the dough seems too soft to flip, chill or freeze it for a few minutes to firm it up.
      • Divide the remaining piece of dough in half again (about 80 grams each). Roll one piece into a 14" rope. Place it halfway around the inside of the tart pan rim. Repeat with the second piece of dough, making sure the edges overlap.
      • Press the overlapping edges together very well. Press the ropes into the side of the pan and connect it to the bottom crust. Make sure the bottom edge is at a 90° angle and is firmly attached to the bottom crust.
      • Freeze the crust hard before baking it. Line a rimmed baking pan with parchment paper. Place the frozen crust in the pan and bake for about 25 to 30 minutes until lightly browned and almost done. If the crust separates at any joint, take a small piece of the reserved dough and patch it using a small metal spatula or the back of a teaspoon. There is no need to bake again. Set aside while making the filling.
      • Reduce the oven temperature to 325°F.

      Butter-Rum Pecan Tart Filling

      • Whisk together the brown sugar, egg and egg yolk in a medium size bowl.
      • Whisk in the golden syrup until thoroughly mixed, followed by the rum, butter and salt.
      • Line the almost baked bottom crust, still on the baking sheet, with the toasted pecan halves in a flat layer. For the prettiest look, turn the halves right side up. Whisk the filling one more time and pour it gently over the pecans. Submerge any pecans if they are not coated with the filling.
      • Bake in the center of the oven for about 30 to 40 minutes until the pecans are dark, and the filling is bubbling around the edges but still slightly loose in the center.
      • Cool the tart. It can be served immediately with the whipped cream or it can be left in the tin, wrapped well, and frozen for a month or so.
      • When ready to serve, thaw the tart at room temperature. Warm it in a 350°F oven for 20 to 25 minutes to refresh it.

      Whipped Cream Accompaniment

      • Combine the cream and powdered sugar in the bowl of a mixer fitted with the whisk attachment. Whip to soft to medium peaks. This may be done the day before or early in the day. Place it in a covered container and refrigerate.

      Notes

      There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
       
      As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
       Unless otherwise noted, salt refers to table salt.
      ­­­­­­­­­Nutrition information provided is an estimate and will vary based on cooking methods and brands of ingredients used.
      __________________________________________________
      Make sure the pecans are fresh. I buy in the fall when they are and store in the freezer to make sure they don't become rancid. At the bakery, we would toast 30# boxes of nuts all at once, replace them in their box when cooled and store them in the freezer so they would be ready when we needed them. Worked perfectly.
      Be sure to toast the pecans. It makes all the difference in the taste of the tart.
      Individual, small bottles of most liquors and liqueurs can be purchased anywhere alcohol is sold. They contain ¼ cup which is a bit more than needed for this recipe.
      Please use dark rum (Meyer's Dark Rum is my go-to) for the best flavor. Lighter rums are too mild to carry the flavor.
      Keep a small piece of the raw crust dough out and use it to patch the crust if it separates anywhere where it was joined. Just use a small spatula to smear a bit of the raw crust over the opening to seal it. It doesn't have to be baked again.
      While I highly recommend Tate & Lyle's Golden Syrup, corn syrup or honey can be substituted. 
      Dark or light brown sugar can be used. Dark will give the best flavor to the tart.
       

      Nutrition

      Serving: 10servingsCalories: 523kcalCarbohydrates: 42gProtein: 5gFat: 38gSaturated Fat: 16gPolyunsaturated Fat: 5gMonounsaturated Fat: 14gTrans Fat: 0.4gCholesterol: 86mgSodium: 136mgPotassium: 145mgFiber: 2gSugar: 31gVitamin A: 865IUVitamin C: 0.4mgCalcium: 49mgIron: 1mg
      Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

      Exceptional Tuxedo Cake

      Modified: May 1, 2026 · Published: Sep 8, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 20 Comments

      Three layers of chocolate cake, white chocolate mousse,dark chocolate mousse and a chocolate glaze sit on an old fashioned cut glass tray.

      This Exceptional Tuxedo Cake is based on the Costco Tuxedo Cake. Named after the black suit with a white vest, shirt and tie, a tuxedo exudes luxury on sight as does this cake. An easily made decadent chocolate cake it's layered with both a chocolate and Bailey's white chocolate mousse. This cake recipe is the perfect celebration cake for any occasion.

      Three layers of chocolate cake, white chocolate mousse,dark chocolate mousse and a chocolate glaze sit on an old fashioned cut glass tray.

      I took some liberty with the white chocolate mousse using my favorite combination of white chocolate Bailey's which you can find in Bailey's Pi Day Pie, Easy Chocolate Guinness Cake with Bailey's Whipped Cream, The Definitive Bailey's Cheesecake and Warm Chocolate Cakes with Bailey's Sauce.

      Despite the steps, all of the component parts are simple to make. The chocolate cake layers requires no folding in of ingredients or creaming. Both of the mousses are easy as is the indulgent Dark Satin Ganache which finishes the cake. To make it even more appealing, the entire cake can be made and frozen.

      Looking for another showstopping cake recipe? Try this Pecan Upside Down Cake.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why use oil instead of butter in a cake?

      When I first opened my bakery I thought, mistakenly, that the best cakes were made with butter and so that is what I pursued. We made everything on site except a small butter shell for petit fours. My bakery mainly serviced hotels, restaurants and caterers......and there in lay the problem.

      Despite what is commonly thought, restaurants do not usually serve a whole cake in one night. They need a product that has several days shelf life. Hotels and caterers do but they plate up in advance so the cake has to stay moist and delicious. They are also often stored in the refrigerator until shortly before service.

      The sad news is a butter cake has little to no shelf life and it dries out much faster than a cake made with oil. Also, using a neutral oil allows the flavors to come through. Butter, while adding it own wonderful taste, can dilute the main flavor.

      If you think about it, butter gets hard if cold and most cakes are stored in the refrigerator. Oil, on the other hand, stays liquid at room temperature or in the fridge. Consequently, oil is often the better choice.

      The one exception at the bakery was wedding cakes. The majority were butter cakes unless they chose a chocolate cake (we used the one below) or a carrot cake.

      A cake batter can use both oil and butter. Oil to keep it moist and butter for the flavor. All of these cakes have a place in any cake repertoire. It just depends upon when and how it will be served.

      Melting Chocolate

      Dark chocolate can be melted one of two ways, either in a double boiler over simmering water or at half power in the microwave. For me the half power is the key as it is easier to keep the chocolate from burning.

      However, for white chocolate I always melt in a double boiler over barely simmering water. White chocolate is extremely easy to sieze. Siezing refers to chocolate that either by getting too hot or not having enough liquid with it will form a block that will not melt. At this point, a bit of solid shortening (not butter because it has water in it) can be added to help get it back to a state where it will melt.

      Making the Chocolate Curls

      It's easy to make the curls if you keep a couple of things in mind. The temperature of the chocolate is important. It should be room temperature in a room around 74°F. Also, I have found a lot of success using Ghirardelli chocolate squares in white, milk and dark chocolate. Others may work well also.

      Wrap the bottom of the bar in a couple of thickness of paper towels to prevent the chocolate from melting when you are holding it.

      The white chocolate is the softest and makes the best curls, followed by the milk and the dark usually makes shards which is fine when all of them are mixed together.

      Using a vegetable peeler as seen below, it is easy to just to peel the chocolate from the short side of the bar. The amount of pressure with which you peel will determine the size of the curls.

      Make Ahead Steps

      • The cake can be made a couple of months ahead by leaving it in the pan, freezing it, and wrapping it well.
      • Both mousses can be made a day or two ahead, covered tightly so they don't pick up any orders and refrigerated.
      • The cake can also be assembled and completely frozen for a month. Freeze it first then wrap in foil. To thaw it, place it in the refrigerator still wrapped. Thaw overnight. By leaving it wrapped, the condensation which normally occurs will go to the top of the foil and not the top of the cake.

      Recipe Ingredients

      Very Chocolate Cake

      Ingredients for the Very Chocolate Cake are hot water, instant coffee, granulated sugar, all-purpose flour, Dutch cocoa, baking soda, baking powder, salt, vegetable oil, sour cream, eggs and vanilla extract.

      FRONT ROW: Baking soda, instant coffee, baking powder, vanilla extract, salt

      SECOND ROW: Eggs, sour cream

      THIRD ROW: Brown sugar, granulated sugar, Dutch cocoa powder

      BACK ROW: Water, all-purpose flour, oil

      Tuxedo Cake Mousses

      Chocolate Mousse

      The ingredients for the chocolate mousse are semisweet chocolate, heavy cream, vanilla and instant coffee.

      FRONT ROW: Vanilla extract, instant coffee

      BACK ROW: Semisweet chocolate, heavy whipping cream

      White Chocolate Mousse

      The ingredients for the white chocolate mousse are heavy cream, Bailey's liqueur, white chocolate.

      FRONT ROW: White Chocolate

      BACKROW: Heavy Cream, Bailey's Liqueur

      Cake Finish

      The ingredients to finish the cake are unsalted butter, corn syrup, semi sweet chocolate, heavy cream and multi-colored chocolate curls.

      FRONT ROW: Unsalted butter, corn syrup

      BACK ROW: Semisweet chocolate (not chocolate chips), white, milk,dark chocolate curls, heavy cream

      Key Ingredients

      • Any good quality semisweet chocolate is fine. My preference is Callebaut Semisweet callets #811. Although they look like chocolate chips they are pure chocolate.
      • Instant coffee of your choice can be used. Espresso should be cut in half. The coffee is used to enhance the chocolate and not as a discernible flavor.
      • Heavy cream is necessary for not only the taste but for the thickness to which it can be whipped.
      • The Bailey's Liqueur is used as a flavoring with the white chocolate. Small ¼ cup bottles can be found at liqueur and grocery stores. It is just enough for this recipe.
      • The white chocolate mixture requires real white chocolate, not compounds, should be used. If the ingredients on the label list cocoa butter it is real white chocolate. If there isn't it won't taste or act as will white chocolate.

      Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions.

      Step by Step Instructions

      It is important to mix this cake on low. The cake will rise in the center no matter how the pan is prepared if it is mixed on too high a speed.

      Very Chocolate Cake

      This collage for the Very Chocolate Cake shows the dry ingredients mixed together, the water and coffee in the bowl of a mixer, the dry ingredients added to the mixer and then mixed

      Step 1. Whisk together the flour, cocoa, baking soda, baking powder and salt. Set aside. Step 2. Add the water and coffee in the mixing bowl and whisk to combine. Whisk in the sugar. It will by rather syrupy. Step 3. Add the dry ingredients to the mixing bowl. Step 4. Mix on low to incorporate - about 2 minutes. It will be thick.

      This collage showss the oil being added, mixed in, and the sour cream being added and mixed in.

      Step 5. Add the oil. Step 6. Beat on low to incorporate the oil. Step 7. Add the sour cream. Step 8. Blend in on low completely.

      The last collage for the cake includes the eggs being added, the batter finished, spread out in a half sheet pan and baked.

      Step 9. Add the eggs. Step 10. Mix on low for about 30 seconds until it is completely blended. Step 11. Line a half sheet pan with parchment paper and spray the paper. Step 12. Bake as required until the center springs back when lightly touched. It should not pull away from the sides of the pan.

      Tuxedo Cake

      Chocolate Mousse

      The first collage for the Tuxedo Cake shows the coffee dissolved in the vanilla, the cream and coffee in a small saucepan, the chocolate added to the hot mixture and the base chocolate mixture for the chocolate mousse.

      Step 1. Add the coffee to the vanilla in a small bowl. Stir to dissolve the coffee. Step 2. Place the cream and coffee in a small saucepan. Heat just until the mixture comes is steaming hot, stirring from time to time. Do not let it boil. Step 3. Add the chocolate and submerge it under the hot cream. Let it sit for 3 or 4 minutes to melt the chocolate. Step 4. Stir the mixture until all of the chocolate has melted and it's smooth.

      This collage shows the cream for the chocolate mousse beaten, added to the chocolate, being gently whisked in and the finished mousse.

      Step 5. Using the whisk attachment on your mixer, whip the cream to medium peaks (somewhat passed soft peak). Step 6. Add it to the chocolate base. Step 7. Fold the cream in. It is easiest to use a whisk. Do not stir it in, fold it in so the air is not lost. Step 8. Chill the mousse while the rest of the parts are prepared.

      White Chocolate Mousse

      The white chocolate and Bailey's are in a double boiler over simmering water.

      Step 9. Place the Bailey's and white chocolate in the top of a double boiler over simmering (not boiling) water. Step 10. When it begins to melt, stir it until it is all melted and smooth. Do not let the bottom of the top container touch the water and keep the water at a bare simmer. Cool it completely. Step 11. Whip the cream to medium peaks (somewhat passed the soft peak stage). Step 12. Stir about ¼ of the cream into the chocolate to lighten it. Fold the remainder of the cream into the chocolate. Refrigerate.

      Dark Satin Ganache

      This Collage shows the Dark Satin Ganache being made with the butter, cream and corn syrup in a small pan, melted, the chocolatesubmerged and the finished ganache.

      Step 13. Place the cream, butter and corn syrup in a medium size pan. Step 14. Place over medium heat and heat until the ingredients are melted and the mixture is steaming hot but not boiling. Step 15. Remove from the heat and submerge the chocolate under the hot cream. Step 16. Stir to smooth out, making sure to reach into the corners of the pan. If using immediately, do not use a whisk as it will incorporate air bubbles that are hard to get out.

      Assembly

      This collage shows the paper being removed from the bottom of the cake layer, the cake cut into 3 rectangles, the bottom layer spread with the chocolate mousse and the middle layer spread with the white chocolate mousse.

      Step 17. Go around the edges of the pan with a small metal spatula to release the cake. Cover the top of the baked and cooled cake with a large piece of parchment paper paper. Turn the cake out of the pan so the bottom paper is now on top. Remove the paper carefully, keeping it low to the cake. Do not just pull it off or you can tear the cake. Step 18. Turn the cake so the 18" side is in front of you. Cut 3 5" layers from the cake. There will be a small, delicious treat for your efforts up to this point. Enjoy it! Step 19. Place one of the layers of cake on a cake board or a piece of cardboard cut a bit larger on each side. Wrap it in foil and proceed. Spread the cold chocolate mouse over the cake layer. Top it with the second layer of cake. Step 20. Spread the cold white chocolate mousse evenly over that layer. Top with the last layer of cake. Press down gently to make sure ever adheres to each other. Remove any excess mousse outside of the cake layers with a spatula. Wrap the sides and top of the cake in plastic wrap and refrigerate overnight.

      The last collage shows the assembled cake, white chocolate curls being made with a vegetable peeler, the ganache on top of the cake and the cake finished with multi colored chocolate curls.

      Step 21. Top with the last layer of cake. Press down gently to make sure ever adheres to each other. Remove any excess mousse outside of the cake layers with a spatula. Wrap the sides and top of the cake in plastic wrap and refrigerate overnight. Step 22. To make the white, milk and dark chocolate curls, wrap the bottom of a bar of chocolate with a couple of thicknesses of paper towels to prevent melting the chocolate as you hold it. Using a vegetable peeler, peel the chocolate to make curls. You don't need to make curls from the whole bar. Just a quarter of each bar is plenty. Mix the three curls together. Step 23. If the ganache has been made ahead heat it briefly. It should be thick but still able to flow down the sides. Pour most of the ganache on top of the cake. Step 24. With a large offset spatula, push it over the sides and ends of the cake. If the sides aren't perfect, that's fine, they can be finished later. Try to keep the top as smooth as possible. Immediately, using a spoon so the curls aren't broken or melt in your hand, spoon on the curls down the center of the cake. Return excess ganache to the original container. Refrigerate the cake to set up the ganache. If the sides need to be adjusted, use the remaining ganache, without heating it. At this point you want it thicker so you can spread it on the sides and ends with a straight metal spatula. Store the cake in the refrigerator.

      Recipe FAQS

      Why do the white and milk chocolates make better curls?

      White chocolate is softer because it contains a higher proportion of cocoa butter, the fat from the cocoa bean, along with sugar and milk solids, giving it creamy and buttery texture that melts easily on the palate.

      What kind of oil should be used in a cake

      Almost any kind of oil can be used but it is usually a neutral flavored oil such as vegetable or canola oil. Olive oil is sometimes used but can impart its flavor if that is the goal. However, oil is mainly used to keep the product moist much longer than other fats.

      Are all mousses chocolate?

      No. A mousse can be made from a base such as chocolate or a fruit puree to which whipped cream, a meringue or both are used to lighten it. If using a fruit puree gelatin is often used to ensure the mixture sets. Both are chilled into a light and airy richly elegant dessert.

      Expert Tips

      • To keep the chocolate cake from rising in the middle during baking, no matter if you prepared the cake pan properly or not, it is crucial to beat it at every stage on low. We found this out in the bakery as this was our base chocolate cake.
      • When removing the paper from the bottom of any cake, keep the paper being removed close to the cake to prevent tearing some of the cake away.
      • To keep the Dark Satin Ganache from becoming dull, it is important to just let the liquid heat until it is very steamy but not boiling. If the chocolate becomes overly hot when added to the liquid it will lose its sheen.
      • Stir the chocolate into the ganache. Do not use a whisk as it can make air bubbles making a smooth ganache difficult.
      • When folding the cream into the chocolates for the mousses, use a whisk and a folding motion - down, up and over, turning the bowl a quarter turn each time. It goes faster than using a spatula, deflating the cream less.
      • If substituting espresso powder, use half as much as the recipe calls for.
      Three layers of chocolate cake, white chocolate mousse,dark chocolate mousse and a chocolate glaze sit on an old fashioned cut glass tray.

      More Extraordinary Celebration Cakes

      • Hazelnut Gianduja Cake
        Hazelnut Gianduja Cake
      • Pave d'Amour
        Pave d'Amour - The Quintessential Celebration Cake
      • Raspberry Rhapsody
        Raspberry Rhapsody Cake
      • Finished Whole, Cut
        27 Layer Tuile Torte

      A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it and I appreciate you.  

      Three layers of chocolate cake, white chocolate mousse,dark chocolate mousse and a chocolate glaze sit on an old fashioned cut glass tray.

      Exceptional Tuxedo Cake

      Helen S. Fletcher
      This Exceptional Tuxedo Cake is based on the Tuxedo Cake at Costco. An easily made decadent chocolate cake it's layered with both a chocolate and Bailey's white chocolate mousse. This is the perfect celebration cake for any occasion.
      5 from 5 votes
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 3 hours hrs
      Total Time 3 hours hrs
      Course Cake
      Cuisine American
      Servings 12 servings
      Calories 970 kcal

      Equipment

      • 1 half sheet pan
      Prevent your screen from going dark

      Ingredients

      Very Chocolate Cake

      • 1 cup very hot water
      • 2 ½ teaspoons instant coffee
      • 1 cup dark brown sugar (200 grams)
      • 1 cup granulated sugar (200 grams)
      • 1 ¾ cup all-purpose flour (245 grams)
      • 1 cup Dutch cocoa (90 grams)
      • 1 teaspoon baking soda
      • 1 teaspoon baking powder
      • 1 teaspoon salt
      • ½ cup vegetable oil
      • 1 cup sour cream (225 grams)
      • 2 large eggs
      • 2 teaspoon vanilla

      Chocolate Mousse

      • 1 cup heavy cream
      • 3 ounces semisweet chocolate, coarsely chopped (85 grams)
      • 1 teaspoon instant coffee
      • 1 teaspoon vanilla

      White Chocolate Mousse

      • ¼ cup Bailey's liqueur
      • 3 ounces white chocolate, coarsely chopped (85 grams) [not coating chocolate]
      • 1 cup heavy cream

      Dark Satin Ganache & Chocolate Curls

      • ½ cup heavy cream
      • ¼ cup corn syrup
      • 5 tablespoons unsalted butter (70 grams)
      • 10 ounces semisweet chocolate, coarsely chopped (280 grams)
      • 4 ounce white chocolate bar (114 grams)
      • 4 ounce milk chocolate bar (114 grams)
      • 4 ounce dark chocolate bar (114 grams)

      Instructions
       

      Very Chocolate Cake

      • It is most important to mix this recipe at low speed to ensure the cake comes out flat.
      • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Line a half sheet pan with parchment. Spray the parchment only with a non-stick baking release. Set aside.
      • Whisk together the flour, cocoa, baking soda, baking powder and salt. Set aside.
      • In the bowl of a mixer, place the very hot water and the coffee; whisk to mix and dissolve the coffee. Whisk in the brown and granulated sugars. The mixture will be rather syrupy.
      • Add the flour mixture and mix on low to incorporate - aobut 2 minutes. It will be very thick, Scape the sides and bottom as necessary.
      • Add the oil, mixing on low, next add the sour cream and then the eggs and vanilla, each time mixing completely, about 30 seconds each time.
      • Pour the batter into the prepared pan and spread it out evenly.
      • Bake for 17 to 20 minutes, until a tester comes out clean and it springs back when the middle is touched lightly. Do not over bake.
      • Cool completely on a rack. Freezing the cake after cooling makes it easier to make clean cuts for the layers. For extended freezing, freeze the cake in the pan, well covered in aluminum foil for up to 2 months.

      Chocolate Mousse

      • Coarsely chop the semisweet chocolate.
      • Heat ½ cup cream and coffee until steamy but not boiling. Off heat, submerge the chocolate and let it sit for 3 or 4 minutes. Stir until smooth, making sure to get into the corners of the pan.
      • Stir in the vanilla. Cool completely.
      • Whip the remaining ½ cup of cream to the medium stiff stage and fold into the chocolate. This is most easily done with a whisk using the folding motion. Refrigerate until cold or up to 2 days before using.

      White Chocolate Mousse

      • Cut the white chocolate up coarsely. Combine the chocolate and Bailey's in the top of a double boiler. Make sure the bottom of the bowl does not touch the water and keep the water at a bare simmer.
      • As soon as the chocolate begins to melt, stir it until it is smooth. Remove from the heat and cool completely.
      • Beat the remaining cream until medium stiff Stir about ¼ of the cream into the chocolate to lighten it. Fold the remainder into the white chocolate. Refrigerate until cold or up to 2 days before using.

      Chocolate Curls

      • Any good quality semisweet chocolate is fine. My preference is Callebaut Semisweet callets #811. Although they look like chocolate chips they are pure chocolate.
        Instant coffee of your choice can be used. Espresso should be cut in half. The coffee is used to enhance the chocolate and not as a discernible flavor.
        Heavy cream is necessary for not only the taste but for the thickness to which it can be whipped. 
        The Bailey's Liqueur is used as a flavoring with the white chocolate. Small ¼ cup bottles can be found at liqueur and grocery stores. It is just enough for this recipe. If omitting, use ¼ cup cream with the white chocolate.
        Real white chocolate, not compounds, should be used. If the ingredients on the label list cocoa butter it is real white chocolate. If there isn't it won't taste or act as will white chocolate. of each bar is enough to decorate the cake.
      • Wrap the bottom of the chocolate bar where you hold it with a double thickness of paper towels so the chocolate doesn't melt from the heat of your hand.
      • Place a piece of wax paper in front of you. Using a vegetable peeler, peel the short end of the chocolate bar to make curls over the paper. The amount of pressure with which you peel will determine the size of the curls.
      • Mix them together.
      • The white chocolate will make the best curls and the milk chocolate after that. The dark chocolate is more difficult due to the rigidity of the chocolate. They may end up in shards but that is fine,

      Assembly

      • Freeze the cake for 30 to 40 minutes to make it easier to cut. Place a piece of parchment over the top of the cake and turn it out onto a cake board.
      • Turn the cake with the long side facing you. Cut 3 - 5" wide rectangles from top to bottom. There will be a small piece left over. That's the bakers reward.
      • Place one layer on a cake board. Spread the cold chocolate mousse evenly over the layer. Top with a second layer of cake.
      • Spread the white chocolate mousse over this layer. Place the top layer over the mousse. Wrap well in plastic wrap and chill overnight or freeze. If the cake has been frozen, thaw it overnight in the refrigerator to finish it.

      Dark Satin Ganache

      • Combine the cream, corn syrup and butter in a small saucepan. Heat until the butter melts and the mixture is steamy but do not let it come to a boil.
      • Submerge the chocolate under the hot cream and let it sit for 3 or 4 minutes. Stir until it is smooth, making sure to get into the corners. It should be thick enough to use immediately. If it is hot cool it to lukewarm. Do not let it get completely cold or it will be too set.
      • Pour about ⅔ to ¾ of the ganache over the cake. Using a large offset spatula, smooth the top and let the remainder go over the sides and top and bottom of the cake. Smooth them out. If they aren't covered right away, the extra ganache can be used when it is cold and set up to finish them.
      • Immediately, after covering the top of the cake, use a spoon to distribute the chocolate curls down the center of the cake. Press them in lightly. Collect the ganache that has dripped off the cake and return it to the unused portion. Refrigerate the cake to set the ganache.
      • Use the remainder of the ganache to finish the sides if necessary.
      • Transfer the cake to a serving dish or a cake board if freezing. The easiest way to do this is to go under the cake with a metal spatula so make sure it is free. Use two pancake turners, on on each short end to lift it up. If you are unsure, freeze the cake first and then release it.
      • At this point the cake can be frozen. Freeze it all the way through. Carefully cover it in foil and freeze up to a month. To thaw, leave the wrapping in place and thaw in the refrigerator overnight or the day before. Carefully remove the wrapping before cutting and serving.
      • By leaving the cake wrapped, any condensation that normally happens when thawing will go to the top of the foil and not the top of the cake.
      • Store the cake in the refrigerator.

      Notes

      There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
      As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
      ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­Nutrition information provided is an estimate and will vary based on cooking methods and brands of ingredients used.
      __________________________________________________
      To keep the chocolate cake from rising in the middle during baking, no matter if you prepared the cake pan properly or not, it is crucial to beat it at every stage on low. We found this out in the bakery as this was our base chocolate cake.
      When removing the paper from the bottom of any cake, keep the paper being removed close to the cake to prevent tearing some of the cake away. 
      To keep the Dark Satin Ganache from becoming dull, it is important to just let the liquid heat until it is very steamy but not boiling. If the chocolate becomes overly hot when added to the liquid it will lose its sheen. 
      Stir the chocolate into the ganache. Do not use a whisk as it can make air bubbles making a smooth ganache difficult. 
      When folding the cream into the chocolates for the mousses, use a whisk and a folding motion - down, up and over, turning the bowl a quarter turn each time. It goes faster than using a spatula, deflating the cream less.
      Any good quality semisweet chocolate is fine. My preference is Callebaut Semisweet callets #811. Although they look like chocolate chips they are pure chocolate.
      Instant coffee of your choice can be used. Espresso should be cut in half. The coffee is used to enhance the chocolate and not as a discernible flavor.
      Heavy cream is necessary for not only the taste but for the thickness to which it can be whipped. 
      The Bailey's Liqueur is used as a flavoring with the white chocolate. Small ¼ cup bottles can be found at liqueur and grocery stores. It is just enough for this recipe. 
      Real white chocolate, not compounds, should be used. If the ingredients on the label list cocoa butter it is real white chocolate. If there isn't it won't taste or act as will white chocolate.
       
       
       

      Nutrition

      Serving: 12servingsCalories: 970kcalCarbohydrates: 99gProtein: 10gFat: 62gSaturated Fat: 33gPolyunsaturated Fat: 7gMonounsaturated Fat: 17gTrans Fat: 0.3gCholesterol: 116mgSodium: 386mgPotassium: 566mgFiber: 7gSugar: 73gVitamin A: 1063IUVitamin C: 1mgCalcium: 168mgIron: 6mg
      Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

      Apple Caramel Hand Pies

      Modified: Nov 5, 2025 · Published: Sep 2, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 12 Comments

      Three Apple Caramel Handpies on a white plate.

      These Apple Caramel Hand Pies feature my Amazing Pastry Dough Recipe that mimics puff pastry without all the fuss. There are no butter blocks to contend with, no butter breaking through and not worries. With apple season just around the corner, what could be better than caramels and apples enclosed in a flaky pastry?

      Three Apple Caramel Handpies on a white plate.

      Hand Pies have been around as long as people have been cooking.  Anything enclosed in bread or pastry that can be eaten out of hand qualifies.  It can be a turnover, English pasty, a calzone, or Russian pierogis.  Every culture has a hand pie no matter what they call it.

      Another recipe using this pastry is the Amazing Pastry Dough Recipe. If your looking for another easy pastry see my Easier "Danish Pastry Recipe", Pithiviers Made with Blitz Puff Pastry, Sunny Side Up Apricot Pastries, and the Chocolate Raspberry Pop Tarts.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      About the Amazing Pastry Dough

      It is important when making the pastry to make sure the butter stays in pea size piece as in a pie crust.  The pastry should not come together in the mixer.  It should be removed as soon as it clumps together.  It is pushed together into a cohesive dough on the work surface and rolled into a rectangle.  I fold mine into what is called a book fold as has more layers than the traditional three fold laminated pastry.

      It is best to make the pastry at least the day or up to three days ahead.  It rolls out easily.  When making pastry for a hand pie, do not roll it out too thick, especially as this will rise as does puff pastry but not as dramatically.

      Let's Talk Caramel

      This recipe calls for the use of a bought caramel, Werther's Original soft and chewy caramels.  But my caramel would make an even better version.  Just use about 1 tablespoon per hand pie and place it on the bottom of the hand pie with the apple filling over it.

      A salted version can be made by sprinkling coarse sea salt lightly over the caramel.

      Or, if you wish, omit the caramel and just use the apple filling.  This filling is a great basic apple filling for anything made with apples.

      Potato or Cornstarch?

      A word about the potato starch.  I have recently switched from cornstarch to potato starch for a couple of reasons.  The first is anything thickened with potato starch can be frozen and thawed with no harm.  Cornstarch will break down if frozen and thawed.  Secondly, potato starch can be heated to a higher temperature than cornstarch.  If you have ever cooked something with cornstarch in it and it has lost its thickness, it was cooked too long or at too  high a heat.  The potato starch, like cornstarch, is clear when cooked.

      This Apple Caramel Hand Pie can be frozen before baking without the egg wash.  It is best to bring it to room temperature, egg wash it and then bake it.  Hand Pies are great to have in the freezer when you want a quick dessert or treat.

      List of Ingredients

      Amazing Pastry Dough Recipe

      The pastry dough ingredients for the Apple Caramel Hand Pies are baking powder, sour cream, salt, unsalted butter and all-purpose flour.

      FRONT ROW: Salt, Baking Powder

      MIDDLE ROW: Unsalted Butter

      BACK ROW: All-purpose flour, sour cream

      Filling Ingredients 1

      Ingredients for the apple filling include apples, granulated sugar, cinnamon, nutmeg, water, lemon juice, and potato starch.

      CLOCKWISE FROM THE TOP: Apples, water, potato starch, cinnamon, nutmeg, granulated sugar, lemon juice in the middle

      Filling Ingredients 2

      The second set of filling ingredients includes Werther soft caramels, cooked apple filling and the pastry.

      FRONT ROW: Amazing pastry dough

      BACK ROW: Werther Soft Caramels, cooked apple filling

      Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients &instructions.

      STEP BY STEP INSTRUCTIONS

      Amazing Pastry Dough

      If at any point the dough begins to soften, chill it in the refrigerator or freezer before moving on 

      The first collages shows the butter cut, dry ingredients in the mixing bowl, butter added and the butter cut in.

      Step 1. Cut the very cold butter in about 8 pieces per stick. If prepping the remainder of the recipe, refrigerate the butter.  Step 2. Place the dry ingredients in the bowl of a mixer.  Step 3. Add the cold butter.  Step 4.  With the mixer set on low, but the butter in leaving large pieces. 

      Sour cream is added to the mixing bowl, large pieces of butter  are seen, the dough is poured onto the counter, and finally pushed together to make a cohesive dough.

      Step 5. Add the sour cream to the mixer. Step 6. Add 2 tablespoons of water and beat on low to form a large crumbly dough. Step 7. Pour the dough onto a work area. Step 8. Push it together to form a cohesive block of dough.

      The dough is spread out, rolled out, the top and bottom brought to the center and finally folded over.

      Step 9.  To make rolling out easier, flatten the dough in about 3 or 4 places with the rolling pin.  Step 10.  Roll the dough out to about 16" x8". Step 11. Fold the top and bottom to the center, leaving about a ½" gap. Step 12.  Fold the top down to make a neat package.

      This collage shows the pastry turned 90°, rolled out into a large square, a 6" cake round used as a guide, 4 6" rounds cut out.

      Step 13. Turn the pastry 90° with the open side to the right and repeat the rolling and folding above one more time.  Step 14.  Roll the dough into a 12 ½"x 18 ½" rectangle. Step 15. Using a 6" circle cut 6 rounds out of the dough.  Step 16.  Four of the cut rounds. The photos above are representative.

      Apple Caramel Hand Pies

      This collages shows the ingredients for the apple filling in a bowl, then cooked, the caramels on a round of dough the apples on top of the caramels and the pastry being wet on the edge.

      Step 1. Peel the apples and cut into about ½ inch dice. You should have about 4 cups. Combine the apples with the sugar, cinnamon, nutmeg and water. Step 2. Place in a medium saucepan and simmer until the apples are tender. When the apples are almost done, stir the potato starch into the lemon juice and add to the apple mixture. Bring to a boil and cook several minutes until thickened. Cool completely.  Step 3. Line 4 caramels along the bottom of the rounds, leaving a ½ inch border. Sprinkle with a little sea salt if using. Step 4. Place ⅙ of the filling (scant ⅓ cup) over the caramels. Wet the border with water.

      This collages shows the top of the cicle of dough covering the filling making a half moon, the edges are crimped with a for, a slit is cut in the top and the hand pie is brushed with an egg wash.

      Step 5. bring the top down over the apples matching the edges. Press together. Step 6. Seal with the tines of a fork. Refrigerate the hand pies until completely cold before cutting the vents to make a cleaner looking pastry. Step 7. Cut a slit in the top of the hand pie. Step 8. Brush with the egg wash. Double pan and bake as directed.

      Recipe FAQS

      Are all hand pies shaped the same?

      No not at all. They can be half moons, triangles, whole circles with two pieces of dough instead of one.

      Are turnovers the same as hand pies?

      Although some say they are different, I say they are the same. The pastry might be different but a hand pie is meant to be eaten out of your hand as is a turnover so I don't see any difference.

      Are hand pies always sweet?

      No. The Cornish hand pie which was often sent to the mine with the workers were substantially filled with meat, vegetables and a sturdy crust. Tiddly in naval slang means 'proper', a common adjective and adverb used

      What is a Tiddly Oggie

      According to the History of Tiddly Oggies, Tiddly in naval slang means 'proper', a common adjective and adverb used by Cornish people, and oggie was the term for a pastie in cornwall, so “tiddly oggie” meant proper pasty. Cornish rugby supporters later adopted the chant “Oggie, oggie, oggie, oi, oi, oi!” when cheering on their team.

      Storage and Freezing

      This Apple Caramel Hand Pie can be frozen before baking without the egg wash.  It is best to bring it to room temperature, egg wash it and then bake it.  Hand Pies are great to have in the freezer when you want a quick dessert or treat.

      They can be kept at room temperature for several days. Warming them slightly enhances their flavor.

      Expert Tips

      • Cold and clean are two of the most important points when making laminated doughs. If the butter softens at any time, refrigerate or freeze briefly to get it cold again. Make sure if any dough sticks to the rolling pin, to clean it off with a paper towel immediately. If you continue to roll, more pastry will stick to the pin and the pastry can tear.
      • Refrigerate the filled pastries before cutting the vents on top and egg washing. This will make cleaner cuts for a better looking pastry. This should be done just before baking.
      • These keep well at room temperature, uncovered for a day or two.
      • The pastry can be made in its entirety and frozen well wrapped for up to 3 months. Thaw in the fridge overnight to use. Warm in a 350° oven for 10 to 15 minutes if cold, less if room temperature.
      • The completed pastries can also be frozen well wrapped for up to 3 months without the egg wash. Egg wash them just before baking. Either thaw them overnight and bake cold or bake them from the freezer adding additional time.
      • Mixing a Granny Smith with Gala apples is a great combo for these hand pies. Cutting the apples in about ½" dice is a good size.
      • If using cornstarch instead of potato starch these should not be frozen or they may leak after thawing and heating. Cornstarch breaks down in the freezer.
      Three golden half moon hand pies with slits showing the apple filling sit on an Irish decorated platter.

      More Delicious Apple Treats

      • A caramel topped scoop of ice cream with roasted apples around it.
        Apple Pie ala Mode with Salted Caramel
      • A single Apple Muffin covered with a crunchy sugar topping.
        Crunchy Topped Apple Muffin Recipe
      • Apple Cake Doughnuts on a plate with a napkin in the background.
        Apple Cake Doughnuts
      • Honey Thyme Apple Tart
        Honey Thyme Apple Tart

      A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it.  

      Three Apple Caramel Handpies on a white plate.

      Apple Caramel Hand Pies

      Helen S. Fletcher
      These Apple Caramel Hand Pies feature my Amazing Pastry Dough Recipe that mimics puff pastry without all the fuss. With apple season just around the corner, what could be better than caramels and apples enclosed in a flaky pastry?
      No ratings yet
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 1 hour hr 30 minutes mins
      Cook Time 45 minutes mins
      Total Time 2 hours hrs 15 minutes mins
      Course Dessert
      Cuisine American
      Servings 6 Hand pies
      Calories 569 kcal
      Prevent your screen from going dark

      Ingredients

      Amazing Pastry Dough

      • 1 ¾ cup all-purpose flour (245 grams)
      • ¾ teaspoon salt
      • ½ teaspoon baking powder
      • 1 cup unsalted butter, (225 grams or 2 sticks)
      • ½ cup sour cream, cold (114 grams)
      • 2 tablespoons water

      Apple Caramel Hand Pies

      • 1 large Granny Smith apple
      • 2 Gala apples
      • ½ cup granulated sugar (100 grams)
      • ½ teaspoon cinnamon
      • ¼ teaspoon nutmeg
      • ¼ cup water
      • 1 tablespoon lemon juice
      • 1 tablespoon potato starch or cornstarch
      • 2 5 oz. bags Werther's Original Chewy Caramels
      • Coarse Sea Salt, optional
      • 1 egg, beaten

      Instructions
       

      Amazing Pastry Dough

      • Cut the very cold butter in about ¾" pieces per stick. If prepping the remainder of the recipe, refrigerate the butter until needed..
      • Place the flour, salt and baking powder in the bowl of a mixer. Mix briefly to combine.
      • Place the butter over the flour and mix on low to medium  to break up the butter but keep it in large pieces.
      • Add the sour cream and mix to bring it together. Add the water and mix to form large crumbs. It should not ball up or come together completely.
      • Pour it out onto a work surface and push together to form a rectangular block of dough. Knead it 3 or 4 times to smooth it out, keeping the butter in large pieces.
      • Press a rolling pin into the dough about 3 or4 times several inches apart from the top to the bottom. These "hills and valleys" will help roll out the dough more evenly.
      • Sprinkle the surface lightly with flour. Roll the dough to a 16" x 8" rectangle. If the pastry begins to soften, chill it until firm.
      • Brush off any flour and fold the top and bottom to the center of the pastry, leaving a ½" channel in the middle.
      • Brush off any flour and fold the top and bottom to the center of the pastry, leaving a ½" channel in the middle.
      • Fold the top over the bottom, creating a book like pstry. Turn the pastry 90° with the fold to left.
      • Lightly sprinkle the surface with flour and repeat the rolling and folding. Wrap in plastic wrap and chill until cold throughout, overnight or up to 3 days. It can also be placed in a freezer bag and frozen for several months. Thaw in the refrigerator overnight before using.
      • Keep the dough refrigerated while preparing the filling.

      Apple Caramel Hand Pies

      • Peel the apples and cut into about ½ inch dice. You should have about 4 cups. 
      • Combine the apples with the sugar, cinnamon, nutmeg and water. Place them in a medium saucepan and simmer until the apples are tender. 
      • When the apples are almost done, stir the potato starch into the lemon juice and add it to the apple mixture. Bring to a boil and cook several minutes until thickened. Cool completely. 

      Assembly

      • If at any point the pastry becomes soft, refrigerate or freeze to firm it up. The butter needs to be kept in pieces for the highest rise. Lightly flour the surface.
      • Preheat the oven to 425°F. Line a ½ sheet with parchment. Set aside.
      • Roll the pastry into a 12 ½" x 18 ½" inch rectangle. With a 6" round cutter (a saucer or cake round is fine) cut 6 rounds out of the pastry. Refrigerate if soft.
      • Line 4 caramels along the bottom of the rounds, leaving a ½ inch border on the bottom and sides. Sprinkle with a little sea salt if using. Place ⅙ of the filling (scant ⅓ cup) over the caramels. 
      • Wet the bottom border with water, bring the top down over the apples matching the edges. Press together. Seal with the tines of a fork. Refrigerate until cold.
      • Brush with egg wash. Cut a vent in the top.
      • Double pan and bake for 18 to 22 minutes until medium golden brown.  Cool.  Serve slightly warm.
      • These will keep up to 2 days at room temperature or they can be frozen either baked or unbaked without the egg wash. Thaw in the refrigerator overnight, brush with egg wash and bake as called for. If baking from the freezer, brush with egg wash and add extra time baking to a medium golden brown.

      Notes

      There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
      As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest
      ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­                                                                                                                                   
      Cold and clean are two of the most important points when making laminated doughs. If the butter softens at any time, refrigerate or freeze briefly to get it cold again. Make sure if any dough sticks to the rolling pin, to clean it off with a paper towel immediately. If you continue to roll, more pastry will stick to the pin and the pastry can tear.
      Refrigerate the filled pastries before cutting the vents on top and egg washing. This will make cleaner cuts for a better looking pastry. This should be done just before baking.
      The pastry can be made in its entirety and frozen well wrapped for up to 3 months. Thaw in the fridge overnight to use. Warm in a 350° oven for 10 to 15 minutes if cold, less if room temperature. 
      The completed pastries can also be frozen well wrapped for up to 3 months without the egg wash. Egg wash them just before baking. Either thaw them overnight and bake cold or bake them from the freezer adding additional time.
      Mixing a Granny Smith with Gala apples is a great combo for these hand pies. Cutting the apples in about ½" dice is a good size.
      If using cornstarch instead of potato starch these should not be frozen or they may leak after thawing and heating. Cornstarch breaks down in the freezer.

      Nutrition

      Serving: 6hand piesCalories: 569kcalCarbohydrates: 59gProtein: 6gFat: 36gSaturated Fat: 22gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 9gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 120mgSodium: 349mgPotassium: 191mgFiber: 3gSugar: 28gVitamin A: 1158IUVitamin C: 6mgCalcium: 66mgIron: 2mg
      Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

      As

      Multiple Cake Layers from 1 Recipe

      Modified: Aug 30, 2025 · Published: Aug 29, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 15 Comments

      The opening photo for Multiple Cake Layers from 1 Recipe includes white, yellow, marble, 2 different chocolate layers and 3 citrus versions.

      This version of Multiple Cake Layers from 1 Recipe is a makeover of the original post in 2017. It's a deep dive into baking this type of cake which I hope will get everyone ready for the upcoming season of baking.

      The most exciting part of this amazing recipe is that a single recipe can be used to make eight different flavored cake layers to fill and finish as you like. You may never need any other layer cake recipes.

      The opening photo for Multiple Cake Layers from 1 Recipe includes white, yellow, marble, 2 different chocolate layers and 3 citrus versions.

      Many, many years ago when I first opened my bakery, the challenge was finding recipes for cake layers that worked and could be scaled up.  It seemed like all I did was test.

      Then I discovered, as did everyone, "The Cake Bible" by Rose Levy Beranbaum.  It was a game changer for anyone interested in baking and cakes.  The explanations of what was going on and why in each recipe helped us understand baking better.  At that point in time (1988)  there was not a lot of information on the science of baking, which made this book all the more valuable.

      I found the recipes in her book for cake layers to be the recipes I was looking for.  Although I used recipes from many sources, including those I came up with, "The Cake Bible" was always my back up.

      This recipe is a slight variation of her White Velvet Cake.  I have used it before in my Spirited Marble Cake.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Base Recipes

      What is a base recipe? It is a basic recipe professional bakers use that can be changed in different ways to make many different bakery items. In my post, The Importance of a Base Recipe in Baking it focuses on a base recipe for cookies but the idea is the same for cakes.

      You will see by looking at the recipes there will be additions or slight changes to the original recipe resulting in all of the different flavored layers.

      High Ratio Cakes

      This cake is a high ratio cake. High ratio cakes require the sugar to be equal to or exceed the amount of flour by weight not by volume. It's also the quickest way to make a butter cake. Not every cake can be mixed this way.

      Basically, part of the wet ingredients are held out and mixed together. Everything else is added to the mixing bowl. After about a 2 ½ minute mix the wet ingredients are added in thirds, mixed for 30 seconds each and that's it. Into the pans it goes. It just doesn't get any easier, faster or better.

      Butter Temperature is Important

      The one point that needs to be stressed in this cake recipe is the temperature of the butter - it needs to be soft.  As you will see, the recipe states softened.  Most recipes states room temperature butter. That can mean a lot of different things depending on if you're in Alaska or the southwest.  I have seen recommendations by several prominent authors that 68°F is the ideal temperature for butter when creaming. However, I find that is still too cold to blend or cream well with sugar.  I got a sandy texture but not one where I would call it creamed. Creaming introduces air into the mixture helping the batter to rise.

      The temperature of the butter I use for creaming or when calling for "softened butter" is 72°F or 74°F. At this temperature, it will mix together completely.  It is important in this recipe as the butter is being combined with a large amount of flour, sugar, and liquid all at once.  If you don't have an instant read thermometer (and you should) the best I can tell you is that it will feel soft when you press it in the package but not mushy.  In no case should it be liquid.  This happens a lot when butter is microwaved to soften it.  I usually remove butter the night before if I am baking in the morning. I also keep my house around 73°F in the summer.

      A Surprise When Making The Chocolate Cake Layers

      The chocolate cake test was really surprising.  I made one recipe of the white cake and split the batter in half by weight.  I added cocoa to one layer and melted and cooled chocolate to the other layer.  The two cake layers couldn't have been more different.  The one with the chocolate was much paler and had less of a chocolate taste.  It was more like a German Chocolate batter.  The cocoa layer was very dark and was intensely chocolate.  I am including both for your reference. I thought the one with chocolate would have tasted deeply of chocolate. Both are very good - just different.

      Buttercreams to Use with the layers and ganache

      • Raspberry Buttercream
      • Espresso Buttercream
      • Strawberry Buttercream
      • German and American Buttercreams
      • French Buttercream
      • Italian Buttercream
      • Chocolate Buttercream
      • Whipped Cream Frosting
      • Cream Cheese Frosting
      • Dobos Torte Chocolate Buttercream
      • Spirited Chocolate Buttercream
      • Strawberry Buttercream

      Cake Pan Prep

      I have an entire post on how I prepare my pans in order to get flat cake layers that aren't humpy and don't need to be trimmed. I show you below the basics but see Cake Pan Prep for more in depth information.

      Recipe Ingredients (for Base White Cake Only)

      Ingredients for the white base cake are ett whites, milk, cake flour, granulates sugar, baking powder, unsalted butter, vanilla and almond extracts.

      FRONT ROW: Salt, baking powder almond extract, unsalted butter

      MIDDLE ROW: Egg wites, vanilla exract

      BACK ROW: Cake Flour, granulated sugar and milk

      Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients and instructions.

      Step by Step Instructions

      Cake Pan Prep

      This collage shows how to prepare the cake pans so the layers come out flat.  It show the pan, center only sprayed with a non-stick baking release, parchment paper linng the pan and the center of the paper sprayed.

      Step 1. The baking pans I use are from Parrish's magic pan line. Some of them are still from my bakery of 35 years ago. They are aluminum and are sturdy. Step 2. Spray the center only with a non-stick baking release. Do not spray or otherwise prepare the sides. This will help keep the paper flat when adding the batter to the pan. Step 3. Line the pan with a parchment paper circle. Step 4. Spray the center only with the baking spray. Again, Do not spray or otherwise prepare the sides.

      Base Recipe for White Cake From Which All Others Come.

      The base white cake collages shows the egg whites, some milk and extracts are mixed, and the dry ingredients in the mixing bowl and mixed.

      Step 5. Combine the egg whites, some of the milk and the extracts in a mall bowl. Step 6. Whisk to mix. Step 7. Place the dry ingredients in the bowl of a mixer. Step 8. Mix on low briefly to combie.

      This collages shows the butter added to the dry ingredients in the mixing bowl, the milk added, then mixed and last the egg white mixture added.

      Step 9. Add the butter to the dry ingredients. Step 10. Add the remaining milk to the mixing bowl. Step 11. Beat For 1 ½ minutes. Step 12. Add the egg white mixture by thirds, beating for 30 seconds each time. Divide among the 2 pans and bake as directed.

      Marble Layer

      The collage shows the marble layer being made by adding chocolate to half of the white base layer, alternating batters in the pan, swirling them and the baked layer.

      Step 13. Divide the white base layer in half. To one half add the melted and cooled chocolate. Step 14. Place a large spoon of the two batters alternately around the pan. Make a second row on top of the bottom one, placing the white batter on the chocolate one, and the chocolate on the white. Step 15. Swirl the batters together with a toothpick or skewer. Do not over swirl, there should be two different colors of batter visible. Step 16. The marble cake after baking.

      Variations on a Theme

      The last collage shows the white, yellow, chocolate and cocoa layers.

      Step 17. The white layer baked. Step 18. The yellow cake layer baked. 3 egg yolks are substituted for the egg whites. All the rest is the same. Step 19. Melted and cooled semisweet chocolate is added to the batter then baked. Step 20. Cocoa is replaces part of the cake flour for this chocolate cake which is the deepest and most chocolatey of the two chocolate cakes after baking. There are also 3 citrus versions on the recipe card.

      Recipe FAQS

      Why is cake flour used?

      Cake flour has the lowest amount of gluten of the common wheat flours. This makes for a softer layer which is usually more moist than if using other flours.

      Can 2% milk be used in this recipe?

      Yes, Either whole or 2% may be used. Do not use skimmed or less than 2%.

      What happens if I spray or grease the sides of the pans?

      You will most likely get a cake that rises more in the center and has to be trimmed. By not preparing the sides of the pan, the cake clings to the sides and can't slide back down while waiting for the middle of the cake to finish baking. See my post on Cake Pan Prep for in depth information.

      Expert Tips

      • Be sure to follow the specific times as listed in the recipe.
      • Do not beat above medium on a stand mixer to keep from developing gluten.
      • If the milk and butter are about the same temperature, batter curdling is less likely.
      • When using melted chocolate, cool it to room temperature before adding it to the white batter.
      • Use Dutch cocoa in the cocoa layer for more flavor and to be able to use the same leavening agent.
      • Prepare the pans as directed to obtain flat layers.
      The cut layers of the marble, yellow, white and two chocolate cakes are stacked on top of each other.

      From top to bottom: The cut layers are: Marble, yellow, chocolate cake with chocolate (that is slightly under baked), the white cake and the cocoa chocolate cake.

      More Recipes Using High Ratio Cake Batter

      • Slices of the Strawberry Cake sit on a marble plate with fresh strawberries.
        Strawberry Cake - A Little Slice of Heaven
      • Spirited Marble Cake
      • Yellow Buttermilk Cake
      • This Mini Pineapple Upside Down Cake features a pineapple slice with a cherry in the middle on top of a yellow cake sitting on a blue and white plate.
        Mini Pineapple Upside Down Cakes

      A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it.  

      The opening photo for Multiple Cake Layers from 1 Recipe includes white, yellow, marble, 2 different chocolate layers and 3 citrus versions.

      Multiple Cake Layers from 1 Recipe

      Helen S. Fletcher
      The most exciting part of this recipe is that a single recipe can be used to make eight different flavored cake layers to fill and finish as you like.
      4.88 from 8 votes
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 20 minutes mins
      Cook Time 25 minutes mins
      Total Time 45 minutes mins
      Course Cake, Cake Layers, Easy to make
      Cuisine American
      Servings 12 servings
      Calories 330 kcal
      Prevent your screen from going dark

      Ingredients

      • 4 large egg whites (130 grams)
      • 1 cup milk, whole or 2%
      • 1 ½ teaspoon almond extract
      • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
      • 3 cups cake flour (300 grams)
      • 1 ½ cups granulated sugar (300 grams)
      • 1 tablespoon + 1 teaspoon baking powder
      • ¼ teaspoon salt
      • 12 tablespoons unsalted butter, softened (170 grams or 1 ½ sticks)

      Instructions
       

      • Preheat oven to 350 degrees.Spray the center only of two 9x2 inch round cake pans a non-stick baking release. Line with parchment paper rounds and spray the center only of those. Set aside. . 
      • In a bowl, lightly combine the egg whites, ¼ cup milk, almond extract and vanilla.  
      • In a large mixing bowl combine the dry ingredients and mix on low speed for 30 seconds to blend.  Add the butter and remaining ¾ cup milk.  Mix on low speed until the dry ingredients are moistened.  Increase to medium and beat for 1 ½ minutes.  Gradually add the egg mixture in thirds, beating about 30 seconds each time.  
      • Gradually add the egg mixture in thirds, beating 30 seconds each time.  
      • Divide the dough between the two prepared pans (about 555 grams each). Bake for 18 to 22 minutes until a tester comes out clean.
      • For three layers, divide the dough into 3 prepared pans of about 370 grams or 13 ounces each.  Bake for 14 to 15 minutes or until very lightly colored.  

      Variations

      • Yellow - Substitute 3 egg yolks for the egg whites.  All the rest remains the same.
      • Marble - Divide the white batter in half.  Add 3 ounces of melted chocolate to one half.  Alternated white and chocolate dough in the pans. Top with a second layer of white and chocolate dough over the first layer. Place the chocolate on the white and the white on the chocolate. Swirl together with a toothpick or wooden skewer. Do not over swirl.
      • Chocolate Cake with Cocoa – This is the darkest and most intense of the two chocolate cakes.  It tastes the most chocolatey.  I used 60 grams (2 ounces) of dutched cocoa and 240 grams (8 ½ ounces) of cake flour in place of all flour.  Place in the mixing bowl with the remainder of the dry ingredients.  All the rest remains the same.  Bake for 24 to 26 minutes.
      • Chocolate Cake with Semisweet Chocolate - This cake is lightly flavored with chocolate and emulates a German Chocolate Layer.  
        For this cake you whisk in 6 ounces (170 grams) of melted bittersweet or semisweet chocolate into the finished batter.  The chocolate can be melted in a bowl over hot, but not boiling water or microwaved at half power for about 2 ½ minutes.  Stir and, if not melted, microwave briefly at half power in 15 second bursts.
        The layers for this cake will weigh about 1200 grams (42 ounces) total or 600 grams).
        Bake for 24 to 26 minutes.
      • Lemon Cake – Add the zest of 3 large or 4 medium lemons to the batter of the yellow cake using all vanilla in the batter.  Add it with the dry ingredients in the mixing bowl.    All the rest remains the same.
        Bake these layers for 18 to 22 minutes until the center springs back when lightly touched or a tester comes out clean.  
      • Orange Cake – Add the zest (orange part only, do not use the white pith below) of a large navel oranges to the white batter using all almond extract.  Add it with the dry ingredients in the mixing bowl.  All the rest remains the same.
        Bake for 18 to 22 minutes until the center springs back when lightly touched or a tester comes out clean.  
        Juice oranges will not provide enough zest because of their thin skin. 
      • Citrus Cake – Use the zest of 1 navel orange, 1 lemon and 2 limes.  Add them to the dry ingredients in the mixing bowl.  All the rest remains the same.
        Bake these layers for 18 to 22 minutes until the center springs back when lightly touched or a tester comes out clean.  

      Notes

      There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
      As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
      ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­                                                                                                                                 
      Be sure to follow the specific times as listed in the recipe. 
      Be sure to follow the specific times as listed in the recipe. 
      Do not beat above medium on a stand mixer to keep from developing gluten.
      If the milk and butter are about the same temperature, batter curdling is less likely.
      When using melted chocolate, cool it to room temperature before adding it to the white batter.
      Use Dutch cocoa in the cocoa layer for more flavor and to be able to use the same leavening agent. 
      Prepare the pans as directed to obtain flat layers on a stand mixer to keep from developing gluten.

      Nutrition

      Serving: 12servingsCalories: 330kcalCarbohydrates: 49gProtein: 6gFat: 13gSaturated Fat: 8gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 3gTrans Fat: 0.5gCholesterol: 33mgSodium: 183mgPotassium: 85mgFiber: 1gSugar: 26gVitamin A: 383IUCalcium: 93mgIron: 0.4mg
      Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

      .SaveSaveSaveSaveSaveSaveSaveSaveSaveSaveSaveSaveSaveSaveSaveSave

      Peach Mousse with Cinnamon Crunch

      Modified: May 1, 2026 · Published: Aug 26, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 4 Comments

      A picture of a single Peach Mousse with Cinnamon Crunch on a clear plate with a tray in the background,

      Peach Mousse with Cinnamon Crunch is one last dessert with the fresh peaches of summer.  Cold and creamy with a cinnamon crunch topping, it goes with any meal from the fanciest to the most informal.  It sits obligingly in the fridge until it’s served.

      This is one of the easiest desserts you can make and dare I say, one of the best!

      A picture of a single Peach Mousse with Cinnamon Crunch on a clear plate with a tray in  the background,

      Fruit mousses can be good but unexciting with mainly fruit puree and whipped cream. But to jazz it up I use Amaretto for the liquid and give it a crunchy topping - which by the way is not only easy to make, it's absolutely addictive!

      If you love peach desserts, you'll also enjoy these: Peach Crumb Coffee Cake, Caramelized Peach Tart with Brown Sugar Crumble, Dutch Peach Pie, No Churn Peach Swirl Ice Cream

      For another elegant dessert idea, try these Tiramisu Parfaits.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why You'll Love This Recipe

      • It's super easy.
      • It has a lot of flavor due the addition of the liqueur.
      • The ingredients are simple and easy to get.
      • This needs to be made the day ahead.
      • The Cinnamon Crunch can be made a week ahead,
      • If you make nothing else, make the Cinnamon Crunch.

      Peeling the Peaches

      There are two ways to peel peaches and one has a definite advantage. They need to be peeled to remove the fuzzy peel which will ruin the texture of the mousse. In both cases the peaches must be ripe for the most flavor.

      The first is to use a vegetable peeler and remove the peel. The problem with this is that is also takes the flesh with it. Peaches have thin skins so losing some of the flesh is inevitable.

      The second is my preferred way and the one I use. It's actually easier than peeling them and not a bit of the flesh is wasted. Bring a pot of water to a boil. Add the peaches and boil for a minute or two. Test one by running it under cold water and simply slip the skin off. I'll show you below. And once the water boils, the peaches can be peeled faster than with a vegetable peeler. See the photos below. For more in depth information on peaches see my post, All About Peaches.

      Recipe Ingredients

      Cinnamon Crunch

      The ingredients for the Cinnamon Crunch include, brown sugar, granulated sugar, vanilla, unsalted butter and cinnamon

      FRONT ROW: Vanilla Extract, unsalted butter, cinnamon

      BACK ROW: Dark brown sugar, granulated sugar

      Ingredients for the Peach Mousse are fresh peaches, heavy cream, amaaretto, granulated sugar and gelatin.

      FRONT ROW: Amaretto, granulated sugar, gelatin

      BACK ROW: Peeled peached, heavy cream

      Important Ingredients

      • Dark brown sugar yields the most taste.
      • Heavy Cream is used for it's stability and thickness.
      • Amaretto liqueur adds flavor to the mousse.
      • Gelatin is used to set the mousse.
      • Korintje cinnamon is my cinnamon of choice.

      Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions.

      Step by Step Instructions

      Cinnamon Crunch

      The cinnamon crunch collage shows the two brown and granulated sugar with the cinnamon in a bowl, mixed together, the melted butter and vanilla in a bowl and then added to the dry ingredients.

      Step 1. Combine the brown and granulated sugars along with the cinnamon in a bowl. Step 2. Mix throughly. Step 3. Stir the melted butter and vanilla together. Step 4. Pour over the dry ingredients and mix with a fork to make a paste.

      This collages shows the cinnamon crunch on a tray, spread out, baked and crushed into crumbles.

      Step 5. Pour the paste onto a parchment lined quarter sheet or 9x13"pan. Step 6. Spread out evenly. Step 7. Bake as directed. I got a bit over enthusiastic and started eating it as soon as it was cool. See if you can do better. Step 8. Break it up into crumbs. If making ahead, store in an airtight container.

      Peeling the Peaches

      This collage of the peaches being peeled for the Peach Mousse include the peaches in boiling water, the skin being removed, the peaches being cut on their equator and the broken open.

      Step 1. Bring a pot of water to a boil. Add the peaches. Step 2. Immediately run cold water on the peaches to stop the cooking. Simply remove the skin from the peaches. It will slip off easily. Step 3. Cut the peach on it's equator. Step 4. Separate the halves of the peach and remove the stone.

      Step 1. Combine the brown and granulated sugars along with the cinnamon in a bowl. Step 2. Mix throughly. Step 3. Stir the melted butter and vanilla together. Step 4. Pour over the dry ingredients and mix with a fork to make a paste.

      Step 5. Pour the paste onto a parchment lined quarter sheet or 9x13"pan. Step 6. Spread out evenly. Step 7. Bake as directed. I got a bit over enthusiastic and started eating it as soon as it was cool. See if you can do better. Step 8. Break it up into crumbs. If making ahead, store in an airtight container.

      Peach Mousse

      The first collage for the Peach Mousse includes the peeled peaches in the processor, processed, the amaretto and gelatin then mixed.

      Step 1. Place the peeled peached in the bowl of a processor. Step 2. Process until smooth. Scrape down as necessary and process until completely smooth. Step 3. The amaretto and gelatin waiting to be Step 4. Combined. Let sit until bloomed.

      This collages shows the cream whipped to soft peaks, the bowl of puree partially set, the cream added to the puree and then folded in.

      Step 5. Pour the puree into a medium size bowl. Place the bloomed gelatin in the microwave for about 8 seconds or so until liquid and slightly warm. Stir it into the puree. Refrigerate the puree until it starts to set. This can take a couple of hours depending upon your refrigerator. Step 6. When the puree is partially set, whip the cream to medium peaks. Do not let it get stiff or it won't fold well into the puree. Step 7. Add the cream to the puree. Step 8. Fold it incompletely. Pour it into serving glasses and refrigerate. Top it with the cinnamon crunch just before serving.

      Recipe FAQS

      Are there different types of mousse?

      Yes. The most known is chocolate mousse which is of the thick and creamy type. Fruit mousses are generally lighter.

      Why are fruit mousses lighter?

      Fruit purees such as strawberry, peach, etc. are generally lighter than chocolate. A fruit mousse base is the pureed fruit and whipped cream making a lighter, more airy mousse.

      Are mousse and pudding the same?

      No they are two different desserts. A mousse is not cooked and has a lighter texture often resulting in a more intense flavor than pudding which is heavier, cooked and thickened with cornstarch or another starch.

      Expert Tips

      • Peaches don't have a really strong profile so it is important that they are well ripened.
      • I reduced the amount of cream normally used to help intensify the peaches.
      • If you are concerned about the alcohol in the amaretto liqueur, boil it for a minute to burn off the alcohol making it just a flavoring. If you still don't want to use it, substitute water plus 1 teaspoon almond extract.
      • To avoid buying a large bottle of amaretto, just use the small individual bottles that are used on airlines. They are available in some grocery stores as well as liquor stores. One small bottle equals ¼ cup.
      • You will have cinnamon crunch left over it can be used over ice cream, it's great on a cream cheese topped bagel, or make my Cinnamon Crunch Rolls where I first used this topping.
      A tray of Peach Mousse on a gold rimmed tray with peaches in the middle.

      More Fruit Forward Treats

      • A slice of the Orange Almond Tea Cake sits on a white plate with 2 strawberries and the rest of the cut cake is behind it.
        Orange Almond Tea Cake
      • Strawberry Granita sists in a white bowl on a blue and white background with a yellow napkin and spoon .
        Strawberry Balsamic Granita Recipe
      • Roasted Peaches with Amaretti Crisp
        Roasted Peaches with Amaretti Crisp
      • A slice of No Bake Strawberry Pie finished with whipped cream, sits on a white plate with a yellow gingham background.
        (Almost) No Bake Strawberry Pie

      A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it.  

      A picture of a single Peach Mousse with Cinnamon Crunch on a clear plate with a tray in the background,

      Peach Mousse with Cinnamon Crunch

      Helen S. Fletcher
      Peach Mousse with Cinnamon Crunch is one last dessert with the fresh peaches of summer.  Cold and creamy with a cinnamon crunch topping, it goes with any meal from the fanciest to the most informal.
      5 from 2 votes
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 40 minutes mins
      Chilling Time 3 hours hrs
      Total Time 3 hours hrs 40 minutes mins
      Course Dessert
      Cuisine American
      Servings 6 servings
      Calories 437 kcal
      Prevent your screen from going dark

      Ingredients

      Cinnamon Crunch

      • ½ cup dark brown sugar (100 grams)
      • ¼ cup granulated sugar (50 grams)
      • 1 tablespoon cinnamon
      • 4 tablespoons unsalted butter, melted (58 grams)
      • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract

      Peach Mousse

      • ¼ cup amaretto liqueur*
      • 1 tablespoon gelatin
      • 2 pounds ripe peaches (910 grams)
      • ½ cup granulated sugar (100 grams)
      • ¾ cup heavy cream
      • *water may be substituted + 1 teaspoon almond extract

      Instructions
       

      Cinnamon Crunch

      • Preheat the oven to 350°F.   Line a quarter sheet pan or a 9x13” pan with parchment paper.  Spray with a non-stick baking release.  Set aside.
      • Combine the brown and granulated sugar with the cinnamon, mixing well.
      • Add the vanilla to the melted butter (rewarm if it has solidified) pour over the cinnamon-sugar mixture and blend together. This will not be crumbs. It is more of a thick paste. Spread it evenly over the parchment paper.
      • Bake for about 15 to 20 minutes until the center looks dull and is set. Do not over bake.
      • Cool completely.  Break into crumbs.  

      Peach Mousse

      • Combine the amaretto or water plus almond extract and the gelatin, stirring to mix. Set aside to bloom.
      • Peel the peaches either with a vegetable peeler or my preferred method of adding them to boiling water for 1 to 2 minutes. Plunge into cold water. Remove skins, split the peach along the equator and remove the stone. In either case, break the peach into several pieces and place in the processor.
      • Process until pureed, scraping down as necessary until smooth. Remove to a medium size bowl and stir in the sugar.
      • Microwave the gelatin for about 8 seconds or until liquified and warm. Immediately, stir into the pureed peaches. Refrigerate for several hours until the mixture begins to thicken. Stir the peaches from time to time to make sure they are thickening evenly.
      • At this point, whip the cream until medium peaks form. Do not over whip or it will be difficult to fold the cream into the peaches.
      • Fold the cream into the puree. Divide among the glasses or ramekins. I used 6- 6 ounce servings. Refrigerate to set at least 6 hours or overnight.
      • These can be served as is or add the cinnamon crunch just before serving. These can be held in the refrigerator for 3 days.

      Notes

      There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
      As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
      ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­                                                                                                                     
      Peaches don't have a strong profile so it is important that they are well ripened.
      I reduced the amount of cream normally used to help intensify the peaches. 
      If you are concerned about the alcohol in the amaretto liqueur, boil it for a minute to burn off the alcohol making it just a flavoring. If you still don't want to use it, substitute water plus 1 teaspoon almond extract.
      To avoid buying a large bottle of amaretto, just use the small individual bottles that are used on airlines. They are available in some grocery stores as well as liquor stores. 
      You will have cinnamon crunch left over it can be used over ice cream, it's great on a cream cheese topped bagel, or make my Cinnamon Crunch Rolls where I first used this topping. Or just eat it like I do!
       

      Nutrition

      Serving: 6servingsCalories: 437kcalCarbohydrates: 63gProtein: 3gFat: 19gSaturated Fat: 12gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 5gTrans Fat: 0.3gCholesterol: 54mgSodium: 37mgPotassium: 250mgFiber: 3gSugar: 60gVitamin A: 1167IUVitamin C: 6mgCalcium: 58mgIron: 1mg
      Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

      Dacquoise with Raspberry Mousse

      Modified: Aug 22, 2025 · Published: Aug 22, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 14 Comments

      Three meringue discs are filled with raspberry mousse and sit on a pink edged plate.

      Dacquoise with Raspberry Mousse is an amazing combination of three nutted meringue discs filled with a raspberry mousse that is enhanced with mascarpone. Made into individual desserts (who doesn't like their own dessert?) these stunning offerings are easy to make and easier to eat.

      Three meringue discs are filled with raspberry mousse and sit on a pink edged plate.

      The Raspberry Mascarpone Mousse is a recipe I designed for the restaurant one year for Valentine's Day.  While I could buy raspberry puree for the restaurant, I have not found one I like that is offered to the public.  Using seedless red raspberry jam which has been smoothed out in a processor makes an intensely raspberry flavor even with the addition of whipping cream and mascarpone.  

      Be sure to check out some other fruit desserts including: Roasted Peaches with Amaretti Crisp, Strawberry Verrines, Banana Bread Pudding, Apple Pie ala Mode with Salted Caramel, and Peach Mousse with Cinnamon Crunch.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Memo on Meringues

      Meringues are basically egg whites and sugar beaten to various consistencies depending upon what they are going to be used for.

      From there they can vary in many ways.  Extracts, oils, and powders can be used for flavoring.  Any nut can be added for flavoring.  Italian, French and Swiss meringues are all put together differently with the end result being a stiff mixture that can be piped, dropped or spread into cookies, cake layers or for piping onto pies such as lemon meringue and of course Baked Alaska.  

      Coming from Europe the most used nuts are hazelnuts, almonds and pistachios. For some reason, walnuts, although abundant in Europe are not use

      Dacquoise is a type of meringue that has finely ground nuts folded into it. It is also the name of a dessert. Broyage, Japonaise, and Nutted Meringues are all the same thing. Broyage is the Swiss name for nutted meringue and Japonaise is the French word for Japan – I have no idea how this came about.  What I do know is they are all delicious.

      Room Temperature or Cold Egg Whites

      There is some controversy over whether egg whites should be room temperature or cold when whipping. Either way works but there are differences.

      Room temperature egg whites whip up a bit faster but with bigger air bubbles which can break more easily when folding in ingredients. If the egg whites are cold, the air bubbles are smaller making for a firmer meringue in which the air bubbles stay intact better, everything else being equal. At the bakery and for home cooking, I am in the beat them cold camp.

      Tips for Adding the Sugar

      Conventional wisdom has always been to add the sugar slowly to egg whites beaten to the soft peak stage. However, while it may take a couple of minutes longer, I add the sugar to the egg whites all at once. I find no discernible difference and I don't have to stand around slowly adding it.

      The second tip is to use Baker's sugar which is simply more finely ground granulated sugar so it dissolves more easily, completely, and quickly into the whites which is key to how high they whip. Baker's sugar can be easily made at home and kept in an airtight container. See my post on Three Easy Sugar Fixes.

      Low and Slow

      The one caveat is to make any meringue, nutted or not, is to make it on a dry day. Sugar is hydroscopic which means it attracts water and is difficult to dry out if there is high humidity. To help ensure the meringues dry well, cornstarch is sometimes added to the mixture.

      Because meringues are basically dried out, not baked, they should be done so in low heat so as not to brown them. In culinary school you are often graded on how white the meringue is while being dried throughout. I wouldn't get too worried about that - a little color is not a problem. You just don't want then really browned.

      Recipe Ingredients

      Hazelnut Meringues

      The hazelnut meringues include granulated sugar, egg whites, cornstarch, vanilla extract and hazelnuts .

      FRONT ROW: Toasted Hazelnuts, cornstarch, vanilla extract

      BACK ROW: Granulated sugar, egg whites

      Raspberry Mousse

      The ingredients for the raspberry mousse include:  seedlesss red raspberry jam, heavy cream, mascarpone, powdered sugar, gelatin and lemon juice.

      FRONT ROW: Gelatin, red food coloring is not shown and is optional but makes the mousse look more appealing.

      MIDDLE ROW: Mascarpone, powdered sugar

      BACK ROW: Heavy Cream, seedless red raspberry jam, lemon juice

      Important Ingredients

      • Important Ingredients
      • Baker's sugar is best for meringues. See information above.
      • My preference is to use cold egg whites
      • Always toast the nuts for the most flavor
      • Seedless red raspberry jam is perfect for the flaovring
      • The lemon juice adds a bit of tang to the moussse
      • Mascarpone is a very smooth, creamy cheese often used in desserts such as tiramasu. It adds body as well as flavor. It can be expensive depending upon where you buy it. I find Trader Joe's has the best price.

      Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions.

      Step by Step Instructions

      Hazelnut Meringues

      The first collage shows the nuts and powdered sguar n the processor, then ground finely, the egg whites, sugar and vanilla in the bowl of a mixer and the egg whites beaten stiffly.

      Step 1. Toast the hazelnuts in a 350°F oven for 7 to 10 minutes. To remove the skins easily see my post Hazelnut Gianduja. After the nuts have been cooled, place them in the processor bowl with the cornstarch. Step 2. Process until the nuts are finely ground. Step 3. Place the egg whites, vanilla and baker's sugar in the bowl of a mixer. Step 4. Whip until the meringue is very stiff.

      This collage shows the ground nuts being folded into the meringue, the discs piped and baked.

      Step 5. Add the nut/cornstarch mixture to the meringue. Step 6. Fold the nut mixture into the meringue gently so as not to deflate the meringue. Do not over fold. The meringue should remain firm. Step 7. Using a cookie cutter or pastry circle, draw nine 3 ½" circles, equally spaced, on a piece of parchment the size of the pan. Place a second piece of parchment on top.  Fit a pastry bag with a number 3 or 4 open tip.

      Holding the tip about ½ inch above the template, pipe the batter in the circles starting in the middle and moving out to the edges.  Alternatively, measure a heaping tablespoon of meringue for each circle and spread it within the circle with a small offset spatula.  Remove the template, place it on a second half sheet pan and top it with another plain piece of parchment paper.  Repeat filling the circles with the meringue.  Remove the template before baking. Step 8. Bake for about 1 hour until they are completely dry.  Place the parchment on racks to cool completely.  They should come off by just lifting them.  When completely cooled, place in airtight containers where they can be held for weeks.

      This collage shows the steps for making the raspberry mousse including blooming the gelatin, whipping the cream, ten the mascarpone and powdered sugar then the mascarpone and raspberry jam.

      Raspberry Mousse

      Step 9. Dissolve the gelatin in the lemon juice.  Set aside. Step 10. Whip the cream until soft peaks form.  Remove to another bowl and set aside. Step 11. Have the mascarpone at room temperature. Without cleaning the bowl, add the mascarpone.  Whisk until soft.  If it is too cold, it may look a bit curdled.  That's fine. Step 12. Add the raspberry jam a third at a time.

      The last colllage shows the base for the raspberry mousse made, the whipped cream added, then piped onto th e meringues and the finished Hazelnut Dacquoise with Raspberry Mousse.

      Step 13.  Microwave the gelatin for about 8 to 10 seconds until liquid.  Pour into the mascarpone/raspberry mixture and whisk to incorporated.  It may look slightly curdled but that will be taken care of in the next step. Step 14. Fold in the cream.  It will look rather purplish and not too appetizing at this point.  Add red food coloring a few drops at a time until a pleasant color is achieved.  Refrigerate until almost set up.  It will depend upon how cold your refrigerator is but it took mine about 2 ½  hours.  Step 15. Fit a piping bag with an #8 or 9 open star tip.  Fill the piping bag about ⅔ full and holding the bag about ½ inch from the disc, pipe the mousse in a circle to within about ¼ inch of the edge.  Fill the middle by piping the mousse into it.  Pipe 12 circles in this manner.  Step 16.  Stack 2 of  them on top of each other.  Top with the 3rd plain meringue disc. Do not press down too hard or the meringue will break. Refrigerate.

      Recipe FAQS

      Why do meringues weep?

      Weeping refers to beads of unincorporated sugar rising to the top of the meringues when dried. To avoid this, use Baker's sugar and make sure the sugar is dissolved in the egg whites by taking a bit of the whipped meringue between your fingers. If it is gritty it needs to be whipped more. Baker's sugar can be made at home simply. See my post Three Easy Sugar Fixes to make it.

      How many types of meringues are there?

      The three most common are French, Swiss and Italian.

      Which meringue is the most commonly made?

      The French meringue is the most common, he lightest and the least stable but also the easiest. It is simply egg whites, sugar, and possibly cream of tartar and a flavoring. This mixture can be beaten to differing stiffnesses and used for cookies, to fold into other ingredients, as a topping for cakes and pies and is the base for marshmallows.

      Expert Tips

      • Don't over beat the cream for the mousse. If it is too stiff the air will be diminished when folding into the other ingredients resulting in a heavy mousse.
      • The use of food coloring enhances the looks of the mousse which will naturally be purplish.
      • It is important to have the mascarpone at room temperature to prevent curdling when whipping it.
      • Make the template for the meringue discs so they are all the same size and will stack nicely.
      • The discs can be made days ahead and stored in an airtight container.
      • Toast the nuts for the most intense flavor.
      Three meringue discs are filled with raspberry mousse and sit on a pink edged plate.

      Love Individual Desserts - Here's More!

      • This Caramel Hot Fudge Sundae sits in a clear glass with a container with a scoop of vanilla ice cream with a cherry on top.
        Caramel Hot Fudge Brownie Sundae
      • This Mini Pineapple Upside Down Cake features a pineapple slice with a cherry in the middle on top of a yellow cake sitting on a blue and white plate.
        Mini Pineapple Upside Down Cakes
      • An Individual Italian Tiramisu sits on a cream colored plate and dark beige and silver trim with a cup of tea and a plater of tiramisu in the background,
        Individual Italian Tiramisu
      • Individual Meringue
        Meringue Shells

      A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it.  

      Three meringue discs are filled with raspberry mousse and sit on a pink edged plate.

      Dacquoise with Raspberry Mousse

      Helen S. Fletcher
      Dacquoise with Raspberry Mousse is an amazing combination of three nutted meringue discs filled with a raspberry mousse that is enhanced with mascarpone.
      5 from 3 votes
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 55 minutes mins
      Drying & Chilling Time 4 hours hrs
      Total Time 4 hours hrs 55 minutes mins
      Course Dessert
      Cuisine American
      Servings 6 servings
      Calories 747 kcal
      Prevent your screen from going dark

      Ingredients

      Hazelnut Meringues

      • 2 ounces hazelnuts or almonds or half and half (60 grams)
      • 2 tablespoons cornstarch (15 grams)
      • 1 cup + 2 tablespoons baker's or granulated sugar (225 grams)
      • ½ cup egg whites (about 4 from large eggs)
      • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract

      Raspberry Mousse

      • 1 cup seedless red raspberry jam (285 grams)
      • 2 teaspoons gelatin
      • 2 tablespoons lemon juice
      • 1 cup heavy cream
      • ⅓ cup powdered sugar (45 grams)
      • 8 ounces mascarpone (225 grams)
      • Red food coloring, optional, as needed

      Instructions
       

      Hazelnut Meringues

      • Line two half sheets with parchment paper.  Place one rack in the oven on the bottom and the second on the middle rung.
      • Using a cookie cutter or pastry circle, draw nine 3 ½" circles, equally spaced, on a piece of parchment the size of the pan.  This is your template.  Set aside.
      • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Place the hazelnuts or almonds or half and half on a sheet pan and toast for 7 to 10 minutes until fragrant and medium brown. To remove the skins easily, see my post Hazelnut Gianduja. Cool completely.
      • Reduce the oven temperature to 250°F.
      • Combine the cooled hazelnuts and cornstarch in the bowl of a processor.  Process until the hazelnuts are finely ground.  Set aside.
      • Whip the egg whites, sugar and vanilla until very stiff, about 8 to 10 minutes depending upon the machine.  Fold the hazelnut/cornstarch mixture in by hand.  Do not over fold and break the mixture down.  It should remain firm.
      • Place the template on a half sheet pan.  Place another sheet of parchment over it.  Fit a pastry bag with a number 3 or 4 plain tip. Holding the tip about ½ inch above the template, pipe the batter in the circles starting in the middle and moving out to the edges.  
        Alternatively, measure a heaping tablespoon of meringue for each circle and spread it within the circle with a small offset spatula.  
      • Remove the template, place it on a second half sheet pan and top it with another plain piece of parchment paper.  Repeat filling the circles with the meringue.  
      • Bake for about 1 hour until they are completely dry.  Place the parchment with the meringues on racks to cool completely.  They should come off by just lifting them.  When completely cooled, place in airtight containers where they can be held for weeks.

      Raspberry Mousse

      • Place the raspberry jam in the processor bowl.  Process until smooth.  
      • Dissolve the gelatin in the lemon juice.  Set aside.
      • Whip the cream and powdered sugar until soft peaks form.  Remove to another bowl and set aside.
      • Without cleaning the bowl, add the room temperature mascarpone.  Whisk until soft.  Add the raspberry jam a third at a time.  
      • Microwave the gelatin for about 8 to 10 seconds until liquid.  Pour into the mascarpone/raspberry mixture and whisk to incorporated.  
      • Fold in the cream.  It will look rather purplish and not too appetizing at this point.  Add red food coloring a few drops at a time until a pleasant color is achieved.  
      • Refrigerate until almost set up.  It will depend upon how cold your refrigerator is but it took mine about 2 ½  hours
      • Fit a piping bag with an #8 or 9 open star tip.  Fill the piping bag about ⅔ full and holding the bag about ½ inch from the disc, pipe the mousse in a circle to within about ¼ inch of the edge.  Fill the middle by piping the mousse into it.  Pipe 12 circles in this manner
      • Stack 2 meringue discs with mousse on top of each other. Place the plain hazelnut meringue on top. Do not press down too hard or the meringue will break.

      Finishing

      • I had left over ganache from another project so I used a smaller tip and piped a bit in the center of the meringue disc.  I finished with a whole hazelnut.
      • Alternatively, if you don't have any ganache, melt a bit of chocolate and drizzle it from side to side or simply sprinkle with powdered sugar just before serving.

      Notes

      There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
      As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
      ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­                                                                                                                                   
      Baker's sugar is best for meringues. See information above.
      My preference is to use cold egg whites.
      Baker's sugar is best for meringues. See information above.
      Always toast the nuts for the most flavor.  All hazelnuts, all almonds or half and half can be used.
      Seedless red raspberry jam is perfect for the flavoring.
      The lemon juice adds a bit of tang to the mousse.
      Mascarpone is a very smooth, creamy cheese often used in desserts such as tiramasu. It adds body as well as flavor. It can be expensive depending upon where you buy it. I find Trader Joe's has the best price.
      Heavy cream is used for its ability to whip up tighter and higher.
      Don't over beat the cream for the mousse. If it is too stiff the air will be diminished when folding into the other ingredients resulting in a heavy mousse.
      The use of food coloring enhances the looks of the mousse which will naturally be purplish.
      It is important to have the mascarpone at room temperature to prevent curdling when whipping it.
      Make the template for the meringue discs so they are all the same size and will stack nicely. 
      The discs can be made days ahead and stored in an airtight container. 

      Nutrition

      Serving: 6servingsCalories: 747kcalCarbohydrates: 96gProtein: 9gFat: 37gSaturated Fat: 20gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 8gCholesterol: 83mgSodium: 87mgPotassium: 186mgFiber: 2gSugar: 80gVitamin A: 1114IUVitamin C: 8mgCalcium: 104mgIron: 1mg
      Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

      Easy No Bake Rocky Road Cheesecake

      Modified: Apr 22, 2026 · Published: Aug 15, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 21 Comments

      A slice of the Rocky Road Cheesecake sits on a white plate on a rattan server.

      Ummmmm cheesecake! This very Easy No Bake Rocky Road Cheesecake will become everyone's favorite! Cheesecakes have an unwarranted reputation of being difficult to make. Do you use a water bath or not? How do you prevent it from cracking? What temperature is best to bake it? And on and on it goes. What if you could make a great cheesecake without any baking involved? Of course you would!

      Well look no further because this Rocky Road Cheesecake is as easy as it gets.

      A slice of the Rocky Road Cheesecake sits on a white plate on a rattan server.

      While it looks complex it is actually very easy. Peanuts, chocolate and mini- marshmallows are stirred into a chocolate cheese cake made with cream cheese, condensed milk and a bit of whipped cream - all in the processor. And as to the complements you get? Bask in their glory and share the recipe!

      Other summer desserts include: Roasted Peaches with Amaretti Crisp, Hello Dolly Cookies, Dutch Peach Pie, Almost No Bake Strawberry Pie, and the unusual dessert of Chilled Peach Soup.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      The processor or mixer for mixing cheesecakes

      Several years ago I found a better way to mix cheesecakes.....the processor. It was quite accidental. I was making them for the restaurant and I had something in the bowl of the mixer. The particular cheesecake I was making takes a long time to bake and cool in the oven so I made it in the processor. When the owner of the restaurant tasted the newly made cheesecakes he said, "I don't know what you did, they were always good but these are outstanding".

      But why are they better? When mixed in a mixer, air is whipped into the cream cheese mixer even when using the paddle attachment. This makes for a fluffier cheesecake. For the ultimate smooth, creamy cheesecake using a processor which doesn't add air to the mixture is the answer. They are simply better this way whether they are baked or a no bake cheesecake. While some of my older posts still use the mixer (at least till I get to updating them) I make all my cheesecake in the processor now. See if you can't see a difference.

      Cheesecake Pan or Springform Pans

      When I had my bakery we used Cheesecake pans for cheesecakes as well as to assemble cakes with soft fillings that could slide before setting up.

      A Cheesecake pan has a solid outer ring and a flat bottom that fits in it. On the other hand the springform pans have an outer ring that opens and closes with a spring. The bottom also usually has a lip on it to fit within the ring when it is closed. The problem with that is two fold. Over time or sooner depending upon how it is stored, the spring no longer closes tightly.

      While the cheesecake in the cheesecake pan can be easily released by dropping the side and then using a metal spatula to go between the crust and the bottom plate it is easily released and moved to a serving plate or cake board. We did this thousands of times at the bakery.

      With the springform pan the lip on the bottom makes it much more difficult to release cleanly as it is more difficult to get the spatula under the crust. The cheesecake pan is also a snap to wash and dry. Not so much the springform pan.

      Why You'll Love this Recipe

      • It's super easy to make using only the processor.
      • The cheesecake uses simple ingredients easy to obtain.
      • There is absolutely no baking involved.
      • It freezes like a dream so can be made ahead.
      • Let the kids stir in the peanuts and chocolate so they can say they made a cheesecake.
      • This cheesecake requires absolutely no baking.

      Recipe Ingredients

      Chocolate Graham Cracker Crust

      Ingredients fr the chocolate crust include graham crackers, powdered sugar, cocoa, and unsalted butter.

      FRONT ROW: Cocoa powder, unsalted butter

      BACK ROW: Graham Crackers, powdered sugar

      Rocky Road Cheesecake

      Ingredients for the Rocky Road Cheesecake include : salted, roasted peanuts, semisweet chocoate, heavy cream, cream cheese, condensed milk, vanilla, and  mini-marshmallows.

      FRONT ROW: Roasted, salted peanuts, vanilla extract

      MIDDLE ROW: Mini-marshmallows, semisweet chocolate

      BACK ROW: Sweetened Condensed milk, cream cheese and heavy cream

      Gravel Top (optional)

      The ingredients for the optional gravel top are semisweet chocolate and dry roasted and salted peanuts.

      Semisweet chocoalte, dry roasted and salted peanuts. (Not shown homemade or purchased caramel Ice cream Sauce. )

      Important Ingredients

      • Different brands of Graham Crackers take differing amounts of melted butter because of their formulas. It is best to start with a given amount and then add another tablespoon or two to get the consistency of wet sand.
      • Either Natural or Dutch cocoa powder can be used in this recipe because there is no leavening agent being used.
      • Be sure to use sweetened condensed milk and not evaporated milk. They are two different products. Both milks are evaporated milks, using different techniques. All condensed milk is sweetened. Evaporated milk is not.
      • Any dry roasted, salted peanuts can be used, even those with honey.
      • While I used my go to pure chocolate Callebaut #811 callets, this recipe can even use chocolate chips if that is what you have on hand.
      • Full fat or ⅓ less fat cream cheese can be used here. It should be softened before processing by leaving it at room temperature or microwaving it briefly. Do not melt it.

      Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions.

      Step by Step Instructions

      Chocolate Graham Cracker Crust

      This collages for the Rocky Road Cheesecake shows the graham crackers, cocoa and powdered sugar in the processor, processed with the melted butter in a bowl, then combined and finally pressed into the bottom of the cheesecake pan.

      Step 1. Combine the broken graham crackers, cocoa powder and powdered sugar in the bowl of a food processor. Process to make fine crumbs. Step 2. Transfer the crumbs to a bowl and add the melted butter. Step 3. Use a fork to mix the crumbs. The texture should be that of lightly wet sand. Step 4. Spray a cheesecake or springform pan with a non-stick baking release. Press the crumbs evenly into the bottom of the pan. Set aside.

      This collages shows the peanuts and chocolate being processed into finer chunks for the gravel on top of the cheesecake as well as inside, the whipped cream processed until firm and then transferred to a bowl.

      Step 5. To make the peanuts and chocolate for both the inside of the cheesecake and the gravel top this can be done in one step and divided or twice as desired. Place them in the bowl of the processor (no need to clean it). Step 6. Pulse the processor to make large crumbs. Step 7. Wipe out the processor bowl with a paper towel. Add the heavy cream and process until very stiff around the edge of the bowl. The cream in the middle will remain liquid. Step 8. Place in a bowl, along with the unwhipped cream and mix them together. This should result in a medium stiff cream. Set aside.

      This collage shows the cream cheese nthe processor bowl, processed, the chocolate, condensed milk and vanilla added and the mixure processed.

      Step 9. Without cleaning the bowl, break up the softened cream cheese and add it to the bowl. Step 10. Process until it is creamy. Step 11. Add the condensed milk, melted chocolate and vanilla. Step 12. Process until completely combined, scraping the sides as necessary.

      In this collage the whipped cream is added to the cheesecake batter, the peanuts, chocolate and marshamallows are added to the batter and the cheesecake is poured into the pan and topped with the gravel.

      Step 13. Add the reserved whipped cream to the cheesecake mixture. Step 14. Stir in the peanuts and chocolate. Step 15. Stir in the marshmallows. Step 16. Pour the mixture into the prepared pan and top with the gravel. Freeze until hard. This can also be refrigerated overnight for a softer texture.

      To release the cheesecake, go around the outside of the pan with a hair dryer on high. Place the cheesecake on a wide can such as a 28 ounce can of tomatoes. Slide down the side. Place a metal spatula between the crust and the base of the pan. Go around the bottom to loosen it. Using two pancake turners, transfer the cheesecake to serving plate or a 10" cake round.

      Removing the last of the batter

      One of the most frustrating things about the food processor is getting the last of the mixture out of the bowl. Here is the easy way to do it.

      The last collages shows the last of the batter being removed from the processor bowl by pulsing the machine to throw off the batter on the blade, removing the blade and scraping out the rest of the batter.

      Step 17. In this photo, I got as much of the cheesecake out of the bowl as I could with the plastic spatula. Do not use a rubber spatula in this step and it can be easily cut by the blade. Step 18. Replace the top on the processor and pulse it 2 or 3 times. The cheesecake batter will be slung off the blade, essentially cleaning it. Step 19. Remove the blade. Step 20. Using a rubber spatula for this step, remove the remaining batter from the bowl.

      Recipe FAQS

      Who originated the cheesecake?

      Somewhere in the 5th century BC, the Greeks on the island of Samos created the first known cheesecake. It wasn't the dessert it is today. The original cheesecakes were made with fresh cheese that was pounded smooth with flour and honey then baked and reportedly served to the athletes during the first Olympic Games in 776 BC.

      Who came up with today's cheesecakes?

      According to multiple food history sites, the modern New York-style cheesecake, with its signature creamy texture, is largely credited to Arnold Reuben, a well-known restaurateur, who is said to have experimented with a classic cheesecake recipe by adding cream cheese turning it into one of the most popular desserts today.

      How is a cheesecake classified?

      Despite it being called a cake it is actually classified as a custard or pie, as it uses eggs and cream cheese to form a custard-like consistency. Some even argue that it’s closer to a tart because of its crust.

      Expert Tips

      • Different condensed milks are more or less thick. I generally use Eagle Brand as my go to for its consistency.
      • Either natural or Dutch cocoa can be used in this recipe as there is no leavening agent used.
      • Different graham cracker brands can take more or less butter to bind the crust. Start with the given amount and add more to achieve a lightly wet sand texture.
      • Either full fat or ⅓ less cream cheese can be used.
      • While I normally don't use chocolate chips, it is fine in this recipe.
      A slice of the Rocky Road Cheesecake sits on a white plate on a rattan server.

      Looking for More Cheesecakes?

      • A slice of Pina Colada cheesecake with caramelized pineapple sits on a tan plate.
        Easy Pina Colada No Bake Cheesecake
      • Unbelievable Cheesecake
        Unbelievable Cheesecake Update!
      • A slice of Triple Chocolate Cheesecake with the cheesecake in the background.
        Triple Chocolate Cheesecake
      • Carrot Cake Cheesecake slice
        Carrot Cake Cheesecake

      A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it. 

      A slice of the Rocky Road Cheesecake sits on a white plate on a rattan server.

      Easy No Bake Rocky Road Cheesecake

      Helen S. Fletcher
      While it looks complex it is actually very easy. Peanuts, chocolate and mini- marshmallows are stirred into a chocolate cheese cake made with cream cheese, condensed milk and a bit of whipped cream - all in the processor
      4.84 from 6 votes
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 30 minutes mins
      Freezing time 8 hours hrs
      Total Time 8 hours hrs 30 minutes mins
      Course Cheesecake
      Cuisine American
      Servings 12 servings
      Calories 419 kcal

      Equipment

      • 9x3 cheesecake or springform pan
      Prevent your screen from going dark

      Ingredients

      Chocolate Graham Cracker Crust

      • 1 ⅓ cups graham crackers or graham cracker crumbs (170 grams)
      • ¼ cup cocoa (25 grams)
      • ½ cup powdered sugar (65 grams)
      • 8 to 10 tablespoons unsalted butter, melted (114 to 150 grams)

      Rocky Road Cheesecake

      • 1 cup semisweet chocolate or chocolate chips, divided (185 grams)
      • ½ cup dry roasted and salted peanuts (58 grams)
      • 1 cup heavy cream, cold
      • 2 8 ounce cream cheese, sofened (454 grams)
      • 1 14 ounce can sweetened condensed milk
      • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract
      • 1 cup mini-marshmallows (45 grams)

      Gravel

      • ½ cup semisweet chocolate or chocolate chips (90 grams)
      • ½ cup dry roasted and salted peanuts (58 grams)

      Instructions
       

      Chocolate Graham Crumb Crust

      • Spray a 9x3 cheesecake or springform pan with a non-stick baking release. Melt the butter and set aside.
      • Break the graham crackers up and place them in the bowl of a processor along with the cocoa and powdered sugar. Process to form fine crumbs.
      • Empty them into a medium size bowl. Pour 8 tablespoons (½ cup) of butter over the crumbs and toss them with a fork until all the crumbs are coated and the mixture looks like lightly wet sand. If it is still a bit dry, add the other 2 tablespoons, 1 tablespoon at a time.
      • Pour the crumbs into the prepared pan and press them evenly and firmly into the bottom of the pan. Set aside.

      Make the Gravel

      • Place the peanuts and chocolate in the bowl of the processor (no need to clean it). Pulse to coarsely chop them up so they look like gravel. Set aside.

      Rocky Road Cheesecake

      • Melt ⅔ of the chocolate (125 grams) over a double boiler on half power until about a scant half is shiny and looks melty,. Stir to melt the rest. This may also be done in a double boiler. Set aside.
      • Using the remaining chocolate and peanuts for the inside of the cheesecake, repeat as for making the gravel. Set aside.
      • Wipe the bowl of the processor out with a paper towel. Add the heavy cream and process until it is very stiff around the edges of the bowl. There will be some cream in the middle that is not incorporated. Place all of the cream, including the unincorporated in a bowl and stir together. It should be medium firm after combining the two. Set side.
      • Without wiping out the bowl, add the softened cream cheese. Process until smooth. Add the melted chocolate, condensed milk and vanilla. Process until completely smooth, scraping down as necessary. Transfer to a medium size bowl.
      • To remove all of the mixture from the bowl, place it back on the machine. Pulse it 2 or 3 times to sling the batter off the blade. Remove the blade and use a rubber spatula to clean the bowl.
      • Stir in the coarsely chopped peanuts and chocolate followed by the marshmallows. Pour over the crust and smooth it out so it is even.
      • Sprinkle the gravel over the top. Place in the freezer for about 8 hours or overnight.
      • To release the cheesecake from the cheesecake pan, go around the outer rim of the pan with a hair dryer on high. Place the pan on a wide can such as a 28 ounce can of tomatoes. Pull down the sides. Place the cake flat on a table and run a metal spatula between the crust and the bottom of the pan. Using 2 pancake turners, lift the cake off the metal bottom and transfer it to a serving plate or a 10" cake round.
      • Room temperature the cheesecake for about 20 to 30 minutes to make cutting it easier. Serve with homemade or purchased caramel sauce.
      • This can also be refrigerated overnight for a softer texture. Refrigerate or freeze leftovers.
      • In any case, the entire cake can be made, frozen and thawed in the refrigerator for serving.

      Notes

      There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
      As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
      __________________________________________________
      Different brands of Graham Crackers take differing amounts of melted butter because of their formulas. It is best to start with a given amount and then add another tablespoon or two to get the consistency of wet sand.
      Either Natural or Dutch cocoa powder can be used in this recipe because there is no leavening agent being used.
      Be sure to use sweetened condensed milk and not evaporated milk. They are two different products. Both milks are evaporated milks, using different techniques. All condensed milk is sweetened. Evaporated milk is not.
      Any dry roasted, salted peanuts can be used, even those with honey.
      While I used my go to pure chocolate Callebaut #811 callets, this recipe can even use chocolate chips if that is what you have on hand. 
      Full fat or ⅓ less fat cream cheese can be used here. It should be softened before processing by leaving it at room temperature or microwaving it briefly. Do not melt it.  Be sure to unwrap the cream cheese and place it on a microwave plate before placing it in the microwave. 
       

      Nutrition

      Serving: 12servingsCalories: 419kcalCarbohydrates: 32gProtein: 6gFat: 31gSaturated Fat: 16gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 10gTrans Fat: 0.3gCholesterol: 44mgSodium: 130mgPotassium: 273mgFiber: 4gSugar: 19gVitamin A: 538IUVitamin C: 0.1mgCalcium: 47mgIron: 2mg
      Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

      Peanut Butter & Jam Muffins

      Modified: May 12, 2026 · Published: Aug 12, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 6 Comments

      This is a close up of an open Peanut Butter and Jam Muffin with a riverlut of strawberry jam running through it.

      Peanut Butter & Jam Muffins are a year 'round favorite. You don't have to be a kid to love peanut butter and jelly.  No matter what your age, this satisfies that craving.  It is important to use jam in these muffins as jelly has a tendency in the heat of the oven to run out.  The thicker jams stay put.

      This is a close up of an open Peanut Butter and Jam Muffin with a riverlut of strawberry jam running through it.

      Any flavor of jam can be used. This is an easy recipe that can be whipped up in no time with simple ingredients that are probably in your pantry.

      Muffins and Quick Breads are among the fastest and easiest treats to put together. Here are a few more for you to consider: Date Nut Bread, Cranberry Muffins, Blueberry Crumb Muffins, Cinnamon Filled Buttermilk Scones, Heavenly French Toast with Blueberry Compote, and Best Banana Streusel Muffin.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Recipe Ingredients

      Ingredients for the Peanut Butter & Jam Muffins include all-purpose flour, baking powder, baking soda salt, vegetable oil, brown sugar, egg, vanilla, peanut putter, buttermilk, and jam.

      FRONT ROW: Baking powder, vanilla, salt, baking soda

      MIDDLE ROW: Strawberry jam, peanut butter, egg

      BACK ROW: All-purpose Flour, oil, buttermilk, brown sugar

      Main Ingredients

      • Buttermilk can be whole or lowfat.
      • Dark Brown Sugar will yield a deeper taste than light brown.
      • While I prefer canola oil, any vegetable oil can be used.
      • Commercial peanut butter such as Jif, Skippy or Peter pan should be used for the best results.
      • Whatever jam or preserves are used, they should be thick. The thicker the better to prevent them from running out.

      Be sure to see the recipe card below for the exact ingredients & instructions.

      Step by Step Instructions

      The first collage sows the liquid ingredients in a mixing bowl, mixed, the peanut butter added and mixed.

      Step 1. Combine the oil, brown sugar, egg, and vanilla in the bowl of a mixer. Step 2. Beat until completely mixed. Step 3. Add the peanut butter. Step 4. Mix on medium to blend.

      The second collages show the first addition of flour, then mixed in, the first addition of buttermilk  and that being beaten in.

      Step 5. Add the first of 3 additions of flour. Step 6. Beat the flour in on medium. Step 7. Add the first of 2 additions of buttermilk. Step 8. Mix in to blend together.

      This collages show the last of the flour being beaten and and the finished batter, the bottom layer of batter in the muffin tins and the preserves in the middle of one of the muffin bottoms.

      Step 9. After adding the flour and buttermilk in order, add the last addition of flour. Step 10. Beat it in until the batter is completely mixed. Step 11. Spoon ⅓ of the batter into each of 6 jumbo muffin tins. If using regular size tins, use about 3 tablespoons of batter in each of 11 or cups. Step 12. Dollop 1 tablespoon of jam in the center of each cup.

      The last college shows the remaining batter being placed on top of the jam, a spoon is evening it out and pushing it to the sides, the baked muffins in the pan and on a cooing rack.

      Step 13. Top the jam with another ⅓ or 3 tablespoons of batter. Step. Since this is a rather sticky batter, wet a small the spoon, shake it off and push the batter to the side of the muffin wells, sealing it to the side to prevent the jam from coming out. Evening it out across the top. Step 15. Bake the muffins as called for. Step 16. Let them cool in the pans for about 15 minutes and the release them carefully and let them cool completely on a cooling rack.

      Recipe FAQS

      Who invented peanut butter?

      While George Washington Carver is often thought of as the inventor peanut butter, it was actually invented by the Aztec far before Carver's time. However, Carver was a prolific inventor and came up with over 100 ways to use peanut butter.

      When did the PBJ sandwich become so popular?

      Several factors helped this sandwich to soar in popularity. Peanut butter is inexpensive, nutritious and easily available. Add sliced bread and jelly and it was especially welcome during the depression and during wartime when food was rationed. It was easy to make a sandwich.

      What can you make with peanut butter?

      The better question might be what can't you make with peanut butter? Sandwiches of course, cakes, cookies, cupcakes, ice cream, and sauces. It can be used in sweet and savory cooking and baking. One of the popular treats is peanut butter cookies. See my Peanut Butter Sandwich Cookies where peanuts are used two ways.

      Expert Tips

      • Use commercial peanut butter such as Jif, Peter Pan or Skippy. Homemade or natural don't work as well.
      • The flavor of the jam doesn't matter but the thickness does. The thicker the better to keep it from melting in the heat and running out,
      • Make sure the jam is put in the middle of the bottom layer, then press the edges together when the top is put on.
      This is a close up of an open Peanut Butter and Jam Muffin with a riverlut of strawberry jam running through it.

      Ready for More Marvelous Muffins?

      • A single Apple Muffin covered with a crunchy sugar topping.
        Crunchy Topped Apple Muffin Recipe
      • Basic muffins are shown plain and with sanding sugar glistening on top.
        A Perfectly Easy Basic Muffin Mix
      • Strawberry Muffins
        Best of All Strawberry Muffins
      • A cut open Double Chocolate Truffled Muffin sits on a plate with a teacup next to it and more muffins in the background.
        Double Chocolate Truffled Muffins

      A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important. 

      This is a close up of an open Peanut Butter and Jam Muffin with a riverlut of strawberry jam running through it.

      Peanut Butter and Jam Muffins

      Helen S. Fletcher
      You don't have to be a kid to love these Peanut Butter and Jam Muffins.  No matter what your age, this satisfies that craving.  It is important to use jam or preserves in these muffins as jelly has a tendency in the heat of the oven to run out.  The thicker jams and preserves stay put.
      No ratings yet
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 20 minutes mins
      Cook Time 25 minutes mins
      Total Time 45 minutes mins
      Course Muffins
      Cuisine American
      Servings 6 Jumbo muffins
      Calories 589 kcal

      Equipment

      • 6 cup jjumbo muffin pan OR 1- 12 cupmuffin pan.
      Prevent your screen from going dark

      Ingredients

      • 2 cups all-purpose flour (280 grams)
      • 1 teaspoon baking powder
      • ½ teaspoon baking soda
      • ½ teaspoon salt
      • ⅓ cup canola or vegetable oil
      • ¾ cup brown sugar (150 grams)
      • 1 large egg
      • 1 teaspoon vanilla
      • ½ cup commercial peanut butter (114 grams)
      • 1 cup buttermilk*
      • 6 tablespoons thick strawberry jam
      • * *If you don't have buttermilk, measure 1 cup of whole or 2% milk and remove 1 tablespoon of it.  Add 1 tablespoon white or cider vinegar or lemon juice.  Let it sit for about 5 minutes at which point it will curdle and/or thicken.  That is fine. Use this  in place of the buttermilk. 

      Instructions
       

      • Preheat the oven to 350°F   Spray Texas muffin or regular muffin cups with a non-stick baking release well.  Set aside.
      • Whisk the flour, baking powder, baking soda and salt together.  Set aside.
      • In the bowl of an electric mixter, beat the oil, brown sugar, egg and vanilla to combine.  Add the peanut butter, mix well..
      • Add the flour in three parts, starting and ending with flour.  Add the buttermilk alternately in two parts.  
      • Spoon ⅓ cup of the muffin batter into each jumbo muffin cup.  Dollop 1 tablespoon jam in the center of each.  Top with another ⅓ cup of  batter.  With the back of a spoon make sure to seal the jam to the side of the cups by pressing the batter to the edge of the cups.  This is a rather sticky batter so wetting the spoon and shaking off the excess water helps to spread it. 
      • Bake for 25 minutes. They will rise over the top and be a beautiful medium golden brown.
      • If using regular size muffin cups, use a scant 3 tablespoon batter for the top and bottom. Use 1 ½ teaspoon jam in the center of the bottom of the muffin batter.
      • Bake for about 15 to 20 minutes.
      • 6 large muffins or 12 regular size muffins.  These freeze very well.  To thaw them, place them in a 350 degree oven for 15 minutes for jumbo, 10 for regular..  

      Notes

      There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
       As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.

      Use commercial peanut butter such as Jif, Peter Pan or Skippy. Homemade or natural don't work as well.
      The flavor of the jam doesn't matter but the thickness does. The thicker the better to keep it from melting in the heat and running out,
      Make sure the jam is put in the middle of the bottom layer, then press the edges together when the top is put on.

      Nutrition

      Serving: 6muffinsCalories: 589kcalCarbohydrates: 80gProtein: 12gFat: 26gSaturated Fat: 4gPolyunsaturated Fat: 7gMonounsaturated Fat: 14gTrans Fat: 0.1gCholesterol: 35mgSodium: 517mgPotassium: 284mgFiber: 2gSugar: 41gVitamin A: 111IUVitamin C: 2mgCalcium: 134mgIron: 3mg
      Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

      Yellow Buttermilk Cake

      Modified: Aug 6, 2025 · Published: Aug 8, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 19 Comments

      This Yellow Buttermilk Cake is a complete remake of my original one and is one of the easiest cakes to make. The layers are a full 1 ½ inches tall reaching almost to the top of the cake pan for a spectacular presentation. As a high ratio cake, it is basically two steps and into the oven it goes. This is as close to fool-proof as a cake can get.

      This Yellow Buttermilk Cake is very tender, light and stays moist for days. It is easily scaled up and accepts any number of filings. The batter is thick, velvety and luxurious. If you've ever been intimidated by making cake, this is the one to make.

      If you enjoy classic homemade cakes, you'll also love this Pecan Upside Down Cake.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      What is a High Ratio Cake

      High ratio cakes require the sugar to be equal to or exceed the amount of flour by weight not by volume. It's also the quickest way to make a butter cake. Not every cake can be mixed this way.

      Basically, part of the wet ingredients are held out and mixed together. The dry ingredients are added to the mixing bowl along with part of the liquid and all of the very soft butter. After about a 2 ½ minute mix the wet ingredients are added in thirds, mixed for30 seconds each and that's it. Into the pans it goes. It just doesn't get any easier or any better.

      Another great example of high ratio cakes on my site are From One Recipe Comes Multiple Layers.

      How to Bake a Flat Cake Layer

      At the bakery, we didn't have time to trim humpy cakes flat so I came up with a method to insure flat layers. It is based on the way an angel food cake is baked. Angel food cake pans are not prepared in any way. The batter is just added to the pan, smoothed out and baked. By sticking to the sides of the pan, the cake cannot slide down the side as it does in a greased pan.

      Cake Pan Prep guides you to the perfect, flat cake layers every time. It's all in how the cake pan is prepared.

      How to Finish the Cake

      Although chocolate filling and frosting are often used with the Yellow Buttermilk Cake which is said to be the favorite birthday cake, there are many ways to finish this cake. Here are a few for to get you started: Spirited Chocolate Buttercream, Strawberry Buttercream, any flavor of Swiss or Italian Buttercream, French Buttercream. There is more information in All Manner of Buttercreams.

      Why You'll Love this Cake

      • There isn't an easier Yellow Buttermilk Cake to make. Basically two steps and it's done.
      • The texture and taste are unbeatable.
      • It can accept any number of fillings and finishes as you prefer.
      • The layers can be frozen for later finishing.
      • The recipe can be easily scaled up to any size required. See Pan Size Conversions and The Secret of the 9 Inch Cake Pan.

      Recipe Ingredients

      The ingredients for the Yellow Buttermilk Cake are egg yolks, buttermilk,vanilla,cake flour, granulated sugar, baking powder, baking soda, salt,and unsalted butter.

      FRONT ROW: Baking soda, vanilla extract, baking powder, salt

      MIDDLE ROW: Unsalted Butter, egg yolks

      FRONT ROW: Granulated sugar, cake flour and buttermilk

      Key Ingredients

      • Cake Flour is used for it's low protein or gluten count which makes a more tender cake. I don't recommend using all-purpose flour as the weights of the two are different. There is more information on flours in my post, Flour as Used in Baking.
      • Both baking powder and baking soda are used. The baking soda neutralizes the acid in the buttermilk aiding the baking powder as a leavening the cake.
      • Egg yolks are fat and add to the tenderness of the cake.
      • Buttermilk adds tenderness, flavor and moisture to a cake.

      Be sure to see the recipe card below for the exact ingredients and instructions.

      Step by Step Instructions

      The first collage for the Yellow Buttermilk Cake shows the liquid ingredients in a bowl, then mixed the dry ingredients in a mixing bowl and then with the butter and buttermilk.

      Step 1. Combine the egg yolks, ⅓ cup buttermilk, and the vanilla. Step 2. Whisk to combine. Step 3. Place all the dry ingredients in the bowl of a mixer. Step 4. Add the very soft butter and the remainder of the buttermilk.

      This collages shows the  batter mixed for 30 seconds, then mixed for2 minutes, ⅓ of theliquid ingredients added and mixed.

      Step 5. Mix for 30 seconds on low to bring the ingredients together. Scrape down. Step 6. Raise the speed to medium and mix for 2 minutes. Step 7. Add ⅓ of the liquid to the batter and beat for 30 seconds. Repeat twice more. Step 8. The batter when it is finished.

      Weights and Baking Times

      These instructions for 9" pans.

      • 2 layers = 540 grams each .  Bake for 20 to 25 minutes.  They are about 1 ½" tall.
      • 3 layers = 360 grams each.  Bake for 18 to 21 minutes. They are about 1"  tall.
      • 4 layers = 270 grams each.   Bake for 15 to 18 minutes. They are about ⅔"  tall.
      • 25 to 30 regular size cupcakes with a #16 scoop, well scraped off.  Bake for 15 to 20 minutes.

      The layers can be frozen for later use.  Freeze unwrapped until hard,  wrap well in foil and freeze for several months.

      The recipe can be easily scaled up to any size required. See Pan Size Conversions and The Secret of the 9 Inch Cake Pan.

      Recipe FAQS

      What makes yellow cake so moist?

      Egg yolks, because they are fat, add additional moisture to the butter along with buttermilk which is a natural moisturizer.

      What is the easiest yellow cake to make?

      High ratio cakes of any flavor are super easy to make, generally taking only 2 steps.

      Is yellow cake always paired with chocolate frosting.

      Absolutely not. Yellow cake is a base cake as is white, chocolate, sponge cakes, etc. Any cake can be filled and finished as desired.

      Expert Tip

      • Don't overbeat the cake. Follow the instructions and times given.
      • Use cake flour instead of all purpose flour.
      • For the flat layers, follow the instructions above in Cake Pan Prep - How To Get Flat Cake Layers.
      • I can't stress enough the importance of weighing over volume.  It is very important when making high ratio cakes.  Scales are extremely inexpensive and every baker should own one.  
      Two layers of Yellow buttermmlk cake on a cooling rack.

      A Few More Cakes to Make

      • Slices of the Strawberry Cake sit on a marble plate with fresh strawberries.
        Strawberry Cake - A Little Slice of Heaven
      • Chocolate Creamsicle Cake
        All American Chocolate Creamsicle Cake
      • Five different layers of cake stacked upon each other
        From 1 Recipe Comes Multiple Cake Layers
      • Angel food Cake
        Perfectly Easy Angel Food Cake

      If you love this Yellow Buttermilk Cake, It would be hugely helpful and so appreciated it if you would take a moment to leave a rating below. Thank you.

      Yellow Cake Layers

      Best Yellow Cake Recipe

      Helen S. Fletcher
      This Yellow Buttermilk Cake has a light texture, golden crust and stays moist for days, is easily scaled up, and accepts any number of fillings. It is also one of the easiest cakes and should be in everyone's baking repertoire.
      5 from 2 votes
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 15 minutes mins
      Cook Time 20 minutes mins
      Total Time 35 minutes mins
      Course Cake
      Cuisine American
      Servings 12 servings
      Calories 261 kcal
      Prevent your screen from going dark

      Ingredients

      • 6 large egg yolks (100 grams)
      • 1 cup buttermilk
      • 1 tablespoon vanilla extract
      • 2 ½ cups cake flour (300 grams)
      • 1 ½ cup granulated sugar (300 grams)
      • 1 tablespoon baking powder
      • 1 teaspoon baking soda
      • ¼ teaspoon salt
      • ¾ cup unsalted butter (170 grams or 1 ½ sticks)

      Instructions
       

      • For the flatest cake layers, spray the center only of 9" pans with a non-stick baking release, line the bottom of the cake pans with parchment paper and spray the center only with the spray. DO NOT SPRAY THE SIDES OR OTHERWISE PREPARE THE PAN. See Cake Pan Prep for detailed information..
      • The butter must be very soft, but not runny in anyway. A temperature of of about 75℉ to 77℉ should do it.
      • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees.
      • Whisk the yolks, one fourth of the buttermilk and vanilla in a bowl.  Set aside.
      • In a mixing bowl, combine the dry ingredients and mix briefly to blend.  Add the butter and the remaining buttermilk.  Mix on low until the ingredients are moistened, then raise to medium and beat for 2 minutes.   Scrape down.
      • Add the egg yolk mixture in thirds, beating about 30 seconds after each addition. Scrape down between additions. Divide into the desired number of layers or cupcakes.
      • 2 layers = 540 grams each .  Bake for 20 to 25 minutes.  They are about 1 ½" tall.
        3 layers = 360 grams each.  Bake for 18 to 21 minutes. They are about 1"  tall.
        4 layers = 270 grams each.   Bake for 15 to 18 minutes. They are about ⅔"  tall.
        25 to 30 regular size cupcakes with a #16 scoop, well scraped off.  Bake for 15 to 20 minutes.
      • Bake as called for or until a tester comes out clean or it springs back when the center is lightly touched.  The cake should not pull away from the sides of the pans.
      • Cool in pans, release and use as desired.
      • The batter weighs approximately 1080 grams.

      Notes

      There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.
      As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
      ________________________________________________
      I can't stress enough the importance of weighing over volume.  It is very important when making high ratio cakes.  Scales are extremely inexpensive and every baker should own one.  
      The layers can be frozen for later use.  Freeze unwrapped until hard,  wrap well in foil and freeze for several months.
      The recipe can be easily scaled up to any size required. See Pan Size Conversions and The Secret of the 9 Inch Cake Pan.
      Cake Flour is used for it's low protein or gluten count which makes a more tender cake. I don't recommend using all-purpose flour as the weights of the two are different. There is more information on flours in my post, Flour as Used in Baking.
      Don't overbeat the cake. Follow the instructions and times given.
      For the flat layers, follow the instructions above in Cake Pan Prep - How To Get Flat Cake Layers.

      Nutrition

      Serving: 12servingsCalories: 261kcalCarbohydrates: 31gProtein: 4gFat: 14gSaturated Fat: 8gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 4gTrans Fat: 0.5gCholesterol: 97mgSodium: 242mgPotassium: 48mgFiber: 0.4gSugar: 17gVitamin A: 462IUCalcium: 49mgIron: 0.4mg
      Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

      Macadamia and Coconut Tart

      Modified: Aug 4, 2025 · Published: Aug 4, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 9 Comments

      A slice of Tropical Macadamia & Coconut Tart sits on a clear plate with a teal colored napkin and cup and saucer beside it.

      This amazing No Bake Macadamia and Coconut Tart came about as the result of the chocolate truffle craze in the late 1980's. They were everywhere and we couldn't get enough of them. My bakery fell right in step with everyone else. So much so that I was asked to create a line of chocolate truffles for a client. This white chocolate macadamia truffle was one of them. For the bakery, I simply turned it into a tart.

      Easy is not the word for this recipe. The only caveat is to not overheat the white chocolate but more on that later.

      A slice of Tropical Macadamia & Coconut Tart sits on a clear plate with a teal colored napkin and cup and saucer beside it.

      A simple graham cracker crust is filled with a white chocolate truffle mixture that includes toasted macadamia nuts, toasted coconut, a bit of cream of coconut and a whisper of dark rum. It's the perfect dessert with which to cool off in these hot summer days.

      If you enjoy unique and delicious tarts, you'll also love this Chocolate Cranberry Curd Tart and my Strawberry Crumb Tart.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      What to know about white chocolate

      White chocolate is not actually chocolate.  It is a blend of cocoa butter, sugar, milk solids, lecithin and vanilla or vanillin. It is important to read the label and if it doesn’t contain cocoa butter it is confectionary coating or summer coating which isn't the same product. I cannot speak to how it melts or if it would work in this recipe as I don't use it.

      The biggest caveat is melting it. White chocolate requires lower heat to melt it as it seizes much easier than dark or milk chocolate. Water should never be used to thin out any chocolate, white, dark or milk. It dulls the chocolate when cooled and diminishes the taste. Cream and butter are all acceptable as long as the ratio of chocolate to liquid is followed. This will keep the chocolate glossy. To keep chocolate from seizing when liquid is added to it,  1 ½ tablespoons liquid per ounce of chocolate is the ratio.  It is best to add the liquid with the chocolate when melting it.

      When liquefying chocolate by itself, it is important to keep it from getting too hot and to keep any moisture from reaching it as the chocolate can seize which simply means clump up with no apparent way of getting it smooth.  If this happens, you can add vegetable shortening or cocoa butter a little at a time to get it back to a liquid consistency and keep the heat low or remove it from the source of heat. 

      There are several ways of melting it. The two most common are over a double boiler or in the microwave. I favor the double boiler as I can control the amount of heat more easily. Place the white chocolate and whatever other ingredients are called for in a bowl that will fit in a pan of barely simmering water without the bottom touching the water. As soon as the chocolate begins to melt, stir it to help it along. Low heat is necessary. If the chocolate gets too hot, it will seize and become unusable.

      If the microwave is used, it should be in short bursts at half power, stirring each time. This method can result in scorched or burned chocolate more easily if not watched carefully. 

      How much butter to use for the Crust

      All graham crackers are not equal and as such may require more or less butter to bind them together. I give a range and always start with a given amount adding more if the crumbs won't stick together.

      How to use leftover coconut cream

      Whenever I have a leftover ingredient, I try to find some ways to use it. Here are a couple of suggestions and some amazing things I found out about cream of coconut . These are based on Coco Reàl Cream of Coconut that I used in this recipe. I love it because it doesn't separate. It is a translucent semi-thick liquid that is very easy to work with. There is no separation or having to mix it together. Just open and pour.

      • Drizzle the cream of coconut over fresh fruit.
      • Add it to a fresh fruit smoothie to taste.
      • Freeze it in ice cube trays. Once frozen, put the cubes in a freezer proof container to use as desired.
      • Whip it and used it as a topping on cake, ice cream, fruit, etc.

      Whipped Cream of Coconut

      This photo shows the bottle of Coco Reàl Cream of Coconut, coconut cream in a measuring cup and that cream whipped.

      This photograph shows the bottle of Coco Reàl Cream of Coconut in the back, as well as ½ cup of the cream of coconut in a 2 cup container on the left and then after it has been whipped on the right. It over doubled and has the texture of marshmallow.

      2 Ingredient Chocolate Mousse or Fudge

      This collage shows the cream of coconut and semisweet chocolate, the chocolate partially melted, the chocolate added to the cream of coconut and the mousse set up.

      Step 1. This shows the coconut cream and the chocolate. Step 2. From looking around the internet most people suggest the easiest, fastest way to melt chocolate is with 10 seconds bursts at full power and stir vigorously. A much, much easier way, to to put 6 ounces (170 grams)of chocolate in a microwave bowl, heat at half power for two and a half minutes until a portion is shiny and melted. Be careful when removing the dish as it will be very hot. Simply stir the chocolate and it will be smooth and beautiful. Less chocolate takes less time, more a bit more. Step 3. Add 4 other 6 ounces of semisweet chocolate (not chocolate chips) to 1 cup of whipped cream of coconut. Stir well. Step 4. Let it sit at room temperature where it will firm up. The 4 ounces of chocolate makes a mousse, The 6 ounces makes fantastic fudge - add nuts or anything else you want at the beginning before it sets up. The fudge is marvelously creamy. Neither one tastes on coconut.

      This Macadamia & Coconut Tart is:

      • Really simple to make and doesn't require much effort.
      • Made better by toasting the macadamia nuts and coconut giving it a deeper flavor than untoasted nuts and coconut.
      • Can be frozen fully made and thawed in the fridge.
      • Quick to make and can be held in the fridge for days.

      Recipe Ingredients

      9" Graham Cracker Crust

      Three easy ingredients make up the Graham Cracker Crust - graham crackers, powdered sugar and unsalted butter.

      FRONT ROW: Unsalted butter

      BACK ROW: Graham Crackers, powdered sugar

      Macadamia & Coconut Filling

      Ingredients for the Tropical Truffle filling are white chocolate, cream, dark rum, toasted coconut, cream of coconut, and toasted macadamia nuts.

      FRONT ROW: White chocolate, heavy cream, dark rum, vanilla

      BACK ROW: Toasted Coconut, cream of coconut and toasted madacamia nuts

      Key Ingredients

      • I use Ghirardelli White Chocolate because it is a quality product.
      • Heavy cream is used although regular whipping cream could be substituted.
      • Dark rum adds to the tropical flavor.
      • Deeply toasting the macadamia nuts and coconut give a distinctive flavor to the tart
      • I used Coco Reàl Cream of Coconut which I found to be easier to use than some of the other cream of coconuts as it was a translucent liquid with no solid matter in it.

      Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions.

      Step by Step Instructions

      Graham Cracker Crust

      This collage of the graham cracker crust shows the crackers and powdered sugar in a processor bowl, processed, butter added and crumbs formed

      Step 1. Place the broken up graham crackers and powdered sugar in the bowl of a processor. Step 2. Process until uniform fine crumbs form. Step 3. Add 8 tablespoons of melted butter. Step 4. Pulse until crumbs form. Pick up a few between your fingers. If they don't stick together, add additional melted butter 1 tablespoon at a time until they do.

      The second collage shows the cracker crumbs pressed against the side of a 9" tart pan, and the bottom pressed in to complete the crust.

      Step 5. Arrange ⅔ of the crumbs against the side of the tart pan. Using a small measuring cup, press the crumbs firmly against the side. Step 6. Flatten the top edge with the palm of your hand. Step 7. Pour the rest of the crumbs into the bottom of the pan. Step 8. Press them firmly into the bottom and against the edges to complete the shell.

      This collage shows the toasted coconut, the white chocolate, cream, and cream of coconut in a glass bowl, placed over a double boiler, melted with the run and vanilla being added.

      Macadamia Nut and Coconut Filling

      This collage shows the toasted coconut, the white chocolate, cream, and cream of coconut in a glass bowl, placed over a double boiler, melted with the run and vanilla being added.

      Step 1. After toasting the macadamia nuts until a deep medium brown, place the coconut on the same tray. Spread it out evenly making sure the ends are tucked next to the rest of the coconut so they don't burn. Toast in a 350°F oven until medium brown. Stir and rearrange as necessary to make sure the coconut is evenly colored. Step. 2. Break the chocolate into small pieces. Place it along with the cream and cream of coconut in a medium size glass bowl or the top of a double boiler. If using the bowl, place it over a saucepan where it will fit snugly. Place a couple of inches of water in the bottom pan and bring it to a bare simmer. Heat, stirring constantly after it first starts melting until it is smooth. Make sure the water is very low and not producing a lot of steam. Step 4. Remove the bowl from the pan and add the vanilla and dark rum, stirring it in completely.

      This collage shows the coconut and macadamia nuts being stirred into the white chocolate then poured into the graham crust, the remainder of the coconut around the edges of the tart and then covering it completely.

      Step 5. Stir in the toasted macadamia nuts and ⅓ cup of coconut. Step 6. Pour it into the prepared graham cracker crust, Step 7. Add the remaining coconut around the inside edge of the tart. Step 8. Use the rest of the coconut to finish the top of the tart. Refrigerate to firm up.

      Recipe FAQS

      What is the origin of macadamia nuts?

      While they are native to the rainforests of Queensland Australia, Hawaii was the first place to plant commercial macadamia nut orchards. They are also grown in South Africa, and parts of Latin America, Asia, and Africa.

      How did macadamia nuts get their name?

      A Scottish-Australian chemist, John Macadam, conducted extensive research on the nut in the 1850s, and it was named after him.

      Is coconut a fruit or a nut?

      It is a type of fruit which is classified as a one seed drupe. Peaches, mangos, olives, and cherries are also drupes.

      Expert Tips

      • Toasting the macadamia nuts and coconut to a deep golden brown brings out the maximum flavor that isn't there if left untoasted.
      • Macadamia nuts can sometimes be found with snack nuts in a grocery store. While these can often be salted, they can be rinsed under cold water, dried in paper towels and toasted.
      • Watch the coconut closely, it goes from almost done to burned in a hurry.
      • This recipes needs true white chocolate to be successful. Ingredients listed have to include cocoa butter close to the top of the list.
      • The amount of butter needed for the graham crust is variable as different brands of crackers require more or less.
      • For maximum creaminess and flavorlLet the tart sit at room temperature after removing from the fridge.
      A slice of Tropical Macadamia & Coconut Tart sits on a clear plate with a teal colored napkin and cup and saucer beside it.

      More Inviting PIes and Tarts to Tempt You

      • Peach Curd Tart
        Peach Curd Tart - A Summer Treat
      • A slice of the Peanut Butter Ice Cream Pie sits on a clear plate over a lattice trivet with the pie in the background and a glass of ice tea nearby .
        Peanut Butter Ice Cream Pie Recipe
      • These individual Brown Butter Tarts feature a butter crust filled with brickle bits and a browned butter filling. They are lightly dusted with powdered sugar and served with caramel sauce
        Brown Butter Tarts

      A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important. 

      A slice of Tropical Macadamia & Coconut Tart sits on a clear plate with a teal colored napkin and cup and saucer beside it.

      Macadamia and Coconut Tart

      Helen S. Fletcher
      This amazing Tropical Macadamia and Coconut Tart came about as the result of the chocolate truffle craze in the late 1980's. They were everywhere and we couldn't get enough of them. I created a Tropical Truffle and used that as the basis for this recipe.
      4.75 from 4 votes
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 45 minutes mins
      Chilling Time 6 hours hrs
      Total Time 6 hours hrs 45 minutes mins
      Course Dessert, Tarts
      Cuisine American
      Servings 12 servings
      Calories 401 kcal

      Equipment

      • 9 x 1" tart pan with removable bottom.
      Prevent your screen from going dark

      Ingredients

      Graham Cracker Crust

      • 1 ⅓ cups graham cracker crumbs (170 grams)
      • ½ cup powdered sugar (65 grams)
      • 8 to 12 tablespoons unsalted butter, melted (114 to 170 grams)
      • 1 teaspoon vanilla

      Macadamia and Coconut Tart Filling

      • ½ cup macadamia nuts (60 grams)
      • 1 cup sweetened coconut, divided (85 grams)
      • ¼ cup heavy cream
      • ½ cup cream of coconut
      • 10 ounces white chocolate (285 grams)
      • 1 tablespoon dark rum, optional
      • 1 teaspoon vanilla

      Instructions
       

      Graham Cracker Crust

      • Spray the bottom of the 9x1" tart pan with a non-stick baking release. Set aside.
      • If using whole graham crackers, break them into pieces and place in the bowl of a processor. Add the powdered sugar. Process until they are fine crumbs.
      • All graham crackers are not created equal and as such some form crumbs with less butter than others which is why this is variable. Add 8 tablespoons of butter and pulse to mix. If it isn't wet enough to stick together, add the other butter 1 tablespoon at a time.
      • Press ⅔ of the crumbs firmly against the side of the tart pan. Place the remainder of the crusts on the bottom of the pan, spreading them out evenly. Press in firmly. Place in the fridge or freezer while preparing the rest of the recipe.

      Macadamia and Coconut Tart

      • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Place the macadamia nuts in the pan and toast them until they are a medium brown. Shake the pan from time to time to turn them so they brown evenly. This can take from 8 to 12 minutes depending upon the size of the nuts It is better to get them nicely browned but not burned as this will enhance their flavor. Cool completely.
      • When the nuts are cool, pulse them in the processor to coarsely chop them or chop by hand. Set aside.
      • In the same pan place the coconut. Make sure the edges are snugged up against the rest of the coconut so they don't burn. Toast for 5 to 8 minutes until it starts to color. Stir well and continue toasting for 3 to 5 minutes more, stirring frequently, to make sure the coconut toasts up golden and evenly. Cool.
      • Break the white chocolate into small pieces. In a double boiler or microwave dish, combine the cream, cream of coconut and broken white chocolate. If using a double boiler make sure the water does not touch the bottom of the dish holding the ingredients. The water should never get hotter than a bare simmer. As soon as the chocolate shows any sign of melting, stir it and stir until it is melted.
      • If using a microwave, use half power and microwave for 1 ½ to 2 minutes. Stir to combine. Let is sit for a minute or two and stir again. Heat briefly if it is not all melted. Be aware white chocolate burns very easily.
      • In either case, whisk in the rum and vanilla followed by the macadamia nuts and ⅓ cup of the coconut. Pour it into the prepared crust and smooth it out.
      • Finish the tart by covering the top with the remaining coconut. It is easiest to do this by covering the inside edge with coconut first and then filling in the middle. Refrigerate to set.
      • This can be made days ahead and stored in the refrigerator. Leave the tart in its tart pan, covered with foil so it doesn't pick up any odors from other food. It can also be wrapped well in foil after it has been refrigerated and is firm and frozen for several months. Thaw in the refrigerator to serve.
      • To serve, release from the pan and cut into small pieces as this is very rich.

      Notes

      There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
      As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
      ______________________________________________
      Toasting the macadamia nuts and coconut to a deep golden brown brings out the maximum flavor that isn't there if left untoasted.
      Macadamia nuts can sometimes be found with snack nuts in a grocery store. While these can often be salted, they can be rinsed under cold water, dried in paper towels and toasted. 
      Watch the coconut closely when toasting, it goes from almost done to burned in a hurry.
      This recipes needs real white chocolate to be successful. Ingredients listed have to include cocoa butter close to the top of the list.
      The amount of butter needed for the graham crust is variable as different brands of crackers require more or less.

      Nutrition

      Serving: 12servingsCalories: 401kcalCarbohydrates: 39gProtein: 3gFat: 26gSaturated Fat: 15gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 8gTrans Fat: 0.3gCholesterol: 31mgSodium: 112mgPotassium: 138mgFiber: 2gSugar: 32gVitamin A: 313IUVitamin C: 0.2mgCalcium: 66mgIron: 1mg
      Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

      Nutella Ice Cream Squares

      Modified: May 1, 2026 · Published: Jul 27, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 12 Comments

      A Nutella Ice Cream Square sits on a w hite plate with more squares behind it and a nutella jar to the side.

      You don't want to miss these Nutella Ice Cream Squares with their unbelievably silky smooth nutella ice cream between two crispy, crunchy chocolate rice krispie squares. Remember the Peanut Butter Ice Cream Pie? So what to do with the leftover rice krispies? Look no further than this recipe because the nutella ice cream is sandwiched between two squares of chocolate rice krispies. It doesn't get easier or better!

      A Nutella Ice Cream Square sits on a w hite plate with more squares behind it and a nutella jar to the side.

      This is a super easy, super refreshing dessert that is perfect for these hot summer months. It literally uses three ingredients for the ice cream and four for the chocolate rice krispies. And if you're looking for fast this is it! The hardest part is waiting for these to freeze.

      I can recommend these easy desserts also: Hello Dolly Cookies, (No Bake) Bailey's Pi Day Pie, Chocolate Truffle Raspberry Curd Tart, Ultimate Hot Fudge Marshmallow Sundae, Homemade Ice Cream Sandwiches, and my Hawaiian Sundae

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      What to do with leftover condensed milk

      It's frustrating to have a partial can leftover. Here are a few ideas of how to use it. 

      Stir it into coffee or hot cocoa for a special treat. It also works with cold coffee.

      Drizzle it over fresh fruit instead of using sugar.

      instead of all milk for French toast use half sweetened condensed milk with a heavy hand of nutmeg.

      Make coconut macaroons. The base recipe is ¼ cup all-purpose flour, 5 ounces of sweetened coconut flakes, ⅓ can of condensed milk and ½ teaspoon vanilla. Mix the flour and coconut. Combine the condensed milk and vanilla then combine the two. Use a medium size cookie scoop and place on parchment paper. Bake at 350°F for about 12 to 15 minutes. 

      Recipe Ingredients

      Chocolate Rice Krispies

      ingredients for the chocolate rice krispies include, rice krispies, semisweet chocolate, unsalted butter and golden syrup.

      FRONT ROW: Unsalted butter, golden syrup (or honey or corn syrup may be used)

      BACK ROW: Rice Krispies, semisweet chocolate

      Nutella Ice Cream

      Ingredients for the nutella ice cream are nutella, heavy cream, condensed milk.

      FRONT ROW: Condensed milk

      BACK ROW: Nutella, heavy cream

      Key Ingredients

      • Substitutes for the golden syrup include honey or corn syrup. The syrup keeps the chocolate rice krispies pliable so they don't get so hard.
      • Be sure to use sweetened condense milk (all condensed milk is sweetened) and not evaporated milk. While both depend up evaporation, they are quite different with differing techniques used in the process.
      • Heavy cream ensures a smooth, well set ice cream.
      • You will need 22 ounces of Nutella (a little less than 2- 13 ounce jars or a a bit less than 1 -26 ounce jar.)

      Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions.

      Step by Step Instructions

      Step 1. Combine the chocolate, butter and golden syrup, honey or cornsyrup. Step 2. Melt the butter and chocolate over low heat, stirring occasionlly until smooth. This can also be done in a microwave. Cool. Step 3. Pour over the rice krispies. Step 4. Stir to coat the krispies evenly.

      Half of the chocolate rice krispie mixutre is pressed into the square pan and frozen, the removed from the panand loosened from the parchment paper to go back into the freezer and last the nutella is slightly warmed.

      Step 5. Line a 8x8" pan with parchment paper. I lined it in one direction only. I suggest you line it in both directions for easier removal. Lightly spray the paper with a non-stick baking release.. Press half of the chocolate rice krispies (about 175 grams) evenly into the bottom of the pan. This is easiest done with the back of a large spoon. Freeze hard. Step 6. Remove the base from the pan and flatten out the paper. Step 7. Use a metal spatula to go between the chocolate base and the parchment paper. Place it in the freezer. This is the top of the square. Reline the pan with parchment paper. Press the other half of the chocolate krispies into the bottom of the pan. Freeze it while preparing the filling. Step 8. Place the nutella in a large bowl. Microwave it brieflly to soften it. Do not turn it to liquid.

      This collage shows the condensed milk poured over the nutella, the two blended ,the cream whipped and added to the nutella mixture.

      Step 9. Pour the condensed milk over the nutella. Step 10. Mix them together completely. The mixture will be stiff, but make sure it is blended. Step 11. Whip the cream until fairly stiff. Step 12. Add about ⅓ of the whipped cream to the nutella and stir it in to loosen it.

      This collage shows the cream and nutella mixed together, poured into the pan, the chocolate krispy layer placed on top and the 9 squares cut from the frozen dessert.

      Step 13. Add the remainder of the whipped cream and fold everything together so no cream is evident. Step 14. Remove the pan with the bottom layer of chocolate krispies from the freezer and pour in the nutella ice cream. Step 15. Take the frozen layer of the krispies from the freeze and center it, upside down so the flat side is on top, in the pan over the ice cream. Because the pan is tapered, it will not fit quite edge to edge. Freeze overnight. Step 16. If you haven't lined all four sides of the pan with parchment paper, heat the uncovered sides briefly with a hair dryer. Lift the squares from the pan using the overhanging parchment paper. Step 16. Trim the uncovered sides of ice cream. Cut into 9 squares. Return to the freezer.

      Recipe FAQS

      What are the ingredients in Nutella?

      Roasted hazelnuts, cocoa, sugar, palm oil, skim milk powder, lecithin and vanillin.

      What accounts for the distinctive taste of Nutella?

      Roasted hazelnuts and cocoa provide the chocolatey nutty taste.

      What is another name for a hazelnut?

      Hazelnut is the name used outside of America. In America, hazelnuts are called filberts and 99% are grown in the Willamette Valley region of Oregon. Turkey, Italy and America are the main growers of hazelnuts no matter what they are called.

      Storage and Freezer Instructions

      The ice cream is closer to a soft serve after a few minutes at room temperature. It is important to keep the squares frozen until just before serving. Well wrapped, they will last a couple of months in the freezer.

      Expert Tips

      • Golden Syrup, honey or corn syrup can be used interchangeably in the recipe. These keep the chocolate rice krispie mixture from freezing rock hard.
      • Golden Syrup comes from England and I can eat it by the spoonful. It has a slightly caramel taste and, as the name suggests, it is golden in color. It can be found in the international aisles of food stores as well as online.
      • Do not overheat the nutella or you will end up with fudge. If this happens, just work in ⅓ of the whipped cream to loosen it. Then fold in the rest.
      • These are best eaten in a bowl with a spoon as the ice cream is of the soft serve type after sitting at room temperature for a few minutes.
      A Nutella Ice Cream Square sits on a w hite plate with more squares behind it and a nutella jar to the side.

      A Few More Easy Summer Desserts

      • A slice of the Chocolate Strawberry Pie on a white plate.
        Chocolate Strawberry Pie
      • A slice of the Peanut Butter Ice Cream Pie sits on a clear plate over a lattice trivet with the pie in the background and a glass of ice tea nearby .
        Peanut Butter Ice Cream Pie Recipe
      • This Caramel Hot Fudge Sundae sits in a clear glass with a container with a scoop of vanilla ice cream with a cherry on top.
        Caramel Hot Fudge Brownie Sundae
      • Strawberry Granita sists in a white bowl on a blue and white background with a yellow napkin and spoon .
        Strawberry Balsamic Granita Recipe

      A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important. 

      A Nutella Ice Cream Square sits on a w hite plate with more squares behind it and a nutella jar to the side.

      Nutella Ice Cream Squares

      Helen S. Fletcher
      These soft serve, no churn Nutella Ice Cream Squares are my answer to living with sweltering temperatures but still want something easy and delicious.
      4.84 from 6 votes
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 45 minutes mins
      Freezing time 1 day d
      Total Time 1 day d 45 minutes mins
      Course Dessert
      Cuisine American
      Servings 9 servings
      Calories 644 kcal

      Equipment

      • 8"x8" square pan
      Prevent your screen from going dark

      Ingredients

      Chocolate Rice Krispies

      • 5 ounces semisweet chocolate (140 grams)
      • ⅓ cup golden syrup, honey or corn syrup
      • 4 tablespoons unsalted butter
      • 3 cups rice krispies (75 grams)

      Nutella No Churn Ice Cream

      • 1 ¼ cups Nutella
      • ⅔ cup condensed milk
      • 1 ½ cup heavy cream

      Instructions
       

      Chocolate Rice Krispies

      • Line an 8x8" square pan with parchment paper in both directions, allowing the excess paper to hang over the edges creating a sling. Spray lightly with a non-stick baking release.
      • Place the rice krispies in a large bowl.
      • Melt the semisweet chocolate, butter and golden syrup, honey or corn syrup over low heat or in the microwave at half power. Cool.
      • Pour over the rice krispies and mix thoroughly to coat all of the cereal.
      • Place half of the mixture (about 175 grams) into the bottom of the pan. Using a large spoon, press it evenly over the bottom of the pan. Freeze hard.
      • Remove the parchment with the chocolate rice krispies. Flatten the paper. Run a metal spatula under the square to loosen it. Place it back in the freezer while preparing the rest of the recipe.
      • Reline and lightly spray the 8" pan again as before. Press the second half of the crumbs evenly on the bottom of the pan. Freeze.

      Nutella No Churn Ice Cream

      • Slightly warm the nutella. Do not get it hot.
      • Add the condensed milk and combine the two completely. It will, most likely be stiff.
      • Whip the cream until medium stiff. Add about ⅓ to the nutella mixture and stir in until the mixture is loosened.
      • Fold in the remainder of the whipped cream and pour it over the crust in the pan. Place the reserved chocolate rice krispie square on top centering it. It will not completely cover the top since the bottom of the pan is slightly smaller. Freeze overnight.
      • Trim the exposed ice cream edges. Cut into 9 squares.
      • Keep frozen until serving.

      Notes

      There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
      As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
      _______________________________________________
      Golden Syrup, honey or corn syrup can be used interchangeably in the recipe. These keep the chocolate rice krispie mixture from freezing rock hard.
      Golden Syrup comes from England and I can eat it by the spoonful. It has a slightly caramel taste and, as the name suggests, it is golden in color. It can be found in the international aisles of food stores as well as online.
      Do not overheat the nutella or you will end up with fudge. If this happens, just work in ⅓ of the whipped cream to loosen it. Then fold in the rest.
      These are best eaten in a bowl with a spoon as the ice cream is of the soft serve type after sitting at room temperature for a few minutes.

      Nutrition

      Serving: 9servingsCalories: 644kcalCarbohydrates: 66gProtein: 7gFat: 40gSaturated Fat: 29gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 7gTrans Fat: 0.2gCholesterol: 67mgSodium: 108mgPotassium: 394mgFiber: 4gSugar: 53gVitamin A: 1429IUVitamin C: 7mgCalcium: 147mgIron: 6mg
      Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

      Peach Crumb Coffee Cake

      Modified: Dec 15, 2025 · Published: Jul 22, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 6 Comments

      A slice of Peach Crumb Coffee Cake sits on a white plate and yellow plate with a blue and white napkin and a glass of peach juice in the background.

      With peaches in full swing, I couldn't resist making this Peach Crumb Coffee Cake. A simple to make sour cream coffee cake, topped with an uncooked peach filling and finished with loads of crumbs, this is great any time of the day.

      A slice of Peach Crumb Coffee Cake sits on a white plate and yellow plate with a blue and white napkin and a glass of peach juice in the background.

      The thick layer of peach filling requires no cooking because it is set with Instant Clear jel, although I have given alternatives if you don't have this. But I can't say enough good things about it. It will thicken without heat, just by mixing it with sugar and fruit. It is so much easier than fussing with a cooked filling which changes the taste of the fruit.

      The brown sugar crumbs are easy to make in a matter of minutes and are the perfect topping for the peaches.

      If you haven't tried one or two of these coffee cakes they're worth your time: Blueberry Crumb Coffee Cake, Easily Made Raspberry Ripple Coffee Cake, Cuccidati Coffee Cake or the Irish Apple Cake.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      What kind of peaches to use

      As long as they are fresh and ripe it doesn't make a difference. However, I do suggest the yellow and not the white peaches so they show up.

      There are two basic types of peaches - cling stone peaches and free stone peaches. They are exactly what they sound like. With the cling stone peaches the peach pit or stone is firmly attached to the flesh of the peach and is harder to remove. With the free stone peach the pit is easy to remove. For indepth information on peaches, see my post, All About Peaches.

      Do I have to peel the peaches?

      Technically, you need to remove the fuzzy skin but there is an easy way to do it. Peeling the peaches takes some of the flesh with it. I like to use every bit of the flesh so I use a second method which keeps the fruit intact, is easier and faster. Simply bring a pot of water to a boil, add the peaches and boil for a minute or so until the skin loosens. Run under cold water and the skins just slip off. The one caveat is the peaches have to be ripe.

      Why you want to make this

      • It has lots of crumbs - isn't that why most of us eat anything with crumbs?
      • Although it has 3 parts to the recipe, each one is a snap to make and takes almost no time at all.
      • Sour cream coffee cakes are the best. They start moist and stay that way.
      • The peach filling is on top of the cake so it doesn't get lost in the batter.
      • I made sure to put lots of crumbs on top to ensure every bite is filled with them.

      Recipe Ingredients

      Brown Sugar Crumbs

      Ingredients for the Brown Sugar Crumbs include, cake flour, brown sugar, unsalted butter, salt, cinnamon.

      FRONT ROW: Salt, cinnamon

      MIDDLE ROW: Unsalted butter

      BACK ROW: Cake flour, dark brown sugar

      Peach Filling

      The peach filling ingredients are peaches, granulated sugar, instant clearjel, white balsamic vinegar and almond extract.

      FRONT ROW: Instant clearjel, white balsamic vinegar, almond extract

      BACK ROW: Peaches, granulated sugar

      Sour Cream Coffee Cake

      Sour Cream Coffee Cake ingredients are:  Unsalted butter, granulated sugar, eggs, all-purpose flour, baking powder, baking soda, table salt, sour cream and vanilla extract.

      FRONT ROW: Table salt, baking powder, baking soda, vanilla extract

      MIDDLE ROW: Unsalted butter, eggs

      BACK ROW: Sour cream, all-purpose flour, granulated sugar

      Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions.

      Key Ingredients

      • The brown sugar can be light or dark. I use dark because it imparts more flavor.
      • Any peach will do as long as it is ripe and preferably yellow not white so it show up in the coffee cake
      • Korintji cinnamon is my cinnamon of choice for it's bold flavor.
      • The white balsamic vinegar gives a lift to the peaches adding a hint of sharpness.
      • While almond extract is used, vanilla can be substituted if almond is a problem.
      • Unsalted butter is used for purity of taste.
      • Sour cream is a great tenderizer when used in cakes as well as adding flavor. It should be at room temperature.
      • The eggs and sour cream must be at room temperature.
      • Cake flour is used for the crumbs to make them more tender. All-purpose can be substituted if desired.

      Step by Step Instructions

      Spray a 9x3" cheesecake pan with a removable bottom or a springform pan with a non-stick baking release. Set aside.

      The butter should be very soft, about 74°F and the eggs and sour cream should be room temperature for this method to work well.

      The first collage for the Peach Crumble Coffee Cake include the dry ingredients for the crumble in the processor, processed to make crumbs, the peaches peeled and cut and the instant clearjel and sugar mixed and added to the cut peaches.

      Step 1. Place the dry ingredients for the brown sugar crumbs in the bowl of a processor. Step 2. Pulse to form crumbs and pour them into a bowl. Refrigerate until needed. Step 3. Remove the skin of the peaches either by peeling them, or better, blanching them in boiling water. After a minute or two, run one under cold water to see if the skin slips off easily. If so, remove all of them and run under cold water. Remove the skins and pits or stones. Cut the peaches into ½" dice. Step 4. Place the peaches in a bowl. Combine the instant clearjel and sugar. Add it to the bowl of peaches. See the notes in the recipe card for thickening substitutions.

      This collage shows the peaches mixed with the sugar and clearjel, the butter, sugar, eggs and vanilla in the bowl of a mixer, beaten and curdled, and flour added to the mixture.

      Step 5. Stir well. They will gel almost immediately. Set aside. Step 6. Place the butter, sugar, eggs and vanilla in the bowl of a mixer. Step 7. Beat on medium high until the mixture comes together smoothly. It will most likely curdle. That's fine - it will be corrected in the next step. Step 8. Alternated adding the flour and sour cream starting and ending with the flour. Add the first of 3 additions of flour to the curdled batter. Beat until smooth.

      This collage shows the sour cream being added to the mixing bowl, the finished batter added to the baking pan, the peaches put on top of the batter, and the  crumbs covering the peaches.

      Step 9. Mix in half of the sour cream. Repeat adding another third of the flour, the remainder of the sour cream and the last of the flour. The batter will be very thick. Step 10. Pour the batter into the prepared pan and smooth it out. Step 11. Add the peach filling on top of the batter to within ½" of the edge of the pan. Step. 12. Top with all of the crumbs, breaking them up with your hand if they are a bit stuck together. Bake as directed.

      Recipe FAQS

      What's the difference between coffee cakes and regular cakes?

      Coffee cakes are usually one layer cakes without or without a filling, often topped with crumbs or streusel. They are eaten at breakfast, brunch and for snacking. They are not usually served for dessert. While they can be leavened with yeast, they most often use baking powder or baking soda in America.

      What is the origin of coffee cake?

      Coffee cakes are attributed to Germany where they were called "Kaffee kuchen". However the Danish took it to a new level with designated coffee breaks becoming common. These immigrants brought their recipes with them and the coffee cakes became even more diverse and beloved.

      Are coffee cakes hard to make?

      No, they are usually simple cakes leavened with baking powder or baking soda that are easily put together. The yeasted version can take longer due to the dough having to rise a couple of times, but neither is particularly difficult.

      Expert Tips

      • For this mixing method to work it is necessary for the butter to be very soft, about 74° F and the eggs and sour cream need to be at room temperature.
      • When making the crumbs, do not over process the ingredients or they will become a paste. Just pulse and scrape down as necessary. Refrigerate them while completing the recipe.
      • Cut the peaches into about ½" dice so the peaches remain front and center in the cake. You need about 2 ½ cups.
      • Keep the peaches to within ½" of the edge of the pan for the best looking cake when cut.
      • When alternating the flour and sour cream always start and end with the flour to prevent curdling.
      • Tent the crumbs on top towards the end of baking or they will get too brown.
      A slice of Peach Crumb Coffee Cake sits on a white plate and yellow plate with a blue and white napkin and a glass of peach juice in the background.

      More great quick cakes

      • A slice of the Apple Cinnamon Coffee Cake sits on a yellow and blue rimmed plate with a multi-colored napkin and mug in the background.
        Apple Cinnamon Coffee Cake
      • This picture shows a slice of the coffee cake on a white, lace edged plate on a marble counter.
        Apricot Crumb Coffee Cake
      • Pina Colada Coffeecake
      • A slice of Easier Danish Pastry sits on a silver cake server with the braid in the background.
        Easier "Danish Pastry" Recipe

      A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I thank you.

      A slice of Peach Crumb Coffee Cake sits on a white plate and yellow plate with a blue and white napkin and a glass of peach juice in the background.

      Peach Crumb Coffee Cake

      Helen S. Fletcher
      With peaches in full swing, I couldn't resist making this Peach Crumb Coffee Cake. A simple to make sour cream coffee cake, topped with an uncooked peach filling and finished with loads of crumbs, this is great any time of the day.
      4.50 from 2 votes
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 1 hour hr 15 minutes mins
      Cook Time 1 hour hr 20 minutes mins
      Total Time 2 hours hrs 35 minutes mins
      Course Coffee Cake
      Cuisine American
      Servings 12 servings
      Calories 533 kcal

      Equipment

      • 9 x 3" cheesecake or springform pan.
      Prevent your screen from going dark

      Ingredients

      Brown Sugar Crumbs

      • ¾ cup unsalted butter, cold (170 grams or 1 ½ sticks)
      • 2 ¼ cups cake flour (280 grams)
      • 1 cup packed brown sugar (200 grams)
      • 1 teaspoon cinnamon
      • ½ teaspoon table salt

      Peach Filling

      • 1 ¼ pounds ripe peaches (570 grams)
      • ⅓ cup granulated sugar (65 grams)
      • 1 tablespoon + 2 teaspoons instant clearjel
      • 2 teaspoons white balsamic vinegar
      • 1 teaspoon almond extract

      Sour Cream Coffee Cake - it is important to have the eggs and sour cream at room temperature.

      • 1 ¾ cup all-purpose flour (240 grams)
      • 1 teaspoon baking powder
      • ¼ teaspoon baking soda
      • ½ teaspoon table salt
      • ½ cup unsalted butter, softened to 75° F (114 grams)
      • ¾ cup granulated sugar (150 grams)
      • 2 large eggs, room temperature
      • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
      • 1 cup sour cream (225 grams) room temperature

      Instructions
       

      Brown Sugar Crumbs

      • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Spray a 9x3" cheesecake or springform pan with a non-stick baking release. Set aside.
      • Cut the refrigerator cold butter into 8 pieces and cut those in half again for 16 pieces if using the processor. If using the mixer the butter must be very soft - around 74°f.
      • Combine the cake flour, brown sugar cinnamon and table salt in the bowl of a food processor. Pulse several times to mix well.
      • Add the cut up butter and pulse the processor to combine the dry ingredients and butter into large crumbs. Scrape down often. Pour into a bowl and refrigerate while preparing the remainder of the recipe.
      • To make the crumbs in a mixer, soften the butter. Combine the dry ingredients and mix briefly. Add the butter and mix on low until large crumbs for. Do not over mix or you will end up with a paste. Refrigerate while finishing.

      Peach Filling

      • Bring enough water to a boil to cover the peaches by several inches. After the water is at a rolling boil, add as many peaches as you can and let them boil for a minute or two.
        Remove one with a slotted spoon and run under cold water. The skin should be easily removed with no excess flesh clinging to it. If it does not, return it to the boiling water for another minute or so. Remove all the peaches, run under cold water and remove the skin with your fingers. See my post, "All About Peaches" for a complete tutorial on this method.
      • Cut the peaches in half and remove the pits or stones. Cut the peaches in ½" dice. There should be about 2 ½ cups peaches .Place in a bowl.
      • Combine the sugar and clearjel, mixing well. Add it to the peaches and stir to coat all of them. There should be no sugar mixture showing. Sir in the balsamic vinegar and almond extract. Set aside.

      Sour Cream Coffee Cake - it is important to have the butter very soft, around 74°F, and the eggs and sour cream at room temperature.

      • Whisk together the all-purpose flour, baking powder, baking soda, and table salt in a bowl. Set aside.
      • Place the butter, sugar, eggs and vanilla in the bowl of a mixer. Beat on medium until smooth. The mixture may curdle but that is fine, it will be fixed in the next step.
      • Alternate adding the flour and sour cream to the batter one at a time starting and ending with the flour, I usually do 3 flours and 2 sour creams. The batter will be very thick.
      • Place in the prepared baking pan and smooth out so it is flat.
      • Add the peach filling to within ½" of the edge of the pan.
      • Top with all of the brown sugar crumbs. Place it on a parchment lined baking sheet.
      • Place it in the preheated oven and bake for 70 to 80 minutes. Tent the coffee cake when the crumbs start browning too much. A cake tester should come out with no cake on it. It may have the peach filling on it since it will stay soft.
      • Cool completely in the pan. Remove the rim. If using a cheese cake pan, see the Chocolate Strawberry Mousse Torte for the full instructions on easily removing the rim.
      • This can be kept for 2 days at room temperature and then refrigerate the remainder. Serve at room temperature.

      Notes

      There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
       As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
      _________________________________________________
      For this mixing method to work it is necessary for the butter to be very soft, about 74° F and the eggs and sour cream need to be at room temperature. 
      When making the crumbs, do not over process the ingredients or they will become a paste. Just pulse and scrape down as necessary. Refrigerate them while completing the recipe.
      Cut the peaches into about ½" dice so the peaches remain front and center in the cake. You need about 2 ½ cups. 
      When adding the peaches to the  baking pan, keep the peaches to within ½" of the edge of the pan for the best looking cake when cut.
      When alternating the flour and sour cream always start and end with the flour to prevent curdling. 
      Tent the crumbs on top towards the end of baking or they will get too brown.
      The brown sugar can be light or dark. I use dark because it imparts more flavor.
      Any peach will do as long as it is ripe and preferably yellow not white so it show up in the coffee cake
      Korintji cinnamon is my cinnamon of choice for it's bold flavor.
      The white balsamic vinegar gives a lift to the peaches adding a hint of sharpness.
      Unsalted butter is used for purity of taste.
      Sour cream is a great tenderizer when used in cakes as well as adding flavor. It should be at room temperature. 
      Cake flour is used for the crumbs to make them more tender. All-purpose can be substituted if desired. 
      Other thickeners that can be used are the same amount of all-purpose flour or cornstarch.  I have not tried these but they are given as substitutes.  My preference is  instant clearjel.

      Nutrition

      Serving: 12servingsCalories: 533kcalCarbohydrates: 73gProtein: 7gFat: 24gSaturated Fat: 14gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 6gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 93mgSodium: 285mgPotassium: 169mgFiber: 2gSugar: 41gVitamin A: 910IUVitamin C: 2mgCalcium: 75mgIron: 2mg
      Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

      Strawberry Balsamic Granita Recipe

      Modified: Jul 15, 2025 · Published: Jul 15, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 4 Comments

      Strawberry Granita sists in a white bowl on a blue and white background with a yellow napkin and spoon .

      This Strawberry Balsamic Granita Recipe is a zippier version of the basic Italian ice and so easy, I can assure you anyone can make it. Granitas can be made with any fruit, fresh or frozen, or combined with other fruits. It's perfect for a snack, dessert or anytime of the day. Think of it as a more intense snow cone in a bowl!

      Have you heard the expression, "It's as easy as falling off a log?" Well, this is that!

      The beauty of this refreshing ice is that it only needs a processor or blender, a pan and a fork. It can be sweetened with almost anything including honey, sweeteners, sugar, or my favorite, a simple syrup which guarantees a smooth result.

      Using a glass pan to freeze the granita is important if using the balsamic vinegar, since it might react with an aluminum pan.

      Some other no bake desserts especially welcome during the summer months include: No Bake Pina Colada Cheesecake, (Almost) No bake Strawberry Pie, Amazing Banoffee Pie, Chocolate Truffle Raspberry Curd Tart and Cafe au Lait Tart

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      What is Granita?

      Granita is an Italian ice. At it's most basic, it is just fruit and sweetener combined and frozen. Every so often, it is scraped with a fork to fluff it up so it melts in your mouth and that's it! It doesn't get much easier. In addition to fresh or frozen fruit, coffee or juices work well also.

      When using fresh fruit, make sure it is ripe, so the maximum flavor is had. For coffee granita, just make coffee as you drink it, sweeten it and into the freezer it goes. What could be easier than orange juice? The easiest way to make lemon granita is to use a frozen lemonade concentrate. Thaw it and add water and a sweetener to taste. This is one of the most versatile recipes, limited only by your imagination.

      For an adult version, liqueurs can be poured over the ice. Think strawberry and orange liqueur, peach and amaretto, coffee and Kahlua. You get the idea.

      When to serve it

      Well, the Italian way is to eat it for breakfast! With brioche!! I can't say that doesn't sound good, although I think as an American, I would opt for an anytime snack or dessert. In the olden days of multiple courses of dinner, it would be served as a palate cleanser between courses. There is no wrong time today.

      Why balsamic and black pepper?

      Both of these enhance strawberries and I have used this combination several times on my blog as it is a favorite. See my Strawberry Balsamic Jam and the Oreo Tacos with Strawberry Salsa.

      The use of white balsamic vinegar as opposed to the normal dark is to keep the strawberries a vibrant red. The main difference between the white and dark balsamic vinegars is the grapes used and the amount of aging.

      Italians have been making balsamic vinegar for a thousand years. Balsamic vinegar is sweeter than the more robust vinegars. Some dark balsamic vinegars are aged up to 100 years in different barrels for a complexity of taste.

      However, these balsamics are very expensive, just like a fine wine and are used as a finishing vinegar and not as an ingredient. All dark balsamics are thicker and sweeter than the white balsamic, which can be aged in barrels or stainless steel tanks for a shorter amount of time. The white is usually used when you don't want to discolor the food with which it is being used, as would dark balsamic vinegar.

      How to make granita without a recipe

      Granita can be made with any puréed fruit or combination of fruit or fruit juice, lemonade, coffee, tea, watermelon. If using a fruit juice or any liquid, there are no special tools needed. If making with fruit, a blender or processor is used to purée the fruit.

      Simple syrup is my sweetener of choice. It can be made and held for a week in the fridge so you can have granita all summer long. Add about 20% of the syrup to the fruit or unsweetened liquid. That's about ¾ cup to 4 cups of fruit or liquid. The simple syrup can be infused with other flavors as in this recipe, or part of the liquid can be a liqueur. Add it to the water and sugar when making the simple syrup to burn off the alcohol, leaving only the flavor of the liqueur.

      After mixing everything, just put it in a dish and freeze it. A thickness of ½ inch in the pan is ideal, but it can be deeper. It will just take longer to freeze. When it freezes, follow the technique below to fluff it up into those crunchy ice crystals that are unique to granita. Re-fluff just before serving.

      Why you'll love this

      • I can't imagine anything easier to make.
      • The possibilities are endless.
      • Anyone can make this.
      • It's so refreshing as a snack or dessert
      • It is fat free and low in calories if that's a concern

      Recipe Ingredients

      Ingredients for the Strawberry Balsamic Granita Recipe include strawberries, sugar water, white balsamic vinegar and black pepper.

      FRONT ROW: Black pepper, granulated sugar, white balsamic vinegar

      BACK ROW: Strawberries, water

      Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions.

      Step by Step Instructions

      It is important to use a glass dish if using the balsamic vinegar, and an aluminum pan may interact with the vinegar causing a metallic taste.

      The first collage shows the sugar and water in a saucepan, then boiling, the black pepper added and then the white balsamic vinegar.

      Step 1. To make the simple syrup, place the water and sugar in a small saucepan. Step 2. Bring to a rolling boil. Boil for 1 minute. Step 3. Remove from the heat and add the black pepper. Step 4. Stir in the white balsamic vinegar.

      The final collage shows the sliced strawberries in the processor with the simple syrup, then pureed, poured into a glass dish and fluffed up when frozen.

      Step 5. Place the strawberries and simple syrup in the bowl of a processor or blender. Step 6. Purée the mixture, scraping down as necessary. Step 7. Pour into a 9" glass or ceramic dish. Step 8. Freeze until about ¾ frozen. Fluff it up using a fork, drag it through the granita and then chop it up with the fork. Freeze until hard. If the granita gets frozen hard before fluffing it, let it sit at room temperature for a few minutes to soften it slightly. Place it back in the freezer. Fluff it just before serving.

      Recipe FAQs

      Why is a simple syrup used?

      By liquifying the sugar in water, it ensures the smoothest finish for the granita. However, honey or sweetener can be used by themselves. In that case, no water is necessary. Sweeten to taste.

      What the difference between granita and sorbet?

      Sorbet is whipped and smooth, granita is What is the difference between a granita and a sorbet? Granita is not whipped but frozen and then fluffed up with a fork to allow ice crystals to form making a granular, crunchy texture.

      Is granita healthy?

      Since it's basically fruit or fruit liquid or other liquid, and a bit of sweetener, it is one of the healthiest desserts or snacks to be had.

      Strawberry Granita sists in a white bowl on a blue and white background with a yellow napkin and spoon .

      Be sure to try some of these cold treats

      • No Churn Peach Swirl Ice Cream
        No Churn Peach Swirl Ice Cream
      • This Caramel Hot Fudge Sundae sits in a clear glass with a container with a scoop of vanilla ice cream with a cherry on top.
        Caramel Hot Fudge Brownie Sundae
      • A slice of the Peanut Butter Ice Cream Pie sits on a clear plate over a lattice trivet with the pie in the background and a glass of ice tea nearby .
        Peanut Butter Ice Cream Pie Recipe
      • Magic Shell
        Magic Shell for Ice Cream

      A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important. 

      Strawberry Granita sists in a white bowl on a blue and white background with a yellow napkin and spoon .

      Strawberry Balsamic Black Pepper Granita

      Helen S. Fletcher
      This Strawberry Balsamic Black Pepper Granita recipe is a zippier version of the basic Italian ice and so easy I can assure you anyone can make it.
      5 from 1 vote
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 25 minutes mins
      Total Time 25 minutes mins
      Course Dessert
      Cuisine Italian
      Servings 8 servings
      Calories 91 kcal

      Equipment

      • Food processor or blender
      • 9x9" glass pan or any glaxx pan about that size.
      Prevent your screen from going dark

      Ingredients

      Simple Syrup

      • ⅔ cup water
      • ⅔ cup sugar (130 grams)

      Strawberry Balsamic Black Pepper Granita

      • 2 tablespoons white balsamic vinegar, optional
      • ¾ teaspoon coarse ground black pepper, optional
      • 4 cups sliced strawberries*
      • *About 680 grams or 1 ½ pounds

      Instructions
       

      Simple Syrup

      • The name says it all. Combine the water and sugar in a small sauce pan. Bring to a rolling boil. Boil for 1 minutes.
      • Remove from the heat and stir in the balsamic vinegar and black pepper. Cool.

      Strawberry Balsamic Black Pepper Granita

      • While the simple syrup is cooling, rinse the strawberries and remove the green tops. Slice the strawberries. There's no special size here, just slice them.
      • Place the strawberries and the cooled syrup in a processor or blender. Process or blend until smooth, scraping down as necessary.
      • Pour into the pan and freeze for several hours until it's about ¾ frozen. Scrape with a fork to fluff it up. Refluff it before serving.
      • If the granita freezes hard, just let it sit for a few minutes at room temperature to soften. Store in the freezer.
      • Yield: About 1 quart.

      Nutrition

      Serving: 8servingsCalories: 91kcalCarbohydrates: 23gProtein: 1gFat: 0.3gSaturated Fat: 0.01gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.1gMonounsaturated Fat: 0.03gSodium: 3mgPotassium: 117mgFiber: 1gSugar: 21gVitamin A: 10IUVitamin C: 42mgCalcium: 14mgIron: 0.4mg
      Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

      Simple Samoa Cookie Bars

      Modified: May 8, 2026 · Published: Jul 10, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 10 Comments

      A stack of Samoa Bars sits on a cream colored plate.

      These Samoa Cookie Bars are the essence of minimum work for maximum flavor. A melt in your mouth shortbread crust topped with homemade caramel (you can do it, it's foolproof) chock full of toasted coconut with the bottoms dipped in chocolate. Just like the Girl Scout cookie version but in a much simpler form.

      A stack of Samoa Bars sits on a cream colored plate.

      This bar version is so much easier to make than the cookies. I just don't have the patience it takes to fiddle with cutting out those small cookies, patiently arranging the caramel coconut filling on them and then dipping them. I saw one person said it took her 4 hours. No thanks! These can be whipped up in no time and you have way more Samoa Bars than little cookies. One bar is at least 2 cookies. How could you not love that?

      I love brownies and bar cookies because they are generally so easy to make and you get a sizeable amount for the time invested. Here are a few others you should look into: Cocoa Brownies, Pecan Bars, Mocha Kahlua Brownies (these are still the most sought after brownie I made - we also cut them smaller for petit fours), Mexican Brownies, and from down under, Spice Bars. Also check out this collection of recipes 7 Quick Wins for Mother's Day.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Tell me about the coconut

      Sweetened coconut and dessicated coconut site on a gray tray.

      The coconut on the left is the one most used in baking. The shreds are longer and it's moist and sweetened. The coconut on the right is desiccated coconut.

      For desiccated coconut the meat is shredded and then dehydrated to remove most of its moisture. It is usually unsweetened. Unsweetened desiccated coconut is most important to the Samoa Bars. Additionally, it is important to toast it to give it the same flavor as the Girl Scout cookies. Otherwise, it is just a coconut cookie.

      Be careful when toasting coconut as it can burn easily. I find desiccated coconut easier to toast than the sweetened. You will see in the photos below how beautiful it is. I didn't need to stir it at all, I just turned the tray around about ¾ of the way through and it browned evenly. The key here is to make sure it is in single layer and any stray shreds are scooted into the edges or they will burn on their own.

      Do I have to make the caramel?

      I am a firm believer that this homemade caramel is better than anything you can buy. So I encourage you to take a flyer and give it a try.

      It is true you need candy thermometer but they are inexpensive and the results are very worth the investment. My recipe, Caramel - A building Block of Pastry shows you how to make caramel for any need you will have from a caramel sauce to hard caramels from the same recipe.

      Having said that, you can substitute 8 ounces of Werther's soft caramels if need be. I don't suggest any other caramel because they don't have the same buttery taste. Werther's is the closest to mine that I've found.

      What's Not to Love about Samoa Bars

      • The Girl Scout Cookies are an all time favorite and these are a super easy way to make them.
      • While I prefer the homemade caramel, Werther's soft caramels can be used for a shortcut.
      • Imagine a 9" square pan of these little marvels instead of the few that come in a package.
      • Nothing tastes as good as homemade cookies and these are no exception.

      Recipe Ingredients

      Coconut Caramel

      Ingredients for the coconut caramel include, unsalted butter, vanilla extract,granulated sugar, corn syrup, water, desiccated coconut,and  heavy cream.

      FRONT ROW: Unsalted Butter

      MIDDLE ROW: Vanilla extract, granulated sugar, corn syrup

      BACK ROW: Water, desiccated coconut, heavy cream

      Shortbread Crust

      Ingredients for the shortbread crust are all-purpose flour, powdered sugar and unsalted butter.

      FRONT ROW: Unsalted butter

      BACK ROW: All-purpose flour, powdered sugar

      Chocolate Finish

      Semisweet chocolate and a small amount of cristo are used to finish the Samoa Bars.

      Left to Right: Semisweet chocolate, crisco

      Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions.

      Step by Step Instructions

      Coconut Caramel

      The collagel for the caramel shows the sugar, corn syrup and water in a saucepan, thel id on the pan, the syrup boiling and the golden color of the syrup when it is done.

      Heat the cream until hot. Set aside. Step 1. Place the water, corn syrup and sugar in a saucepan about 3 times larger than the ingredients. Step 2. When the syrup comes to a rolling boil, place a lid on the pan to wash down the side so no sugar remains stuck on it. Alternatively, dip a clean pastry brush in cold water and wash down the side of the pan. Step 3. Continue boiling hard. Step 4. The syrup becomes a deep golden brown. This sets the taste for the caramel.

      This caramel collages shows the butter melting in the syrup, the cram being stirred in, the mixture returned to a boil and the finished caramel.

      Step 5. Off heat, stir in the butter until it melts. Step 6. Add the cream and vanilla. If the cream lumps up, don't worry about it, the next step will fix that. Step 7. Return the mixture to the heat and boil to a temperature of 230°F. Step 8. Remove from the heat and cool.

      Samoa Bars

      The first collage for the shortbread base shows the pan lined with parchment paper paper, the untoasted coconut on a tray , the coconut toasted and the dry ingredients for the crust in the processor.

      Step 1. Line a 9x9 inch pan with parchment paper allowing the sides to extend to make a sling. Set aside. Step 2. Place the desiccated coconut on a tray in a single layer. Make sure there are no stray shreds on either side. Step 3. Place it in 350°F oven for about 8 minutes turning ¾ of the way through. I did not have to stir mine but if you notice yours is baking unevenly, stir it. Cool the coconut. Reserve ½ cup and set aside. Step 4. Place the flour and powdered sugar in the bowl of a processor. Process with a few pulses to mix.

      This collage shows the base being madre with the butter added to the processor, every9ing processed to large chunks, placed in the baking pan and pressed out.

      Step 5. Add the cold, cut up butter to the processor. Step 6. Process until large chunks form. Step 7. Place chunks of the dough evenly around the bottom of the baking pan. Step 8. Press the dough together to make the base. Make sure no seams show. It should be one solid sheet of dough.

      This collage shows the base bakes, the caramel in a bowl, the toasted coconut added and it distributed over the base.

      Step 9. Bake the base as called for until a light golden brown. Cool the base. Step 10. Place the cooled caramel in a medium size bowl. If it has set up, microwave it briefly to loosen it up. If using the caramels, unwrap them and microwave to soften them to a near liquid state. Step 11. Add 1 ½ cups coconut and stir to mix completely. Step 12. Distribute the coconut over the base.

      The last collage shows the caramel-coconut spread evenly over the base, the reserved coconut pressed into the caramel, chocolate is stripped on the diagonal across the bars and the bottom of one of the bars i  chocolate.

      Step 13. Spread the caramel-coconut mixer evenly over the base with a small offset spatula. Remove the bars from the pan. Remove the parchment paper and set the Samoas on a cake board or a cutting board as long as it doesn't harbor strong smells. Step 14. Immediately, sprinkle the reserved coconut evenly over the caramel mixture. Press it in lightly so it adheres. Step 15. Melt 6 ounces of chocolate with 1 to 2 teaspoons of crisco to loosen it. Place a small amount in a piping bag fitted with a small plain writing tip and pipe diagonal lines across the bars. Cut 7 across one side and 3 down for a total of 21 bars. Step 16. Place the rest of the chocolate in a bowl just big enough to hold the bar, bottom side down. Dip the bottom of one bar at a time into the chocolate and place on waxed paper or parchment paper to firm up. These can be refrigerated briefly to set the chocolate.

      Recipe FAQS

      When were Samoa cookies added to the Girl Scout Cookies?

      Samoa (or Caramel deLites) Girl Scout Cookies were introduced in 1975.

      Why were they called Samoa cookies?

      The name "Samoa" is believed to be inspired by the island nation of Samoa which is half way between Hawaii and New Zealand. The cookies are names after Samoa because It is a major coconut exporter.

      Why are they called Caramel deLites in some areas?

      The cookies are made by different manufacturers in different areas It depends on how the bakers are licensed.

      Expert Tips

      • Toasting the coconut to a deep golden brown is key to the taste of the Samoa Bars.
      • Watch the coconut carefully - it goes from just right to good grief I burned it in a flash towards the end.
      • Using powdered sugar in the base gives it a melt in your mouth texture as opposed to granulated sugar which gives a snappier texture.
      • Unsweetened desiccated coconut is the way to go here.
      • 8 ounces of Werther's soft caramels can be subbed if not making the caramel.
      A stack of Samoa Bars sits on a cream colored plate.

      Looking for more bar cookies? Look no longer!

      • A cookie crust, peanut butter filling and chocolate topping make up the No Bake Peanut Butter Bars
        No Bake Peanut Butter Bars
      • Rugelach Bars are stacked on a decorative plate.
        Quick Easy Versatile Rugelach Bars
      • Hermit Bars
        Hermit Bars with Lemon Glaze
      • Ready to eat Spritz bars piled up.
        Spritz Bars - Easier than The Cookies

      A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like these Samoa Bars or any other recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important. 

      A stack of Samoa Bars sits on a cream colored plate.

      Simple Samoa Cookie Bars

      Helen S. Fletcher
      These Samoa Bars are the essence of minimum work for maximum flavor. A melt in your mouth shortbread crust topped with homemade caramel (you can do it, it's foolproof) chock full of toasted coconut with the bottoms dipped in chocolate.
      4 from 3 votes
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 1 hour hr
      Total Time 1 hour hr
      Course Bar Cookies, Cookies
      Cuisine American
      Servings 21 bars
      Calories 217 kcal

      Equipment

      • 9x9 inch square baking pan
      Prevent your screen from going dark

      Ingredients

      Coconut Caramel - this makes a small amount so watch it carefully as it comes to a boil.

      • 2 cups desiccated coconut
      • ½ cup water
      • ¼ cup corn syrup
      • ½ cup granulated sugar (100 grams)
      • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter (30 grams)
      • ½ cup heavy cream
      • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
      • OR
      • 8 ounces Werther caramels if not making the caramel

      Shortbread Base

      • 1 ⅛ cups all-purpose flour (160 grams)
      • ⅓ cup powdered sugar (45 grams)
      • ½ cup butter, refrigerator cold (114 grams or 1 stick)

      Chocolate Finish

      • 6 ounces semisweet chocolate (170 grams)
      • 1 to 2 teaspoons crisco

      Instructions
       

      Coconut Caramel

      • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Arrange 2 cups of desiccated coconut in a single layer in a sheet pan. Make sure there are no stray shreds of coconut at the edges. Just scoot them into the pile. Toast the coconut until uniformly medium brown. I did not need to stir mine but I did turn it front to back about ¾ through baking. If the coconut is not baking uniformly, then stir as needed. Set aside to cool.
        Reserve ½ cup of the coconut.
      • Heat the cream until hot. Set aside,
      • Bring to a hard rolling boil and boil until the syrup turns a medium golden brown. (see the photo in the step by step photos)
      • Remove from the heat and add the butter Stir until it has melted. Add the cream and vanilla extract, stirring to combine. If the cream seizes, it will be corrected in the next step.
      • Return the pan to the heat and bring back to a boil. Boil to a temperature of 230°F. Pour into a medium size bowl and cool.

      Shortbread Base

      • Line a 9x9 inch baking pan with parchment paper letting the excess hang over the edges to form a sling. Set aside. Preheat the oven to 350°F.
      • Combine the flour and powdered sugar in the bowl of a processor. Pulse several times to mix.
      • Cut the cold butter in smallish pieces. Add to the flour mixture and process until it forms large crumbs.
      • Arrange the shortbread crumbs evenly over the bottom of the pan. Push them together to form an even solid pastry base. Make sure there are no seams showing as they make crack when baked.
      • Bake for about 25 minutes until an even golden brown, turning halfway through. Cool.

      Assembly

      • Add the 1 ½ cups of coconut to the caramel, stirring to blend well. Spread this evenly over the shortbread base. If the caramel has set up too hard, microwave it briefly before adding the coconut.
      • If using the Werther caramels, unwrap them, place them in a microwave dish and microwave to melt. Proceed as above.
      • Spread the Coconut Caramel evenly over the shortbread base. Sprinkle the remaining ½ cup of toasted coconut on top, pressing it lightly into the coconut caramel. Cool completely.
      • Remove the Samoas from the pan, lay the sling flat.

      Chocolate Finish

      • Combine the chocolate and 1 teaspoon crisco in a small bowl wide enough to dip the bottom of a bar in. Microwave to melt. Stir to combine. If the chocolate is still really thick, add the second teaspoon of crisco. The chocolate should be thick enough to coat with the excess barely running off.
      • Place a small amount in a pastry bag fitted with a small writing tip. Alternatively, use a heavy plastic bag and cut a very little off the tip. Do not make it too big.
      • Pipe diagonal lines over the top of the coconut. Let it set up. To speed it along, place it in the fridge for a few minutes. Cut 7 across and 3 down for 21 bars or cut any size you wish.
      • Dip the bottoms in the chocolate. Holding the bar just above the rim of the bowl, lightly swipe the excess chocolate off. Place it on a piece of waxed or parchment paper. Let the chocolate set up. Again, pop them in the fridge for a few minutes to harden. After that they will hold at room temperature
      • These hold well at room temperature lightly covered or even in an uncovered container.

      Notes

      There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
       As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
      _____________________________________________
      Toasting the coconut to a deep golden brown is key to the taste of the Samoa Bars.
      Watch the coconut carefully - it goes from just right to good grief I burned it in a flash towards the end.
      Using powdered sugar in the base gives it a melt in your mouth texture as opposed to granulated sugar which gives a snappier texture.
      Unsweetened desiccated coconut is the way to go here. 
      8 ounces of Werther's soft caramels can be subbed if not making the caramel.
       

      Nutrition

      Serving: 21barsCalories: 217kcalCarbohydrates: 25gProtein: 2gFat: 13gSaturated Fat: 9gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gTrans Fat: 0.2gCholesterol: 19mgSodium: 69mgPotassium: 83mgFiber: 2gSugar: 18gVitamin A: 223IUVitamin C: 0.2mgCalcium: 24mgIron: 1mg
      Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

      Caramelized Peach Tart with Brown Sugar Crumble

      Modified: Jul 3, 2025 · Published: Jul 3, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 24 Comments

      Caramelized Peach Tart

      This amazing Caramelized Peach Tart combines a creamy pastry cream, caramelized peaches, and a brown sugar crumble made with almond paste in an easy pastry crust. The brown sugar crumble is worth everything all by itself. Don't be put off because this recipe contains several component parts. All of them can be made ahead and the tart assembled on the day of serving.

      Caramelized Peach Tart

      But don't wait until peach season is gone - this  is truly worth making.  From the press in cookie crust, to the creamy pastry cream,  the intensely flavored peach filling, and finally a bake alone crispy crumble topping that is good on ice cream, fresh fruit, and myriad other things, including snacking I am told, this is a summer winner for sure.

      Other fruit offerings include: Blueberry Crumb Muffins, Two Step Banana Bread, No Churn Peach Swirl Ice Cream, Mini Pineapple Upside Down Cakes, and Plum Crisp

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Baked Brown Sugar Crumble

      Years ago when I wrote European Tarts, I included this as the topping for the Apricot Crumble Tart.  Because this is baked on a sheet pan, it can be cooled and kept as a final flourish to anything requiring a bit of crunch and extra flavor.

      The almond paste and brown sugar work well together.  When I went to make this I didn't have any almond paste.  What I did have was a lot of almond flour.  In a matter of minutes I made a batch of almond paste which I used here.  When you go to the post there are two versions.  I used the one with the simple syrup.

      I will say the brown sugar crumble came out of the food processor in crumbs but baked up in a solid sheet. So I used a fork to pull the mass of baked "crumble" into crumbs while hot. When they cool, they are crisp and if not small enough, just break them up between your hands.

      Caramelized Peach Tart

      As mentioned above this dessert requires a number of parts but all of them can be done ahead.   Here's how that looks.

      9" Plain Press in Shell

      This can be made weeks, even months ahead and frozen unbaked in its tin.  It can be baked from the freezer when needed.  Go to the Easy Almond Raspberry Tart for how to photos .

      This is a photo of the baked press in tart shell for the Caramelized Peach Tart.

      Pastry Cream

      Just like the shell above, the pastry cream can be frozen for a month or two.  Just thaw it in the refrigerator up to 5 days before using.  The whipped cream should be added after it has thawed but can be done several days ahead..  Please see Pastry Cream Filling for how to photos of this pastry staple.

      This is a bowl of pastry cream.

      Almond Paste

      This almond paste can be made months ahead and stored in the freezer  or it can be stored in the refrigerator for a couple of weeks.  You can also buy almond paste if desired.  For  how to photos go to How to Make Almond Paste.

      There are two methods on the post. I use the one with the simple syrup.

      This photo shows a roll of freshly made almond paste.

      Recipe Ingredients

      Press in Crust Ingredients

      The ingredients for the press in crust include unsalted butter, all-purpose flour, cake flour, baking powder, granulated sugar and an egg.

      COUNTER CLOCKWISE: Unsalted butter, all-purpose flour, cake flour, baking powder, granulated sugar. Egg in the middle

      Pastry Cream

      Ingredients for the Pastry Cream include milk, egg yolks, granulated sugar, flour, vanilla and heavy cream.

      FRONT ROW: Gelatin

      MIDDLE ROW: All-purpose flour, vanilla, water

      BACK ROW: Egg yolks, granulated sugar, milk

      Almond Paste

      Ingredients for the Almond Paste are:  Almond flour, powdered sugar, simple syrup and almond extrract.

      FRONT ROW: Simple Syrup, almond extract

      BACK ROW: Almond Flour, powdered sugar

      Brown Sugar Crumble

      Ingredients for the Brown Sugar Crumble are  flour, brown sugar, salt, unsalted butter and almond paste.

      FRONT ROW: Salt, unsalted butter

      BACK ROW: All-purpose flour, almond paste, dark brown sugar

      Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions.

      Step by Step Instructions

      Brown Sugar Crumble

      This can be made a week or so ahead. Store in a covered container at room temperature.

      This collages shows the brown sugar crumble being made.  The ingredients are in the processor, processed, poured out into a baking sheet and baked.

      Step 1. Place all the ingredients in a food processor. Step 2. Process until crumbs form. Step 3. Pour out onto a parchment line half sheet pan and spread out evenly. Step 4. If they bake up in a sheet, use a fork to pull the dough away to make crumbs while it is still hot.  Cool.  If the crumbs are too big, smash them between your hands.

      Caramelized Peaches

      The peach filling is made by cutting up the peeled peaches, bringing the butter and sugar to a hard boil and then cooking the peaches until most of the liquid is gone.

      Step 5. Peel the peaches. For the easiest way see my post, All About Peaches. Cut them in about ½" pieces. They shoudn't be too thin or they will reduce in size as they cook. Set aside. Step 6. Place the all the ingredients except the peaches in a skillet large enough to hold the peaches. Step 7. Bring to a boil and boil  for several minutes to reduce the mixture. Step 8. Add the peaches and continue boiling until the syrup is reduced and the peaches have softened. This can be done a day ahead and refrigerated.

      Assembly

      Step 9. Spread the pastry cream evenly in the pastry shell. Step 10. Add the peach filling. Step 11. Top with the brown sugar crumbles. Step 12. If you wish to finish the tart with powdered sugar, cut strips of paper about ¾" wide.  Arrange them on top of the tart. Sprinkle heavily with powdered sugar.  Carefully remove the paper strips.

      Recipe FAQS

      What is the difference between a freestone and a cling peach?

      The stones or pits of a freestone peach release very easily from the flesh. A cling or clingstone peach is one where the stone or pit is difficult to remove as it clings to the flesh of the peach.

      What's the difference between a pie and a tart?

      A pie has a crust, a filling and some kind of top be it a pie crust, crumb or streusel. It is deeper than a tart. A tart has a crust and a filling but not necessarily a top. It is made in a pan with rippled edges and is shorter than a pie.

      What flavors enhance peaches?

      Almond or vanilla extract or a bit of both as well as amaretto, peach schnapps, bourbon or orange liqueur all go well with peaches.

      Expert Tips

      • Have the crust, pastry cream, almond paste (if making) and peach filling made ahead as stated in the recipe.
      • Reduce the liquid in the cooked peaches enough to coat them generously but remember they will thicken more upon chilling.
      • The assembly of the finished tart can be done the day ahead.
      • Serve the slightly cool but not cold.  It can also be served at room temperature as long as the room is cool.
      • Store any leftovers in the refrigerator.
      A slice of the Caramelized Peach Tart sits on a antique plate with more plates and the tart in the background

      Other Marvelous Fruit Desserts

      • White Wine Amaretto Peach Sauce
        White Wine Amaretto Peach Sauce
      • A slice of the Chocolate Strawberry Pie on a white plate.
        Chocolate Strawberry Pie
      • Blueberry poke cake is a 9x13" cake that has holes poked in it and filled with a blueberry compote. It is finished with whipped cream and blueberry filling
        Blueberry Lemon Poke Cake
      • Plum Crisp ready to eat with a spoon in a white bowl.
        Plum Crisp

      A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important. 

      A slice of the Caramelized Peach Tart sits on a antique plate with more plates and the tart in the background.

      Caramelized Peach Tart with Brown Sugar Crumble

      Helen S. Fletcher
      This amazing Caramelized Peach Tart combines a creamy pastry cream, caramelized peaches, and a brown sugar crumble made with almond paste in an easy pastry crust. The brown sugar crumble is worth everything all by itself. While this recipe contains several component parts all of them can be made ahead and the tart assembled on the day of serving.
      5 from 4 votes
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 2 hours hrs
      Total Time 2 hours hrs
      Course Dessert, Tarts
      Cuisine American
      Servings 10 servings
      Calories 434 kcal

      Equipment

      • 9x1 inch Tart Pan with removable bottom
      Prevent your screen from going dark

      Ingredients

      9" Pastry Shell

      • 1 cup all-purpose flour (140 grams)
      • ¼ cup cake flour (25 grams)
      • ⅓ teaspoon baking powder
      • 6 tablespoons unsalted butter, cold
      • 3 tablespoons granulated sugar (35 grams)
      • 1 large egg

      Pastry Cream

      • ⅞ cup milk, hot* (1 cup less 2 tablespoons)
      • 3 large egg yolks
      • ⅓ cup granulated sugar (65 grams)
      • 2 tablespoons all-purpose flour (17 grams)
      • 1 teaspoon pure vanilla
      • ⅓ cup heavy cream
      • *Whole or 2% milk may be used.

      Almond Paste Simple Syrup

      • ¼ cup water
      • 1 tablespoon light corn syrup
      • 3 tablespoons granulated sugar (42 grams)

      Almond Paste

      • ½ cup + 1 tablespoon almond flour (70 grams)
      • ½ cup + 1 tablespoon powdered sugar (70 grams)
      • 1 ½ tablespoons simple syrup from above
      • 1 ½ teaspoon almond extract

      Brown Sugar Crumble

      • ⅓ cup all-purpose flour (45grams)
      • ⅓ cup dark brown sugar, packed (65 grams)
      • ½ teaspoon salt
      • 3 tablespoons unsalted butter, cold (45 grams)
      • 2 ounces almond paste (60 grams)

      Caramelized Peaches

      • 3 cups peaches*
      • 4 tablespoons butter (58 grams)
      • ½ cup granulated sugar (100 grams)
      • 2 tablespoons corn syrup
      • 2 tablespoons amaretto liqueur**
      • *About 3 medium peaches slightly underripe
      • **substitute 1 teaspoon almond extract if desired

      Instructions
       

      9" Pastry Shell - please see photos for making the shell at Almond Raspberry Tart.

      • To make in a processor:   Place the flours and baking powder in the food processor.   Process to mix briefly.  Cut the cold butter into pieces. Place the butter in a circle over the flours.  Process until finely cut in.  Add the sugar; process briefly.  Add the egg and yolk and process until a ball forms.
      • To make in a mixer: Combine the flours, baking powder and butter in mixer bowl. Beat with the paddle attachment until the butter is cut in very finely.  Add the sugar; mix briefly.  Add the egg and yolk; mix on medium speed until it comes together in a ball.
      • Spray only the center bottom of the pan only with a releasing spray.
      • Save a small piece of dough about the size of a large marble in case the crust needs to be patched.  Divide the remaining dough in half (175 grams or 6 ounces).  Divide one piece in half again (85 grams or 3 ounces).  Roll one quarter of the dough (85 grams or 3 ounces) evenly into a rope.  Lay against one half edge of the pan.  Repeat with the other quarter, overlapping the pieces slightly. Press into the side of the shell, sealing the two pieces together. 
      • Flatten the remaining half of the dough into a circle.  Place it in the bottom of the pan.  With the heel of your hand, press the dough outward toward the edge.  Continue to work the dough outward with your fingers and lastly, seal the seam.  Be sure to seal the seam well where the edge and the bottom meet so it does not crack when baked.  
      • Prick the tart bottom with a fork.  Place on a baking sheet and bake for 12 to 15 minutes if partially baking or 18 to 22 minutes until a rich golden brown if fully baking.  Cool; fill and finish as directed.
      • If cracks appear, use the reserved dough to patch them with a small spatula while the pastry is hot. There is no need to bake it again.
      • The unbaked pastry shell can be made several months in advance, frozen in its pan, and wrapped well in foil. Bake as directed adding a bit more time to account for the freezing. Cool before using.

      Pastry Cream - step by step photos can be found on Pastry Cream using the ingredients in this recipe.

      • Whisk the egg yolks and sugar together in a bowl.  Whisk in the flour.
      • Add the milk slowly, whisking well and scraping the corners of the bowl with a rubber spatula to make sure all of the egg yolk mixture is incorporated.
      • Strain the mixture into a saucepan and place over medium heat.
      • Stirring constantly, bring to a boil.  Boil for 1 minute.  Remove from the heat and add the vanilla.  Pour into a storage container, cover the surface with plastic wrap, poke a few holes in it and let it cool.  Refrigerate overnight to chill or it can be frozen for several months. Thaw in the refrigerator where it can be held for 3 or 4 days.
      • When ready to use, whip the cream to medium stiff peaks.   Remove to a bowl.  Place the pastry cream in the mixing bowl and beat with a paddle until smooth.  Fold in the cream.

      Almond Paste - see step by step photos at my post Almond Paste.

      • Simple Syrup: Combine the water and corn syrup in a small saucepan. Add the sugar and stir to combine. Bring to a boil oil and boil for 2 minutes. Remove from the heat and cool.
      • Almond Paste: Combine the almond flour and powdered sugar in the processor bowl.  Process briefly to mix well.
      • Combine the simple syrup and almond extract.  Stir well.  Pour over the dry ingredients in the processor in a circle.  Process until it just starts to come together. However, it should come together when a small amount is pinched.  If it is too dry, add more simple syrup very sparingly, just a a teaspoon at a time.  If too wet, add a bit more almond flour.
      • Combine the simple syrup and almond extract.  Stir well.  Pour over the dry ingredients in the processor in a circle.  Process until it appears like sand.  However, it should come together when a small amount is pinched.  If it is too dry, add more simple syrup very sparingly, just a bit at a time.  If too wet, add a bit more almond flour.
      • Pour it our onto a work area and push it together.  Knead it several times; then shape into a log.  Wrap in film and refrigerate for about an hour.
      • This can be made a week ahead and refrigerated or frozen for months well wrapped. Thaw to use.

      Baked Brown Sugar Crumble

      • Preheat oven to 350°F. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.  Set aside.
      • Place everything in the processor bowl and pulse just until crumbly.  Do not overprocess.  You want fairly large crumbs. 
      • Spread the crumbs out.  Bake about 7 to 10 minutes or until golden.
      • If they bake up in a sheet, use a fork to pull the dough away to make crumbs while it is still hot.  Cool.  If the crumbs are too big, smash them between your hands.
      • Store in an airtight container at room temperature. for up to a week at room temperature. Try not to eat them.

      Caramelized Peaches

      • Peel the peaches or blanch them in boiling water to loosen the skin.  My preferred way to place them in boiling water for 30 seconds or more until the skins will slip off. The riper the peach, the easier the skin comes off. Run under cold water and just pull the peels off. For a complete discussion of peaches with photos, please see my post All About Peaches  
      • Cut the peaches in about ½" pieces. They shoudn't be too thin or they will reduce in size as they cook.
      • Place the all the ingredients except the peaches in a skillet large enough to hold the peaches.Bring to a boil and  boil  for several minutes to reduce the mixture. Add the peaches and continue boiling until the syrup is reduced and the peaches have softened.
      • Cool Completely. This may be made a day or two ahead and stored in the refrigerator.

      Assembly

      • If the tart shell has not been baked, bake it now and cool it completely.
      • After combining the pastry cream with the whipped cream, Spread it into the bottom of the baked tart shell.
      • Spread the caramelized peaches over the pastry cream and top with the brown sugar crumble.
      • If you wish to finish the tart with powdered sugar, cut strips of paper about ¾" wide.  Arrange them on top of the tart. Sprinkle heavily with powdered sugar.  Carefully remove the paper strips.
      • Store the tart in the refrigerator. Allow the tart to sit at room temperature for about 20 to 30 minutes to take the chill off.

      Notes

      There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
       As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
      ______________________________________________
      Have the crust, pastry cream, almond paste (if making) brown sugar crumble, and peach filling made ahead as stated in the recipe.
      Reduce the liquid in the cooked peaches enough to coat them generously but remember they will thicken more upon chilling.
      The assembly of the finished tart can be done the day ahead. 
      Serve the slightly cool but not cold.  It can also be served at room temperature as long as the room is cool.
      Store any leftovers in the refrigerator.

      Nutrition

      Serving: 10servingsCalories: 434kcalCarbohydrates: 62gProtein: 7gFat: 19gSaturated Fat: 8gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 3gTrans Fat: 0.3gCholesterol: 103mgSodium: 414mgPotassium: 131mgFiber: 3gSugar: 44gVitamin A: 612IUVitamin C: 2mgCalcium: 288mgIron: 2mg
      Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

      A Summer Roundup of Sweet & Savory

      Modified: Jul 3, 2025 · Published: Jun 30, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 4 Comments

      A slice of No Bake Strawberry Pie finished with whipped cream, sits on a white plate with a yellow gingham background.

      I wanted to highlight some of the best Sweet and Savory recipes on this site for the summer months. Many are no bake recipe, others feature the abundant fruits and vegetables coming from gardens or markets. I trust you will find a few to perk up your summer meals.

      A slice of No Bake Strawberry Pie finished with whipped cream, sits on a white plate with a yellow gingham background.
      (Almost) No Bake Strawberry Pie
      Looking for that spectacular summer pie with practically no work?  Well, this No Bake Strawberry Pie is it! Easy, delectable and made in minutes, this will have you out of the kitchen in no time.
      Check out this recipe
      L'Opera Ice Cream Cake
      L'Opera Ice Cream Cake
      Layers of coffee liqueur soaked almond sponge cake, chocolate ganache, and coffee ice cream are the component parts of this exquisite ice cream cake.  It definitely conjures up thoughts of something special and it won’t disappoint.  While this may look formidable, every part is made ahead and can be done at different times so it is very doable.
      Check out this recipe
      Homemade Pizza Dough
      By far and away this is the most flavorful Homemade Pizza Dough I have ever found. It takes minutes to make in the processor, rises in jiffy quick time and makes, pizza and flatbread crusts as well as an outstanding pocket bread discovered by accident. This is a great start for novices and not to be missed by any baker.
      Check out this recipe
      This photo shows a variety of round pizza crusts and a flatbread crust with a tomato and sauteed veggies in the background.
      A slice of Pina Colada cheesecake with caramelized pineapple sits on a tan plate.
      Easy Pina Colada No Bake Cheesecake
      What if I told you this cool, creamy Easy Pina Colada No Bake Cheesecake can be made with no water bath, sour cream, eggs or condensed milk. Well, it can! It has all the flavors of a pina colada in a smooth, velvety dessert that can quickly be whipped up in the processor in a matter of minutes.
      Check out this recipe
      Caramel Cone Ice Cream ala Häagen-Dazs®
      This Caramel Cone Ice Cream from Häagen-Dazs® instantly became my favorite ice cream.  Caramel ice cream, swirled with caramel and then loaded with chocolate sugar cone bits, is my idea of a summer dessert.
      Check out this recipe
      Caramel Cone Ice Cream
      A slice of Banoffee Pie with coffee whipped cream sits on a white plate.
      Amazing Banoffee Pie Recipe
      My amazing no bake Banoffee PIe is comprised of a vanilla layer crust, a toffee filling, bananas, chocolate mousse sprinkled with Heath bar bits, and coffee whipped cream to top it all off. Easy to make, easier to eat!!
      Check out this recipe
      Dutch Peach Pie
      Fresh summer peaches just beg to be made into this amazing looking Dutch Peach Pie, which is one of the most sensational tasting pies around. While this is not a recipe that you'll make in twenty minutes, it's worth every second it takes.
      Check out this recipe
      A slice of Dutch Peach Pie on a white lace plate with a fork beside it.
      Strawberry salad with basil vinaigrette.
      Strawberry Salad with Basil Vinaigrette
      Spring greens, fresh strawberries, pungent bleu cheese, and chunky pecans make this one of the most flavorful summer salads to be found.  The basil vinaigrette dressing originally came from the Missouri Governor's kitchen.  This is not only an unusual vinaigrette but one of the best if you love basil.
      Check out this recipe
      Chocolate Strawberry Pie
      If you love chocolate covered strawberries (and who doesn't) this Chocolate Strawberry Pie is for you. Gorgeous looking and delicious, it's a snap to make.
      Check out this recipe
      A slice of the Chocolate Strawberry Pie on a white plate.
      Peach Jam sits on a biscuit with a bowl of peaches and a container of jam behind it.
      Peach Amaretto Jam
      This Peach Amaretto Jam is the perfect recipe if you've never made jam before. I've reduced the sugar to allow the peach flavor to come through and added a bit of amaretto to enhance it. This is a refrigerator or freezer jam that doesn't require canning with the large pot of boiling water and all that comes with it. 
      Check out this recipe
      Smoked Turkey Salad
      As much as I love cooking, the summer months of high 90's have me looking for easy options to feed us. This Smoked Turkey Salad, which came from my take out shop, fills that need. A few easy to get ingredients with the star being the smoked turkey are easily assembled into this winner of an entree salad.
      Check out this recipe
      The Smoked Turkey Salad is served in a lettuce cup on a green plate with a fork.
      Buttermilk flatbreds on a colorful plate with a bowl of salsa.
      Buttermilk Flatbreads
      Buttermilk Flatbreads are just the thing when you're looking for a quick, tasty, bread with only 5 basic ingredients doesn't go in the oven, is endlessly changeable and versatile.
      Check out this recipe
      Streusel Topped Blueberry Cobbler
      A biscuit bottom with a juicy blueberry filling topped with a walnut streusel is as good as summer desserts go with a minimum of effort.
      Check out this recipe
      Streusel Topped Blueberry Cobbler
      A bowl of Tuscan Vegetable Stew
      Tuscan Vegetable Stew
      A quick, easy summer laden dish that goes together in a matter of minutes.
      Check out this recipe
      Easy Skillet Turtle Brownies
      These Skillet Turtle Brownies are a fun way to make a decadent turtle brownie. The caramel is made using purchased caramels After the caramel has been made in the skillet, a simple brownie batter is whisked together and poured over the caramel.  No need to break out the mixer.
      Check out this recipe
      Skillet Brownies with vanilla ice cream on white and orange plates.
      A slice of the French Onion Tart showing the tomatoes and olives in the yeasted crust with a sprig of basil.
      French Onion Tart
      With tomatoes practically falling off the vines, this is the perfect time to make aFrench Onion Tart which is a cousin to the French Pissaladiere. When I had the take out shop, this was a huge hit.  Fresh tomatoes, caramelized onions, guyere cheese, calamata olives and basil nestle in an easy yeast dough crust for the best of summers bounty.
      Check out this recipe
      Plum Crisp
      This easy Plum Crisp recipe uses readily available fresh plums and is ideal for beginners.  It’s much like a pie but with no crust.  A heavy dose of vanilla, turns a ho-hum crisp into a delicious dessert.
      Check out this recipe
      Plum Crisp ready to eat with a spoon in a white bowl.
      Lemonade Cake with blueberry sauce on a green plate wiht a yellow napkin.
      Lemonade Cake with Blueberry Sauce
      A tart lemon curd is tempered with whipped cream and a meringue and poured over a vanilla wafer crust. And that blueberry sauce is one you will make over and over to serve with pancakes and waffles as well as over ice cream. As I said, just made for summer!!
      Check out this recipe
      Greek Tomato Salad
      This is super easy salad to put together and while, best the first day, I have been known to eat leftovers a couple of days later. The feta cheese and calamata olives give it a distinct Greek influence and the simple dressing doesn't overtake the other ingredients. It's just made for those abundant tomatoes of summer.
      Check out this recipe
      Greek Tomato Salad with tomatoes, feta, basil, red onion, calamata olives
      Magic Shell
      Magic Shell for Ice Cream
      If you've ever had a soft serve ice cream dipped in chocolate that forms a hard shell, magic shell is it. Two ingredients and 5 minutes makes this perfect addition to ice cream.
      Check out this recipe
      Strawberry Bread
      You don't want to miss this really fast Strawberry Bread which is permeated with fresh, ripe strawberries in every bite. This is a quick bread that needs only a bowl, a whisk, and a few measuring utensils, this goes together in literally minutes.
      Check out this recipe
      Slices of Strawberry Bread on a lattice plate.
      Strawberry Granita sists in a white bowl on a blue and white background with a yellow napkin and spoon .
      Strawberry Balsamic Granita Recipe
      Granita is an Italian specialty and is simply an ice that is scraped with a fork to fluff it up and make it melt in your mouth. Frozen strawberries on a hot summers day. What could be more comforting? How about an easy strawberry granita with a bit of black pepper and balsamic vinegar to add a bit of zip to it.
      Check out this recipe
      No Churn Peach Swirl Ice Cream
      There's a funny story attached to this recipe. One of my sons was visiting and I had this in the freezer. After dinner, he asked what was for dessert, a carry over from childhood when there was always dessert. I told him peach ice cream. His reaction was muted, definitely not excited. He told me peaches weren't his favs but he'd have a little. Well, long story short, a little turned into several more trips to the freezer as he magically turned into a peach lover - or at least a Peach Swirl Ice cream lover.
      Check out this recipe
      No Churn Peach Swirl Ice Cream
      Finished Phot
      Goat Cheese Pesto Tart
      An asiago cheese crust holds roasted red and yellow peppers topped with a basil pesto goat cheese and cream cheese filling. It's simplicity emphasizes the fresh flavors.
      Check out this recipe
      Roasted Peaches with Amaretti Crisp
      This simply couldn't be easier. Peach halves are roasted and filled with a crisp made of amaretti cookies, almonds, a bit of butter and brown sugar for one of the fastest, easiest desserts around.
      Check out this recipe
      Roasted Peaches with Amaretti Crisp
      Mayfair Salad Dressing - Better than Caesar
      Mayfair Salad Dressing has long been a favorite in St.Louis where it was the house salad dressing for the Mafair Hotel.  Think of it as a better version of Caesar dressing.  It is thick and creamy, encasing the ingredients so every bite includes the dressing. Celery thickens it and anchovies are the ingredient most people can't identify but make all the difference in the world.
      Check out this recipe
      This Mayfair Salad Dressing features, lettuce, swiss cheese and ham strips, croutons and Mayfair dressing.
      Quick Hawaiian Sundae
      Easy Hawaiian Sundae
      This Easy Hawaiian Sundae, is a special  endding for a grilled dinner.  Fresh pineapple and a coconut cream chocolate sauce are topped with salted, toasted macadamia nuts which can be found in the snack aisle of my grocery store.
      Check out this recipe
      Caramelized Peach Tart with Brown Sugar Crumble
      This amazing Caramelized Peach Tart combines a creamy pastry cream, caramelized peaches, and a brown sugar crumble made with almond paste in an easy pastry crust.
      Check out this recipe
      Caramelized Peach Tart

      Peanut Butter Ice Cream Pie Recipe

      Modified: May 1, 2026 · Published: Jun 27, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 9 Comments

      A slice of the Peanut Butter Ice Cream Pie sits on a clear plate over a lattice trivet with the pie in the background and a glass of ice tea nearby .

      This Peanut Butter Ice Cream Pie would be perfect anytime but during the summer months it's the perfect end to a BBQ. It's a do ahead, no bake recipe that is easy as can be with a chocolate rice crispy crust that stays pliable even in the freezer.

      A super smooth and easy homemade no churn peanut butter ice cream fills the chocolate crust in this extravaganza.

      A slice of the Peanut Butter Ice Cream Pie sits on a clear plate over a lattice trivet with the pie in the background and a glass of ice tea nearby .

      A crunchy crust is juxtaposed with the smoothest ice cream you'll ever make. And it's all so quick and easy.

      Looking for another fun frozen dessert? Try these Homemade Ice Cream Sandwiches and my Hawaiian Sundae.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Chocolate Rice Krispies crust

      I've added a couple of ingredients to the chocolate crust to make it a better eating experience. By adding a bit of honey to the crust and reducing the chocolate just a little, it's more like rice krispie treats and who doesn't like those? The crust retains its crunchy texture even if completely thawed. Crushed up honey roasted peanuts adds another flavor ingredient.

      When pressing it into a well sprayed pie plate, it's easiest to use nitrite or vinyl gloves. Latex gloves are not recommended as some people are allergic to them and handling the food with them can trigger a reaction. Lacking gloves, use a plastic bag as a glove. The crust is very sticky so you can use a little non-stick spray on them which helps.

      No churn, no machine ice cream

      This is so easy, it's like falling off a log. Truly! The key ingredients are whipped cream and condensed milk. After that, the sky's the limit. In this case we used peanut butter and vanilla extract but that's it. And a smoother, creamier ice cream you won't find. It can get a tad hard in the freezer so it's best to take it out about 10 to 15 minutes to let it soften a bit.

      I have several more on my blog including: No Churn Caramel Brickle Ice Cream, No Churn Peach Swirl Ice Cream, No Churn Nutella Ice Cream, and Double Chocolate No Churn Ice Cream. Other cold and frosty treats are the L'Opera Ice Cream Cake and the very exciting Strawberry Balsamic Granita which is the easiest dessert ever.

      Why you want to make this recipe

      • It's so easy you won't believe it.
      • Everyone will be impressed.
      • A crunchy crust and a velvety ice cream make a great team.
      • It's perfect anytime but especially during the summer heat.
      • Who doesn't like peanut butter and chocolate (Don't tell me, I don't want to know!)

      Recipe Ingredients

      Chocolate Rice Krispie Crust

      Ingredients for the chocolate rice krispie crust are rice crispies, semisweet chocolate, butter, honey roasted peanuts and honey.

      FRONT ROW: Unsalted butter, honey roasted peanuts, honey

      BACK ROW: Rice Krispies, semi-sweet chocolate

      Peanut Butter Ice Cream

      The peanut butter ice cream is made with peanut buttter, heavy cream, condensed milk and vanilla.

      FRONT ROW: Vanilla extract, creamy peanut butter

      BACK ROW: Condensed milk, heavy cream

      The ingredients to finish the pie include honey roasted peanuts, powdered sugar, semi-sweet chocolate and heavy cream.

      FRONT ROW: Honey roasted peanuts, powdered sugar, semisweet chocolate

      BACK ROW: Heavy Cream

      Key Ingredients

      • Any crisped rice cereal can be subbed as long as it's like Rice Krispies
      • The semisweet chocolate I used is Callebaut Callets #811. The callets look like chocolate chips but they are pure chocolate. However, any good chocolate is fine.
      • A basic raw honey is best here.
      • Be sure to use sweetened condensed milk and not evaporated milk which is a different product.
      • A commercial brand of peanut butter butter is better than natural for the smoothest ice cream
      • Heavy cream or 40% cream should be used due to its viscosity.

      Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions.

      Step by Step Instructions

      This collage shows the honey roasted peanuts in a food processor, processed to fine crumbs and added to the rice krispies, the chocolate, butter and honey in a small saucepan and melted together.

      Step 1. Place the peanuts in a processor and process fairly finely. Reserve 2 tablespoons. Step 2. Add them to the bowl of rice krispies. Step 3. Combine the chocolate, butter and honey in a small saucepan. Step 4. Place over low heat to melt the chocolate and butter, stirring frequently. This can also be done in a microwave at half power to prevent the chocolate from burning.

      Step 5. Pour the chocolate over the rice krispie mixture. Step 6. Stir the mixture together until everything is evenly coated. Step 7. Spray the pie pan well with a non-stick baking spray. The mixture is very sticky. It is best to use nitrite or vinyl gloves to press the crust in or simply use a plastic bag as a glove. Spraying them lightly with a non-stick baking release will help keep the crust from sticking to the gloves. Use a table knife to press the sides securely around the rim of the pan. Step 8 Place in the freezer while preparing the ice cream.

      This collage shows making the ice cream.  The condensed milk and peanut butter together, the cream whipped, the first addition of the peanut butter to the whipped cream and the finished ice cream.

      Step 9. Stir together the condensed milk and the peanut butter until smooth. Step 10. Fit the mixer with the whisk attachment. Whip the cream to fairly stiff peaks. Don't get it too stiff or it will be difficult to mix in the thick peanut butter mixture. Step 11. Add half of peanut butter mixture and beat it in on low. Step 12. Add the remaining peanut butter mixture in and beat in on low. If it is still lumpy, raise the speed and beat until smooth.

      The last collage shows the ice cream in the crust, chocolate drizzled over top, cream whipped stiff and a double ruffle of whipped cream around the edge finished with the reserved peanuts.

      Step 13. Pour the ice cream into the crust and freeze. Step 14. Melt the chocolate at half power in the microwave and drizzle it over the top of the frozen pie. Step 15. Whip the cream stiffly. Step 16. Fit a pastry bag with a #4 open star and pipe the cream to around the edge of the pie. Pipe a second ruffle inside of that one. Sprinkle the reserved ground peanuts on top of the cream. Store in the freezer.

      NOTE: To release the pie, leave it at room temperature for about 15 minutes. Go between the pie and the pie plate with a small metal spatula. You probably can't go all the way to the bottom of the pie plate but just loose the top edge. At this point the entire pie should be able to be removed and placed on a cake board by simply placing a cake server under the bottom crust where it can be lifted out. This will make cutting it much easier. Cut into small slices as this is extremely rich.

      Recipe FAQS

      How can this ice cream be made softer?

      Depending upon what the other ingredients are, if the cream is not whipped quite so stiff, that helps when it freezes. However ingredients such as chocolate and peanut butter will make it harder. The other option is to add a couple of tablespoons of alcohol such as vodka, rum or a liqueur to the recipe. The alcohol will prevent it from freezing hard.

      What's the difference between condensed and evaporated milk?

      Both evaporated and condensed milk start with cow's milk and are made by removing about sixty percent of the water to form a concentrated, shelf-safe form of milk. Evaporate milk is unsweetened but condensed milk has about 55% sugar added which acts as a natural preservative. All condensed milk is sweetened.

      Are Ice Cream Pies Hard to Make?

      On the contrary they are one of the easiest desserts to make. A simple graham cracker crust can be filled with a purchased ice cream and voila - ice cream pie!

      Expert Tips

      • Make sure to use sweetened condensed milk.
      • There will be some peanut butter ice cream left over for a treat another day.
      • Serve this in small pieces as it is very rich.
      A slice of the Peanut Butter Ice Cream Pie sits on a clear plate over a lattice trivet with the pie in the background and a glass of ice tea nearby .

      More glorious no bake desserts

      • A slice of Banoffee Pie with coffee whipped cream sits on a white plate.
        Amazing Banoffee Pie Recipe
      • Quick Hawaiian Sundae
        Easy Hawaiian Sundae
      • Strawberry Granita sists in a white bowl on a blue and white background with a yellow napkin and spoon .
        Strawberry Balsamic Granita Recipe
      • Snicker-ama Tart with caramel, peanut butter mousse filled with snicker's pieces and a chocolate ganache
        No Bake Snickers Pie

      A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important. 

      A slice of the Peanut Butter Ice Cream Pie sits on a clear plate over a lattice trivet with the pie in the background and a glass of ice tea nearby .

      Peanut Butter Ice Cream Pie Recipe

      Helen S. Fletcher
      A crispy chocolate rice krispie crust holds a velvety smooth peanut butter ice cream in this easy no bake fantastic dessert that anyone can make.
      5 from 4 votes
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 30 minutes mins
      Total Time 30 minutes mins
      Course Dessert
      Cuisine American
      Servings 12 servings
      Calories 546 kcal

      Equipment

      • 9" Pie plate
      Prevent your screen from going dark

      Ingredients

      Chocolate Rice Krispie Crust

      • ½ cup honey roasted peanuts
      • 5 ounces semisweet chocolate (140 grams)
      • ⅓ cup honey
      • 4 tablespoons unsalted butter (58 grams)
      • 2 ½ cups rice krispies (62 grams)

      Peanut Butter Ice Cream

      • 2 cups heavy cream
      • 1 tablespoon vanilla
      • 1 14 oz can sweetened condensed milk
      • 1 cup creamy peanut butter

      Finishing the Ice Cream Pie

      • 1 cup heavy cream
      • ¼ cup powdered sugar (30 grams)
      • 1 ounce semisweet chocolate (28 grams)
      • ¼ teaspoon vegetable oil
      • 2 tablespoons reserved chopped honey roasted peanutss

      Instructions
       

      Chocolate Rice Krispies Crust

      • Spray a 9" pie pan with non-stick baking release. Set aside.
      • Place the peanuts in the bowl of a food processor and process until finely ground. Set aside 2 tablespoons to use with the finish.
      • Combine the rice krispies and ground peanuts in a medium size bowl.
      • Place the semisweet chocolate, honey and butter in a small saucepan. Heat over low, stirring frequently until smooth and the chocolate and butter are melted. Cool if hot.
      • Pour the chocolate over the rice krispie mix and stir until everything is completely coated.
      • Using a nitrite, vinyl glove or just a plastic bag as a glove press the crust evenly on the bottom and up the sides of the pie pan. Use a table knife to press the crumbs against the side of the plate. Lightly spraying you gloves with a non-stick release will help keep the crust from sticking.
      • Place in the freezer while you make the ice cream.

      Peanut Butter Ice Cream

      • Mix the condensed milk and peanut butter completely.
      • Whip the heavy cream and vanilla to medium peaks. Add half the peanut butter mixture and beat on low to combine.
      • Add the remaining peanut butter and beat on medium to mix. If it is not smooth, raise the speed to high and beat briefly to smooth out. All lumps should be gone.
      • Pour into the chocolate pie crust and freeze until hard.

      Finishing the Ice Cream Pie

      • Whip the cream and powdered sugar to firm peaks.
      • Melt the chocolate and oil together at half power in the microwave. Stir together.
      • Drizzle the top of the frozen pie in several directions with the chocolate.
      • Fit a piping bag with a #4 open star. Pipe a ruffle around the outer edge. Pipe a second ruffle next to the first on the inside. Sprinkle the reserved peanuts over the whipped cream.
      • Store in the freezer.
      • NOTE: To release the pie, leave it at room temperature for about 15 minutes. Go between the pie and the pie plate with a small metal spatula. You probably can't go all the way to the bottom of the pie plate but just loosen the top edge. At this point the entire pie should be able to be removed and placed on a cake board by simply placing a cake server under the bottom crust where it can be lifted out. This will make cutting it much easier. Cut into small slices as this is extremely rich.

      Notes

      Any crisped rice cereal can be subbed as long as it's like Rice Krispies.
      The semisweet chocolate I used is Callebaut Callets #811. The callets look like chocolate chips but they are pure chocolate. However, any good chocolate is fine. 
      A basic raw honey is best here. 
      Be sure to use sweetened condensed milk and not evaporated milk which is a different product. 
      Heavy cream  should be used due to its viscosity.
      There will be some peanut butter ice cream left over for a treat another day.
      Serve this in small pieces as it is very rich.
      Use a commercial brand of peanut butter such as Jif or Peter Pan.  A natural peanut butter isn't recommended. 
       

      Nutrition

      Serving: 12servingsCalories: 546kcalCarbohydrates: 30gProtein: 9gFat: 45gSaturated Fat: 22gPolyunsaturated Fat: 5gMonounsaturated Fat: 15gTrans Fat: 0.2gCholesterol: 78mgSodium: 143mgPotassium: 319mgFiber: 3gSugar: 20gVitamin A: 1387IUVitamin C: 4mgCalcium: 67mgIron: 3mg
      Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

      Cream Biscuits

      Modified: May 12, 2026 · Published: Jun 24, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 2 Comments

      A basket lined wth a yellow napkin is filled with Cream Biscuits.

      Cream Biscuits with only four ingredients are the simplest ever to make. Gone is the trepidation about cutting the butter in and worrying about handling the dough too much, activating the gluten making a tough biscuit as with buttermilk biscuits. One change in the ingredients makes this almost fool proof. High, light, tender and so easy to make, it's a great biscuit recipe for beginners.

      A basket lined wth a yellow napkin is filled with Cream Biscuits.

      And forgetting about having to make them at the moment. To make these even more tempting, they can be made, cut out, frozen and stored in an airtight freezer bag to be baked from the freezer for fresh biscuits anytime. Imagine the surprise of eating warm biscuits anytime with any meal or just because.

      I am also giving you two different baking temperatures and times depending upon if you like your biscuits with a softer top and bottom or a crisper one.

      Biscuits and scones are very close cousins and each are enhanced with jams. Try these with the Strawberry Balsamic Jam that is truly unusual. Several scones come to mind including the luscious Cinnamon Filled Buttermilk Scones, Breakfast Scones featuring hot sausage and cheddar cheese right in the Scone and the sugar topped Scone with Cranberry Strawberry Jam. For more great recipes, check out A Last Minute Easter Roundup.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      No butter in cream biscuits?

      This is the really magical thing about these scones. Heavy whipping cream replaces the butter. How? Think of how butter is made - by churning heavy cream until it makes butter. It's easy to do in a mixer. Just keep beating past the whipped cream stage and it will separate into the whey (the liquid) and the butter.

      It's the fat content that is important and the heavy cream has that in spades! Heavy cream has a higher fat content than regular whipping cream so that's the one you want. Heavy cream has a butterfat content of no less than 36% to 40% which is the best if it can be found. This cream whips and holds as a decoration or to finish a cake with no stabilization. It can also be frozen on a cake and thawed with no change. Regular whipping cream is 30% to 35% and doesn't hold as well so requires some kind of stabilization.

      What makes these special?

      These cream biscuits have only 4 ingredients and have a softer texture inside making them ideal to serve with any meal. And don't forget the dessert - adding a bit of sugar to lightly sweeten them and they are the best for a great strawberry, peach or mixed fruit shortcake.

      Speaking of adding things, add a cup or so of any cheese of your choice. If you're going to use these for sandwiches, add a teaspoon or so of black pepper to give them a bit of a kick.

      Why cake flour?

      This is a key ingredient and I don't suggest substituting all-purpose flour for it. Of all the wheat flours, cake flour has the lowest amount of protein or gluten. As such, it's really, really hard to overwork the dough and it ensures a tender, fluffy biscuit even when made in a mixer.

      Why you'll love this recipe

      • It's super easy.
      • It's super good.
      • It's super variable - use it for any meal or a snack, for a sandwich, for the base of a shortcake.

      Recipe Ingredients

      Ingredients for the Cream Biscuits are cake flour, heavy cream, salt and baking powder.

      CLOCKWISE: Cake flour, heavy cream, baking powder, salt

      Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full list of ingredients & instructions.

      Step by Step Instructions

      The first collage for these Cream biscuits shows the dry ingredients in the bowl of a mixer, the cream added, the dough made and then shaped into a ball.

      Step 1. Place the cake flour, salt and baking powder in the bowl of a mixer. Step 2. Mix for a few seconds to blend then slowly pour the heavy cream into the mixer while it is running. Step 3. Beat just until it comes together. Step 4. Remove from the mixer and, on a lightly floured surface, shape into a smooth ball by kneading a few times.

      This collage shows the dough being pressed about ¾" thick, the cutter cutting out a buiscuits then brushing with cream.

      Step 5. Press the dough out with the palm of your hand. No need to roll out. Step 6. It should be ¾" thick. Step 7. Using a 3" round cutter or a biscuit cutter the desired size, cut the biscuits. When cutting, do not twist the cutter. Cut straight down then remove the cutter for straight biscuits. If you twist the cutter, the biscuits can come out lopsided. Place them on a parchment paper lined baking sheet pan. Re-roll the scraps as necessary Step 8. Just before putting them in the preheated oven brush them with a bit of additional cream. Bake as called for until just golden brown. Do not over bake. These can also be cut out, frozen hard, then stored in a freezer bag. Add a few minutes additional baking time.

      Recipe FAQS

      What is the secret to the best biscuits?

      The butter and liquid should both be cold. The second secret is the dough should be almost almost wet and sticky.

      Where did heavy cream originate?

      According to history, it originated with the Romans in the 9th century. However, the Viennese have been using it lavishly for 300 years are are credited its current popularity.

      Where did biscuits come from?

      There is a fascinating article on how the beginning of our biscuits came from Europe in King Arthur's, Rise the History of America's Biscuits

      Expert Tips

      Cake flour is important to the soft, fluffy outcome of these biscuits.  It has the lowest protein or gluten count of the white wheat flours.

      Heavy cream with  36 to 40 percent butterfat is used here.

      Beat just until the dough comes together.  It does not form a ball.  

      To re-roll  push the dough together or knead it lightly.

      How to store the biscuits

      While the biscuits are best warm out of the oven, they can be kept for several days well covered at room temperature. They also freeze really well. I prefer to freeze them before baking and adding a few minutes to the baking time, but they can also be frozen baked. Thaw and refresh in a 350° oven for about 10 minutes. In any case, serve them warm.

      This photo of the biscuits show one cut open with jam on it on a wicker placemat with a basket of biscuits in the background.

      Check out these easy quick breads

      • Peach Pecan Quick Bread
        Peach Pecan Quick Bread
      • Slices of Date Nut Bread on a plate with walnut halves and dates around it.
        Date Nut Bread
      • A plate of 6 Stuffed Buttermilk Scones on a blue rimmed plate with a multi colored napkin in the background.
        Cinnamon Filled Buttermilk Scones
      • Slices of Traditional Irish Soda bread are on a lace edged white plate with the loaf and butter behind.
        Traditional Irish Soda Bread

      Love this Cream Biscuits?  It would be hugely helpful and so appreciated it if you would take a moment to leave a star rating. Thank you.

      A basket lined wth a yellow napkin is filled with Cream Biscuits.

      Cream Biscuits

      Helen S. Fletcher
      Cream Biscuits with only four ingredients are the simplest ever to make. High, light, tender and so easy to make, it's a great biscuit recipe for beginners.
      No ratings yet
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 20 minutes mins
      Cook Time 18 minutes mins
      Total Time 38 minutes mins
      Course Biscuits
      Cuisine American
      Servings 9 Biscuits
      Calories 326 kcal

      Equipment

      • 2 ¾" Round cutter or whatever size and shape you desire.
      Prevent your screen from going dark

      Ingredients

      • 2 ½ cups cake flour (300 grams)
      • 1 tablespoon baking powder
      • 1 teaspoon salt
      • 1 ½ to 1 ⅔ cups heavy cream
      • 1 to 3 tablespoons granulated sugar for sweetened biscuits

      Instructions
       

      • Two baking times are given depending upon how you like your biscuits. Preheat
      • For a softer top and bottom preheat the oven to 350° F.
      • For a crisper top and bottom, preheat the oven to 450°F.
      • Place the flour, baking powder, salt and sugar if using in a mixing bowl.  Blend together.  
      • With the machine running, pour the cream in a steady stream.  The dough should be somewhat sticky.  If it is not, add more cream.
      • On a lightly floured surface, knead the dough 5 or 6 times to bring together, then pat or roll the dough to about ¾ inch thick.  Cut out desired shape and size. I used a 2 ¾" round cutter.   Re-roll as necessary. Place on a parchment lined sheet and bake as directed below.
      • Cut the out in desired shape and size. I used a 2 ¾" round cutter.   When cutting the biscuits cut straight down and bring it straight up. Do not twist it or the biscuits will be lopsided. Re-roll as necessary. Place on a parchment lined sheet and bake as directed below.
      • If you bake the biscuits at 350 degrees for 15 to 18 minutes they will have a softer top and bottom.
      • If you bake them at 450 degrees for 8 to 10 minutes they will have a browner and crisper top and bottom.
      • The biscuits are best served warm from the oven but will keep for a couple of days under a cover.
      • Unbaked biscuits can be frozen and then stored in a freezer bag to be baked off as needed. They can also be frozen baked and stored in a freezer bag. Thaw at room temperature then refresh in a 350°F oven for 10 to 12 minutes. Serve warm.

      Notes

      There are always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
      As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of unsifted cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
      _______________________________________________
      Cake flour is important to the soft, fluffy outcome of these biscuits.  It has the lowest protein or gluten count of the white wheat flours.
      Heavy cream with  36 to 40 percent butterfat is used here.
      Beat just until the dough comes together.  It does not form a ball.  
      To re-roll  push the dough together or knead it lightly.
       

      Nutrition

      Serving: 9biscuitsCalories: 326kcalCarbohydrates: 29gProtein: 6gFat: 21gSaturated Fat: 13gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 5gCholesterol: 65mgSodium: 416mgPotassium: 90mgFiber: 1gSugar: 3gVitamin A: 843IUVitamin C: 0.3mgCalcium: 122mgIron: 1mg
      Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

      Strawberry Surprise Cupcake Recipe

      Modified: Apr 30, 2026 · Published: Jun 20, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 7 Comments

      An open Strawberry Surprise Cupcake is cut open to display the chocolate inside with more cupcakes in the background.

      Strawberry Surprise Cupcakes encompass strawberries in two ways with the surprise tucked inside. Lucious pureed fresh strawberries in the batter as well as intense freeze-dried strawberries making a creamy strawberry buttercream frosting ensure all the strawberry flavor is delivered.

      An open Strawberry Surprise Cupcake is cut open to display the chocolate inside with more cupcakes   in the background.

      Two thoughts going forward. I didn't add red food coloring to the cupcake batter and I should have. Unfortunately, pureed fresh fruit in baked cakes, cupcakes, etc. comes out with a grayish color. It tastes great but falls a bit short in the looks department.

      The second thought is that I should have made them in the regular size pans not the jumbo. Why? Because then you could get a bite of everything, cake, filling and buttercream at once.

      Several recipes on my blog also feature the Strawberry Buttercream including: Banana Split Cupcakes, Strawberry Cake - A Little Slice of Heaven, Strawberry Brownies

      Another great cupcake recipe to try is my Amazing Boston Cream Cupcakes.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why You'll Love This Recipe

      • These fresh strawberry cupcakes are really easy to make.
      • A bowl, a whisk and a few measuring utensils are all that is need to make the batter.
      • It will travel to picnics. If it's hot outside, I'd freeze them and let them thaw at the picnic.
      • I posted the Strawberry Buttercream earlier and there is nothing that tastes more like fresh strawberries when baking than this buttercream.
      • It's just packed with flavor you don't want to miss. Real strawberries bolstered by freeze dried are the key.

      Recipe Ingredients

      Strawberry Batter

      The ingredients for the Strawberry Batter are:  All-purpose flour, fresh strawberries, vegetable oil, red food coloring, egg, egg yolk, granulated sugar, baking soda, baking powder, and salt.

      FRONT ROW: Baking soda, baking powder, salt

      MIDDLE ROW: Red food coloring, eggs & yolk, granulated sugar

      BACK ROW: All-purpose flour, fresh strawberries, vegetable oil

      Chocolate Ganache

      Ingredients for the chocolate ganache are heavy cream and semisweet chocolate.

      Heavy cream, semisweet chocolate

      Strawberry Buttercream

      Ingredients for the Strawberry Cupcakes batter include powdered sugar, freeze dried strawberries, unsalted butter, milk, almond extract and ref food coloring.

      FRONT ROW: Milk, almond extract

      MIDDLE ROW: Unsalted butter,

      BACK ROW: Powdered sugar, red food coloring and freeze dried strawberries

      Important Ingredients

      • Red food coloring is listed as optional. I feel very important for visual appeal to the batter and the frosting.
      • The berries will give the most taste to the batter.
      • Vegetable oil is listed. I use canola oil.
      • Heavy cream is important to how the ganache sets up.
      • The chocolate I use is Callebaut Callets #811. While they look like chocolate chips, they are pure chocolate in a shape that is easy to melt.
      • Freeze dried strawberries can be found in many stores. Trader Joe's has them at the best price I've found. They are essential to the Strawberry Buttercream.

      Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions.

      Step by Step Instructions

      Strawberry Batter

      The first collage shows batter for the cupcakes being made iwth the fresh strawberries in the processor, processed, in a measuring cup and the oil and sugar mixed.

      Step 1. Place the strawberries in the bowl of a processor. Step 2. Puree until smooth. Step 3. Measure 1 cup and set aside. Step 4. Whisk together the oil sugar and almond extract in a medium size bowl.

      These photos show the egg and yolk added to the oil mixture, then the strawberry puree, all mixed together and the flour added.

      Step 5. Whisk in the whole egg and the yolk to the bowl. Step 6. Add the strawberry puree. Step 7. Whisk all together to mix well. Step 8. Combine the dry ingredients - flour, baking powder, baking soda and salt. Add to the liquid.

      This collage shows the batter being whisked together, red coloring added, six jumbo muffin cups filled and the baked cupcakes.

      Step 9. Whisk together the ingredients. Step 10. Add the food coloring if using. Step 11. Fill the cupcake liners ¾ full (about ⅓ cup). Step 12. Bake as called for. A toothpick in the center will let you know if it is baked long enough as it should come out clean.

      Chocolate Ganache

      The chocolate ganache collage shows the chocolate added to the very hot cream, submerged beneath the cream, being whisked and then finished.

      Step 13. Heat the cream until very, very hot but do not let it boil. Step 13. Add the chocolate. Step 14. Submerge the chocolate under the cream and let it sit for 3 or 4 minutes. Step 15. Start whisking the ganache pulling the cream into the center of the bowl. Step 16. Whisk until all of the cream and chocolate are one. Cool until thick. If it gets too thick, microwave for a few seconds.

      Filling the cupcakes

      The photos show the hole being cut in the top of the cupcake, filled with the ganache, the top put back on and the cupcake topped with the  strawberry buttercream.

      Step 17. After the cupcakes have cooled completely, cut a hole in the top of the unfrosted cupcakes. Using a small knife pointed down and towards the center, go around the center of the cupcake to remove some of the cupcake to make room for the ganache. Be sure to save that piece to replace it. Step 18. Using a piping bag fitted with a plain tip, fill the hole with the ganache pretty much up to the top. Step 19. I forgot to do this but you should cut away the pointed end of the piece you removed. You only need a thin piece of cake to go seal the top. Step 20. After the tops have been replaced, pipe on the strawberry buttercream below.

      Strawberry Buttercream

      This last collage shows the bag of freeze dried strawberries, the berries and powdered sugar processed, being beaten in a mixer and the final buttercream.

      Step 21. A package of the freeze dried strawberries. Be sure to take the desicant out of the package before processing. Step 22. Place the strawberries and powdered sugar in the bowl of a processor. Process until they are a powder. Step 23. Combine the powder, butter and extract in a mixing bowl fit with the paddle attachment. Mix on low to blend. Step 24. Raise the speed to medium or medium high and until very light. Add food coloring at the end. Use an ateco #6 open star tip in a pastry bag to pipe the buttercream on top of the cupcakes.

      Recipe FAQS

      Can fresh fruit be added to cupcakes, muffins or coffee cakes?

      Sure but it's how they are added that is important. Most fruit if pureed will turn the batter an off color, usually grayish which is why food coloring is often recommended. If whole fruit is used, it is best to freeze it (cut it up prior to if necessary) and add it to the batter frozen. That way very little juice escapes to color the batter.

      Can dried strawberries be used for the strawberry buttercream?

      No. They do not have the intensity of taste nor the properW consistency.

      What is the difference between dried strawberries and freeze dried?

      The main differences are how they are dried and what they taste like. Dehydrated strawberries (dried) use a process that dries them in ovens over along period of time removing some, but not all of the moisture. This method produces a leather like fruit with some taste of strawberries but not like fresh.

      Freeze dried strawberries freeze the fruit first and then by placing them in a vacuum chamber the frozen water is turned into a vapor without becoming liquid. The result is crisp, crunchy texture that is airy, light and which tastes even more like fresh strawberries due to the concentration. They are perfect for baking as they don't add liquid to the recipe. The shelf life of these is almost indefinite. Freeze dried food was originally made for astronauts in space.

      Expert Tips

      • The freshest, darkest red strawberries will yield the most taste in the batter.
      • Freeze dried strawberries are key to the strawberry buttercream.
      • 100% chocolate is best for the ganache. I don't recommend chocolate chips.
      • While red food coloring is optional, it sure makes the batter and buttercream look more vibrant and inviting.
      • Don't whisk the chocolate ganache too enthusiastically or you will get air bubbles.
      An open Strawberry Surprise Cupcake is cut open to display the chocolate inside with more cupcakes in the background.

      Other Tasty Fruit Forward Recipes

      • Blueberry poke cake is a 9x13" cake that has holes poked in it and filled with a blueberry compote. It is finished with whipped cream and blueberry filling
        Blueberry Lemon Poke Cake
      • A lone Banana Split Cupcake with its vibrant pink strawberry buttercream and drizzled with chocolate sits on a pink rimmed plate.
        Banana Split Cupcakes
      • Slices of the Strawberry Cake sit on a marble plate with fresh strawberries.
        Strawberry Cake - A Little Slice of Heaven
      • This Mini Pineapple Upside Down Cake features a pineapple slice with a cherry in the middle on top of a yellow cake sitting on a blue and white plate.
        Mini Pineapple Upside Down Cakes

      Love these Strawberry Surprise Cupcakes? It would be hugely helpful and so appreciated it if you would take a moment to leave a star rating. Thank you.

      An open Strawberry Surprise Cupcake is cut open to display the chocolate inside with more cupcakes in the background.

      Strawberry Surprise Cupcakes

      Helen S. Fletcher
      Strawberry Surprise Cupcakes encompass strawberries in two ways with the surprise tucked inside. Lucious fresh strawberries as well as intense freeze dried strawberries ensure tremendous flavor is delivered.
      5 from 2 votes
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 45 minutes mins
      Baking Time 25 minutes mins
      Total Time 1 hour hr 10 minutes mins
      Course Cupcakes
      Cuisine American
      Servings 6 cupcakes
      Calories 858 kcal

      Equipment

      • 6 well jumbo muffin pan or 12 well regular muffin pan.
      Prevent your screen from going dark

      Ingredients

      Strawberry Batter for Cupcakes

      • 8 ounces strawberries (1 cup pureee)
      • 1 cup sugar (200 grams)
      • ½ cup vegetable or canola oil
      • 1 large egg
      • 1 large egg yolk
      • ½ teaspoon baking soda
      • ¼ teaspoon baking powder
      • ¼ teaspoon table salt
      • 1 ½ cups all-purpose flour (210 grams)
      • Red Food coloring as needed, optional

      Chocolate Ganache

      • ⅓ cup heavy cream
      • 3 ounces semisweet chocolate (85 grams)

      Strawberry Buttercream

      • 1.2 ounce package freeze dried strawberries
      • 1 ¾ cup powdered sugar (200 grams)
      • ½ cup unsalted butter, softened (114 grams or 1 stick)
      • ½ teaspoon almond extract
      • red food coloring, optional but suggested

      Instructions
       

      Strawberry Batter for Cupcakes

      • Preheat oven to 325 degrees.  Line a jumbo muffin tin or a regular muffin tin with paper cups. Set aside.
      • Rinse the strawberries and trim the tops off. Place them in a blender or processor and puree. There should be 1 cup of puree.
      • Whisk sugar and oil until combined.  Add egg and yolk, whisking to combine.
      • Add the strawberry puree.  
      • Combine the salt, baking soda, baking powder and flour. Whisk together. Add to the above.  
      • Fill the cups about ¾ full.
      • Bake for aboutr 25 minutes or until a tester comes out clean. Cool before continuing or these may be frozen for later.

      Chocolate Ganache

      • While the cupcakes are cooling, heat the cream until it is very hot but do not boil it.
      • Add the chocolate and submerge it under the cream. Let it sit for 3 or 4 minutes, then whisk it to combine completely.
      • Cool the ganache but don't let it set up. Set aside.

      Strawberry Buttercream

      • Be sure to remove the desicant from the package. Combine the freeze dried strawberries and powdered sugar in the bowl of a processor. Process until they are a pink powder.
      • Place the butter, almond extract and the strawberry powdered sugar in the bowl of a mixer. Mix on low until it comes together, then raise to medium or medium high and beat until it is light and the volume has increased. Add the food coloring if using and mix in, scraping as necssary.

      Assembly

      • After the cupcakes have cooled completely, cut a hole in the top. Using a small knife pointed down and towards the center, go around the center of the cupcake to remove some of the cupcake to make room for the ganache. Be sure to save that piece to replace it.
      • Cut away the pointed end of the piece you removed. You only need a thin piece of cake to go seal the top.
      • Fill the hole with the ganache pretty much up to the top. Place the top over the ganache and press down slightly to make a flat top.
      • Use a #6 open star tip in a pastry bag to pipe the buttercream on top of the cupcakes.
      • The cupcakes can remain at room temperature for a couple of days. They can also be frozen. Freeze them until hard, then wrap individually in foil. Freeze up to 2 months. To thaw, unwrap them and thaw in the refrigerator for best results or at room temperature where they will, most likely, condensate a bit more but be fine.

      Notes

      There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
       As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
      _______________________________________________
      The cupcakes can be frozen after baking or after completion.  Freeze hard, then wrap individually in foil and freeze up to 2 months. To thaw, unwrap them and thaw in the refrigerator for best results or at room temperature where they will, most likely, condensate a bit more but be fine.
      The freshest, darkest red strawberries will yield the most taste in the batter.
      Freeze dried strawberries are key to the strawberry buttercream. 
      100% chocolate is best for the ganache. I don't recommend chocolate chips.
      While red food coloring is optional, it sure makes the batter and buttercream look more vibrant and inviting. 
      Don't whisk the chocolate ganache too enthusiastically or you will get air bubbles.

      Nutrition

      Serving: 6cupcakesCalories: 858kcalCarbohydrates: 108gProtein: 6gFat: 46gSaturated Fat: 19gPolyunsaturated Fat: 12gMonounsaturated Fat: 12gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 118mgSodium: 228mgPotassium: 281mgFiber: 3gSugar: 79gVitamin A: 765IUVitamin C: 92mgCalcium: 53mgIron: 4mg
      Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

      Easy English Muffin Bread

      Modified: Dec 1, 2025 · Published: Jun 17, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 21 Comments

      Slices of English Muffin Bread on a white plate with orange juice, honey and jam with a blue and white napkin in the background.

      Easy English Muffin Bread is possibly the easiest, fastest bread you can make. But the best part is its chewy texture and it tastes just like an English muffin. Slice and toast and you have a breakfast, brunch or an anytime treat.

      Slices of English Muffin Bread on a white plate with orange juice, honey and jam with a blue and white napkin in the background.

      The original recipe comes from Fleischmann's Yeast. I found it in the early 1980's. I recently found it again but they have reduced the flour to make more of a batter than a dough. In any case it's a quick yeast dough and a great way to start if you're a novice.

      Kathy shared, This is an excellent bread! I’m enjoying a slice now."

      One of the best ways to eat the toasted bread is with my Strawberry Balsamic Jam, the Peach Amaretto Jam or the Cranberry Strawberry Jam (use frozen cranberries). All of these require no canning and are very easy to make.

      Here are a few other breakfast/brunch recipes you are sure to enjoy: Homemade Breakfast Stromboli, Bacon and Cheddar Cheese Popovers, Apple Fritters, Best of All Strawberry Muffins, Date Nut Bread, and Breakfast Scones.

      And if you love cheesy bread, try this Brazilian Cheese Bread Recipe.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Are English Muffins from England?

      Nope! According to research they were actually invented by Samuel Bath Thomas around 1880. Thomas was a British immigrant who made them on the griddle as we do today. He may have been influenced by British breakfast breads as well as the English crumpet, a close cousin to the English muffin. One of the more interesting aspects of the name is that in England they are referred to as simply "muffin.

      How to serve English Muffin Bread

      Slice the bread and toast it lightly. It's great just buttered or with jam or honey. Even better, make a breakfast sandwich with bacon or sausage, eggs and cheese. Or use it for the traditional eggs benedict using Canadian bacon, poached eggs and an easy Hollandaise sauce. Simply melt the butter, until it just comes to a boil, put the rest of the ingredients in a food processor, pulse to mix then pour the hot butter down the feed tube slowly while running the processor. Do not use the milky residue at the bottom of the pan. That's it.

      Why you'll love this recipe.

      • It's sooooo easy with just a few pantry ingredients.
      • This yeast bread is perfect for beginner bread makers especially if they are intimidated by yeast.
      • Start to finish it takes about 90 minutes - super fast for a yeast bread.
      • It's not only easy and fast - it tastes like English muffins only easier to make.

      Recipe Ingredients

      Ingredients for the English Muffins include, all-purpose flour, milk, yeast, water, salt, sugar, yeast and cornmeal to dust the pan.

      FRONT ROW: Salt, baking soda, granulated sugar

      MIDDLE ROW: Instant yeast, water

      BACK ROW: Cornmeal (to dust the pan), all-purpose flour, milk

      Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions.

      Step by Step Instructions

      This collage for the English Muffin Bread includes the yeast sprinkled over the milk, then stirred in, the flour on top and the batter completed.

      Step 1. Heat the milk to about 110°F. Place the milk and water in the bowl of a mixer. Sprinkle the yeast over the milk. Step 2. Stir the mixture and let it sit while preparing the remainder of the ingredients. Step 3. Combine the flour, sugar, salt and baking soda and pour over the milk mixture in the mixer. Step 4. Beat the mixture for 2 minutes on medium, scraping down as necessary.

      This collages shows the baking pan prepared with cornmeal, the batter poured in, plastic wrap sprayed with a non-stick bakng release and the batter risen in the pan.

      Step 5. Spray the 8x 4 ¼ inch pan with a non-stick baking release and sprinkle heavily with cornmeal. Step 6. Scrape the batter into the pan and level it. It will be very sticky. The easiest way to level it is to wet your hands, shake them off and press the dough as evenly as possible in the pan. Step 7. Spray a piece of film with non-stick spray and place it over the pan. I don't normally like plastic wrap covering rising dough because I think it can constrict it. However, this dough is sticky and would stick to a tea towel.

      The last collage shows the bread risen, baked in the pan, cooling on a rack and sliced.

      Step 9. Remove the plastic wrap and place in a 400°F oven. Bake as called for. Step 10. Remove it from the oven after baking. Place the pan on a cooling rack. Step 11. Turn the bread out immediately and cool on the rack. Step 12. Slice the bread when cooled.

      Recipe FAQS

      Why does the bread have holes in it?

      These are the same "nooks and crannies" as in English muffins. They hold butter, jam, honey etc.

      Why is baking soda used in the yeast bread?

      The baking soda is what makes the "nooks and crannies" in the bread. Without it, the texture would be closed like most breads.

      Why is mostly milk used instead of water?

      Milk makes a softer bread with longer shelf life.

      Expert Tips

      • Be sure not to overheat the liquid.  
      • I prefer to presoak my instant yeast to make sure it is completely dissolved in the batter.  I have in the past had undissolved yeast so this is just a precaution I take.  
      • Dusting the pan with cornmeal will ensure the loaf comes out easily as this is a sticky batter and not a firm dough. 
      Slices of English Muffin Bread on a white plate with orange juice, honey and jam with a blue and white napkin in the background.

      Other Easy Breads

      • Buttermilk flatbreds on a colorful plate with a bowl of salsa.
        Buttermilk Flatbreads
      • Slices of Traditional Irish Soda bread are on a lace edged white plate with the loaf and butter behind.
        Traditional Irish Soda Bread
      • Two Brioche Rolls are on a plate with a jar of jam.
        Super Fast and Easy Brioche Rolls
      • Breakfast Scone
        Breakfast Scones - An Easy Morning Treat

      Love this English Muffin Bread? It would be hugely helpful and so appreciated it if you would take a moment to leave a star rating. Thank you.

      Slices of English Muffin Bread on a white plate with orange juice, honey and jam with a blue and white napkin in the background.

      Easy English Muffin Bread

      Helen S. Fletcher
      Easy English Muffin Bread is possibly the easiest, fastest bread you can make. But the best part is its chewy texture and it tastes just like an English muffin.
      5 from 4 votes
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 20 minutes mins
      Cook Time 25 minutes mins
      Rising Time 40 minutes mins
      Total Time 1 hour hr 25 minutes mins
      Course Breakfast/brunch
      Cuisine American
      Servings 10 slices
      Calories 140 kcal

      Equipment

      • 8 1 /4 x 4 ¼" loaf pan
      Prevent your screen from going dark

      Ingredients

      • 1 cup milk - 2% or whole
      • ¼ cup water
      • 2 ¼ teaspoons instant yeast
      • 2 ½ cups all-purpose flour (350 grams)
      • 2 teaspoons sugar
      • 1 teaspoon salt
      • ¼ teaspoon baking soda
      • cornmeal to dust pan

      Instructions
       

      • Spray the loaf pan with a non-stick baking release and dust well with cornmeal. Set aside.
      • Combine the milk and water in a microwave container and heat to about 110°F. Pour it into the bowl of mixer.
      • Sprinkle the yeast over the liquid and whisk it in. Set it aside while you gather the rest of the ingredients.
      • Whisk together the flour, sugar, salt and baking soda.
      • Add it to the liquid in the mixing bowl. Beat for 2 minutes, scraping as needed.
      • Pour it into the prepared pan and smooth out. The batter will be very sticky so the best way to smooth it out is to wet your hands, shake off most of the water and then smooth out the batter.
      • Spray a piece of plastic wrap with baking spray and cover the pan lightly. Let it rise for 30 to 40 minutes until it comes slightly over the top of the pan. While I don't usually recommend plastic wrap for covering rising dough, I do here because a towel would stick to the dough.
      • Towards the end of the dough rising, heat the oven to 400°F. Bake for 20 to 30 minutes until the top is browned and it sounds hollow when tapped.
      • After removing from the oven wait for 5 minutes and turn the bread out onto a cooling rack. Slice it when it is completely cooled.
      • The bread should be lightly toasted before serving with jams or honey or just buttered.

      Notes

      There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
       As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
      __________________________________________________
      This is the perfect bread for a beginner.
      With just a few ingredients and a short amount of time, success is quickly achieved.
      Be sure not to overheat the liquid.  
      I prefer to presoak my instant yeast to make sure it is completely dissolved in the batter.  I have in the past had undissolved yeast so this is just a precaution I take.  
      Dusting the pan with cornmeal will ensure the loaf comes out easily as this is a sticky batter and not a firm dough. 

      Nutrition

      Serving: 10slicesCalories: 140kcalCarbohydrates: 27gProtein: 5gFat: 1gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.2gMonounsaturated Fat: 0.3gCholesterol: 3mgSodium: 271mgPotassium: 96mgFiber: 2gSugar: 2gVitamin A: 40IUVitamin C: 0.01mgCalcium: 36mgIron: 2mg
      Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

      Updating Millionaire's Shortbread

      Modified: Sep 17, 2025 · Published: Jun 12, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 4 Comments

      A Millionaires Shortbread bar sits on a white plate with a fork and a tray of bars behind it.

      This Millionaire's Shortbread Tart is a modern take on a classic bar cookie made of shortbread and caramel covered with chocolate. For this bar I've added crunch to the caramel layer and a bit of heat and salt to the chocolate.

      A Millionaires Shortbread bar sits on a white plate with a fork and a tray of bars behind it.

      The origin of this bar has said to come from Australia, Scotland and Great Britian. So take your choice Wherever it came from it is luxurious and rich, hence the name Millionaire's Shortbread which has been accredited to Scotland because of its indulgent layers. Other names such as caramel square, caramel slice or caramel shortbread have been attributed to other countries.

      Here are some other bar cookies you're sure to enjoy: Mexican Chocolate Brownies, Easy Brookie Recipe, Mocha Kahlua Brownies (The frosting is worth the whole recipe), Hazelnut Crunch Bars, and the always popular Pecan Bars. These were a favorite at the bakery. We would cut them in half for petit four trays.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why are Millionaire's Shortbreads so loved?

      Basically each component part can stand on its own but when combined they make an unbelievably opulent cookie. The butter-rich shortbread base melts in your mouth while the homemade caramel is the definition of decadence and the smooth chocolate ganache glides across your tongue. Why have them individually when you can put them together in one outstanding bar.

      What does short mean in cookies and crusts?

      Short refers to the large amount of some kind of fat (think butter or shortening) in these recipes making them very tender. The fat surrounds the gluten strands preventing them from becoming long and stretchy and/or absorbing water which makes the dough chewy such as in bread. A short dough is tender, breaks easily and is crumbly with limited gluten development giving them a melt-in-your-mouth texture. Shortbread cookies and crusts such as Pâte Sucrée  and Pâte Sablée are perfect examples of short crusts.

      The classics shortbread cookie consists of only 3 ingredients - sugar, butter and flour in a 1,2 3 formula. 1 part sugar, two parts butter and 3 parts flour. That it!

      Don't fear making caramel

      There are building blocks or base recipes that are used over and over in baking and pastry. Caramel is one of them. It goes from a sauce to a hard candy in a matter of minutes and is invaluable. Caramel can make a sauce, soft or hard candy, coat a cake or top a tart. For a complete tutorial please see my post Caramel - A Building Block of Pastry.

      As long as a few simple rules are followed, it is so easy to make and any store bought caramel pales next to it. The biggest problem is caramel turning grainy after making. In my recipe I have reduced that possibility by substituting corn syrup for part of the sugar. Corn syrup is an invert sugar which helps control the sugar returning to a granular state after cooling or if stirring at the wrong time.

      The only thing you need for success is a few simple ingredients and a candy thermometer to make sure the temperature is what is needed for whatever recipe is being used.

      Why you'll love this recipe

      • Each part pf this millionaire's shortbread recipe is simple to make.
      • When combined there are few recipes as indulgent and luxurious as this one.
      • The ingredients are probably on hand or easily obtained.
      • My additions to update this can be omitted if you want the classic version.

      Recipe Ingredients

      Shortbread Crust

      Only three ingredients make up the traditional shortbread, all-purpose flour, granulated sugar, unsalted butter.

      FRONT ROW: Unsalted Butter

      BACK ROW: All-purpose flour, granulated sugar

      Caramel

      Caramel ingredients include water,
granulated sugar, heavy cream, corn syrup, rice krispies, butter and vanilla.

      FRONT ROW: Unsalted butter, vanilla extract

      MIDDLE ROW: For this bar I've added a bit crunch to the caramel layer and a bit of heat and salt to the chocolate. Light Corn Syrup, Rice Krispies

      BACK ROW: Water, granulated sugar, heavy cream

      Hot Honey Ganache

      Hot Honey Ganache consists of semisweet chocoalte, heavy cream, honey, unsalted butter and cayenne pepper.

      FRONT ROW: Cayenne peper, unsalted butter and honey

      BACK ROW: Semisweet chocolate, heavy cream

      Important Ingredients

      • Unsalted Butter is key to the taste of the shortbread crust.
      • Heavy Cream is thicker than regular whipping cream.
      • Raw Honey is used but a flavored one can be used.
      • Although the chocolate looks like chocolate chips it is not. My chocolate of choice is Callebaut Calets #811. At the time of writing this post, this was the best buy.

      Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions.

      Step by Step Instructions

      Caramel

      The first collage for Millionaires Shortbread shows the caramel -  sugar and water in saucepan, the saucepan covered, the syrup at a rolling boil and the bronze color of the sugar syrup.

      Step 1. Microwave the cream to hot. Set aside. Combine the water, granulated sugar and corn syrup in a medium size saucepan. Step 2. When the mixture comes to a boil, cover the pan with a tight fitting lid for 3 to 4 minutes to make sure there are no sugar crystals clinging to the side of the pan. Alternatively, (this is my favorite way), Wash the sides of the pan down with a brush dipped in cold water. Step 3. Bring to a rolling boil. Step 4. Boil hard until the syrup changes a bronze color.

      The second caramel collages shows the butter added to the bronze syrup, the cream and vanilla added, the caramel brought to a hard boil again and the finished caramel in a bowl.

      Step 5. Remove pan from the head and add the butter to hot syrup. Stir until it melts. Stir in the hot cream and vanilla. Step 7. Return the caramel to the heat, clip on a thermometer if possible, bring to a rolling boil and take to 228°F. Remove from the heat and let it cool while preparing the rest of the recipe.

      Shortbread Crust

      The steps for the shortbread crust show the butter in the processor along wtiht the flour.  the butter cut into the flour, the sugar added and the dough completed on a work surface.

      Step 9. Cut the cold butter into small pieces and add it to the flour in the bowl of a processor. Step 10. Process until it it indistinguishable. Step 11. Add the sugar to the bowl and process until it comes together. It won't form a ball. Step 12. Pour it out on a work surface and push it together.

      The shortbread is in the pan in pieces, pushed together to form a smooth crust, the crust is docked and baked.

      Step 13. Distribute the dough evenly in the pan. Step 14. Press it into a smooth, even crust. Step 15. Dock the crust with a fork to keep it from rising too much or bubbling up. Step 16. Bake it to a medium brown.

      This collage shows the rice krispies added to the caramel, it being spread over the crust, the cream, butter, honey and cayenne in a small sauce pan for the ganache, and then melted together

      Step 17. Add the rice krispies to the caramel. Step 18. Spread it over the cooled shortbread crust in an even layer. Step 19. Place the heavy cream, unsalted butter, honey and cayenne pepper in a small saucepan. Step 20. Heat it over medium heat to very hot but not boiling.

      The last collage shows the chocolate added to the saucepan, the ganache finished, spread over the caramel and a box of Maldon Salt Flakes.

      Step 21. Off heat, add the dark chocolate to the hot mixture. Stir to mix completely. Be careful if using a whisk as it is easy to incorporate air bubbles. Step 23. Spread the ganache over the caramel layer with a small offset spatula. Let set up at room temperature or chill it in the fridge briefly, Use a small straight metal spatula to release the two uncovered side. Remove the bars from the pan and cut as desired. I cut 6 across and 3 down for a total of 18 bars. Step 24. Sprinkle lightly with flaky sea salt. I used Maldon but any good brand will do.

      Recipe FAQS

      Can shortbread be used with a cheesecake?

      It can. In fact we used a shortbread crust for our cheesecakes at the bakery because it held up better than a graham cracker crust when held in the refrigertor.

      Is caramel hard to make?

      Caramel has an undeserved reputation of being hard to make. There are two ways to make it - the wet method which combines sugar and liquid. The mixture is cooked at a rolling bowl until it is deeply colored. Off heat, butter, cream and vanilla are added. It is brought to a boil again and a thermometer is used to obtain the desired temperature. The dry method simply puts sugar directly in a heavy, wide shallow pan such as cast iron and heating it until it melts and colors which is the tricky part. Then the cream and butter are added. The wet method is more dependable for most people as it is easier to control.

      What is a ganache

      Ganache is a rich mixture of cream and chocolate. The chocolate can be dark, milk or white. It can be used in various thickness such as for a sauce, which is pourable, a thicker version using less cream and more chocolate for filling and frosting cakes as well as the thickest version used for truffles. It is endlessly variable with liqueurs often added for flavor, honey substituted for sweeteners, hot pepper, etc.

      Expert Tips

      • When making the caramel, the color to which the sugar syrup is taken will determine the depth of flavor. The darker the color (within reason), the deeper the taste.
      • The possibility of the caramel becoming grainy is reduced with the addition of corn syrup. The consumer corn syrup in the grocery stores is not the same as the high fructose corn syrup used commercially.
      • As long as attention is paid to the few steps and the caramel is taken to the temperature required for the recipe is is quite easy and so much better than store bought caramel.
      • Bake the shortbread base to a medium brown to ensure flavor and so it is not too crumbly,
      • I have given instructions for making the shortbread in the food processor as well as the mixer.
      Another view of the bar on the white plate with a fork and more bars in the backgrouns.

      Be sure to check out these other bar cookies

      • Ready to eat Spritz bars piled up.
        Spritz Bars - Easier than The Cookies
      • A cookie crust, peanut butter filling and chocolate topping make up the No Bake Peanut Butter Bars
        No Bake Peanut Butter Bars
      • Rugelach Bars are stacked on a decorative plate.
        Quick Easy Versatile Rugelach Bars
      • Spice bars ready to eat surrounded by spices.
        Spice Bars

      Love these Millionaires Shortbreads? It would be hugely helpful and so appreciated it if you would take a moment to leave a star rating. Thank you.

      A Millionaires Shortbread bar sits on a white plate with a fork and a tray of bars behind it.

      Updating Millionaire's Shortbread

      Helen S. Fletcher
      This Millionaire's Shortbread Tart is a modern take on a classic bar cookie made of shortbread and caramel covered with chocolate. For this bar I've added a bit crunch to the caramel layer and a bit of heat and salt to the chocolate.
      No ratings yet
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 1 hour hr
      Cook Time 35 minutes mins
      Total Time 1 hour hr 35 minutes mins
      Course Bars
      Cuisine American
      Servings 16 servings
      Calories 453 kcal

      Equipment

      • 9x9 inch square pan
      Prevent your screen from going dark

      Ingredients

      Caramel

      • 1 cup water
      • ½ cup corn syrup
      • 1 cup granulated sugar (200 grams)
      • 4 tablespoons unsalted butter (60 grams)
      • 1 cup heavy cream
      • 2 teaspoon vanilla
      • 1-1 ½ cups rice krispies

      Shortbread Crust

      • 1 cup unsalted butter (225 grams)
      • 2 ½ cups all-purpose flour (350 grams)
      • ½ cup granulated sugar (100 grams)

      Hot Honey Ganache

      • ¼ cup heavy cream
      • 2 tablespoons honey
      • 1 tablespoon unsalted butter (15 grams)
      • ⅛ - ¼ teaspoon cayenne pepper
      • 5 ounces semisweet chocolate (140 grams)
      • sea salt flakes as desired

      Instructions
       

      Caramel

      • Heat the cream until hot to make it easier to mix with the sugar syrup. Set aside.
      • Place the water, sugar, and corn syrup in a 2 quart saucepan.
      • Stir over heat until the sugar is dissolved completely. Bring to a boil. Cover the pan with a tight fitting lid for 3 minutes. Alternatively, brush the sides down with a pastry brush dipped in cold water.
      • Boil without stirring until the mixture becomes a medium golden color.
      • Off heat, immediately add the butter to the saucepan and stiruntil it is melted.
      • Pour the cream and vanilla in all at once and stir. If some of the cream lumps up, don't worry. The next step will melt it.
      • Clip a thermometer the side of the pan if possible. Otherwise, have one on standby.
      • Return to medium high heat and bring to a hard boil.
      • Cook to 230°F. Cool in the pan.
      • When cool, stir in the rice krispies and set aside.

      Shortbread Crust

        Processor Method

        • For both methods Preheat the oven to 350°F. Line a 9x9" square pan with parchment paper, leaving the excess extend over the sides to make a sling.
        • The butter needs to be refrigerator cold. Cut it into small pieces.
        • Place the flour in the bowl of a processor and pulse a couple of times to mix it.
        • Add the cold, cut up butter and process until the butter is indistinguishable.
        • Add the sugar and process until thoroughly mixed. It need not ball up as long as it is in large pieces and mixed.

        Mixer Method

        • For this method the butter needs to be softened.
        • Cream the butter and sugar in the bowl of a mixer. Beat until light. Add the flour and mix until combined.

        Assembling the Crust for either method

        • Pour the crust into the prepared pan and press it out evenly over the bottom. Bake for 25 to 30 minutes until golden brown. Cool in pan.
        • Pour the caramel over the crust and set aside. If the caramel has set up too much, microwave it briefly just to soften it enough to spread.

        Hot Honey Ganache

        • Combine the cream, honey, butter and cayenne in a small saucepan. Heat until steamy but to not boil. 
        • Remove from the heat and submerge the chocolate under the liquid. Let it sit for about 5 minutes. Stir it gently to combine so air bubbles don't form. Do not whisk as they creates air bubbles. 
        • Pour the ganache over the caramel layer. Let it set up at room temperature or refrigerate for a few minutes to speed things along.
        • After the ganache is set, release the ganache from the pan on the two sides without the parchment paper using a small straight metal spatula. Lift the bars from the pan using the extended parchment paper. Sprinkle lightly with flaked sea salt.
        • Cut as desired. I cut 6 across and 3 down for 18 bars.
        • The bars can be held at room temperature for a day or so after which they should be stored in the fridge or the freezer. If frozen, thaw in the fridge overnight. Bring to room temperature for serving.

        Notes

        There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
         As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
        _______________________________________________
        When making the caramel, the color to which the sugar syrup is taken will determine the depth of flavor. The darker the color (within reason), the deeper the taste.
        The possibility of the caramel becoming grainy is reduced with the addition of corn syrup. The consumer corn syrup in the grocery stores is not the same as the high fructose corn syrup used commercially.
        As long as attention is paid to the few steps and the caramel is taken to the temperature required for the recipe is is quite easy and so much better than store bought caramel.
        Bake the shortbread base to a medium brown to ensure flavor and so it is not too crumbly, 
        I have given instructions for making the shortbread in the food processor as well as the mixer.
         

        Nutrition

        Serving: 18barsCalories: 453kcalCarbohydrates: 55gProtein: 3gFat: 26gSaturated Fat: 16gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 7gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 61mgSodium: 120mgPotassium: 99mgFiber: 1gSugar: 36gVitamin A: 923IUVitamin C: 2mgCalcium: 28mgIron: 2mg
        Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

        Summer Vegetable Tart

        Modified: Jul 25, 2025 · Published: Jun 6, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 2 Comments

        A slice of the Summer Vegetable Tart sits on a white plate with a fork on a green background.

        This Summer Vegetable Tart takes advantage of the abundance of fresh local veggies coming to market. They can be sautéed and when combined with cheese in an easy to make crust, it's perfect for brunch, lunch or dinner. A splash of white balsamic vinegar red pepper flakes add a bit of zip to the crust.

        A slice of the Summer Vegetable Tart sits on a white plate with a fork on a green background.

        It can be endlessly altered by adding whatever you like fresh herbs,  olives, different vegetables or cheese, whatever you like.  I have given measurements but nothing is set in stone.  Just remember that when you saute the vegetables, they will reduce considerably.  So whether you pick them from your garden or buy them at the store, you're sure to add this to your summer rotation.

        Other summer dishes you may enjoy include: Strawberry Salad with Basil Vinaigrette, Goat Cheese Pesto Tart, Southwestern Vegetable Couscous Salad, or the Southwestern Seafood Tart.

        [feast_advanced_jump_to]

        What to Have with a Vegetable Tart

        Salads are a great choice. Try a simple cucumber salad with a sour cream and dill dressing, or a cucumber, feta and tomato salad. A Mediterranean type salad with olives, feta, pepperoncini, a simple crisp lettuce salad or my favorite Greek Tomato Salad.

        Recipe Ingredients

        Parmesan Herb Crust

        Ingredients for the Summer Vegetable Tart include flour, oregano, basil, thyme, salt, cayenne pepper, parmesan cheese butter and water.

        FRONT ROW: Salt, oregano, basil

        MIDDLE ROW: Unsalted butter, thyme, cayenne pepper

        BACK ROW: All-purpose flour, parmesan cheese, water

        Summer Vegetable Tart

        Ingredients for the vegetable filling are red and yellow peppers, zucchini, yellow squash, red onion, canola oil, balsamic vinegar, artichoke quarters, provolone cheese ad crush red pepper flakes.

        FRONT ROW: Canola oil, white balsamic vinegar, red pepper flakes

        MIDDLE ROW: Red onion, artichoke heart quarters, provolone cheese

        BACK ROW: Yellow pepper, red pepper, yellow squash, zucchini

        Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions.

        Step by Step Instructions

        The first collage shows the flour, parmesan cheese and herbs in the processor.

        Step 1. Place the all-purpose flour, parmesan cheese and herbs in the food processor. Step 2. Process until combined. Step 3. Cut the cold butter up into pieces and add to the processor. Step 4. Process until the butter is indistinguishable.

        Step 5. Add the water as called for and process until a ball forms. Step 6. Remove fro the processor and divide into two equal pieces (about 145 grams each). Divide one of the balls into half again (about 70 grams each). Step 7. Remove a little of each piece of dough to make a walnut size piece of dough. Wrap in plastic wrap and set aside. This will be used to patch the crust if it separates. Step 8. Using one of the smaller pieces of dough, roll it to a 15 inch rope.

        The rope of dough is place against the rim of the tart pan, the second rope is placed on the other side, the edges are pinched together and the dough is pressed against the rim.

        Step 9. Place the rope against one side of the rim. Step 10. Roll the second smaller piece of dough into a 15" rope and place it on the opposite side with the ends of the dough overlapping. Step 11. Pinch the ends securely together, Step 12. Press the ropes firmly into the rim.

        This collage shows the dough for the bottom of the crust press out, put in the tart tin, the edges of the dough slightly above the rim , and the finished crust.

        Step 13. Press the remaining large piece of dough into a round to fit the bottom of the pan. I didn't need any flour, but lightly flour the board if you do. Step 14. Place it into the pan. Step 15. Lightly moisten the bottom of the crust that has been pressed into the rim of the pan. Press the bottom crust up to edge and firmly into the crust on the rim. Seal the edges well. Step 16. Press the crust slightly over the rim of the tart pan.

        This collage shows foil being place in the tart pan, beans poured into the foil, the crust separated, and the patch in place

        Step 17. Spray a large piece of foil with a non-stick baking release. Make sure the foil extends over the edge of the pan. Setep 18. Fill the foil to the very top of the pan with dry beans or pie weights. Bake as called for. Step 19. The crust may crack along the joint. Step 20. If the crust separates as soon as it comes from the oven, pinch off a small piece of the reserved walnut size piece of dough and roll it into a thin mini-rope Place it over the separation.

        The separation has been filled in, the raw vegetables cut up,  then sauted and cheese placed in the bottom of the baked shell.

        Step 21. Smooth out the patch to seal the separation. Be careful the pan and crust are hot. This is best done with a small pointed offset spatula or small metal spatula. Step 22. Cut the peppers into strips, then cross 3 or 4 times, but the zucchini and yellow squash into rounds, then quarter them, cut the onions into half moons. Step 23. Place in a large skillet and been sauté until somewhat softened or grill or roast. Add the remaining ingredients. Cool. Step 24. Place 5 or 6 pieces of provolone on the bottom of the crust.

        The last collage shows the prepared veggies in the crust, the cheese on the top, the tart placed on a half sheet pan and then baked.

        Step 25. Place the prepared filling into the crust. Step 26. Cover it with 5 or 6 slices of cheese. Step 27. Place the tart on a half sheet pan covered with parchment paper. Step 28. Bake as called for. Cool slightly, remove from the pan and the metal bottom, slice and serve.

        Recipe FAQS

        What is the difference between a tart and a pie?

        The main difference is the size of the shape. Pie pans are deeper and generally have smooth as well as slightly slanted sides. The crusts are generally of the American type which are thicker and pies most often have a pastry or crumb top. Tarts on the other hand are shorter, the sides are straight and generally rippled. Tart pans also are made in two pieces, the rim and the bottom making them very easy to release and serve. They usually don't have a topping and the crusts are butter crusts and thinner. Either one can be sweet or savory.

        How do you blind bake a crust?

        Blind baking refers to baking an empty pastry crust. After the crust is placed in the pan, a large piece of foil is sprayed with a non-stick baking release. The foil is placed, sprayed side down on the crust and filled with weights such as beans or pie weights. It is important to fill the foil to the top of the tart.

        Why is a crust blind baked?

        A crust is blind baked either partially or completely because it either won't be baked additionally for a long enough time to completely bake it or because the filling won't be baked at all. This applies to either a pie or tart crust.

        Expert Tips

        • Add just enough water to make the dough workable. Too much water will make the crust shrink excessively.
        • The crust should be completely baked but not over baked. The longer it bakes the more the chances of the crust cracking.
        • Don't worry if the crust cracks, it can be easily patched.
        • The crust can be made ahead of time and frozen unbaked. Bake from the freezer.
        • Sauté the veggies until tender crisp. This can be done the day ahead if helpful.
        • Bake the tart just to heat the veggies and melt the cheese.
        • If the tart is hot but the cheese is pale, place it under the broiler but watch it so it doesn't burn. Just brown it enough to give it some color.
        This picture of the Summer Vegetable Tart shows a slice of the tart on a white daisy plate on a green background with a fork.

        Other Tasty Summer Dishes

        • This Mayfair Salad Dressing features, lettuce, swiss cheese and ham strips, croutons and Mayfair dressing.
          Mayfair Salad Dressing - Better than Caesar
        • A slice of the Asparagus Tart on a white plate with a colorful napkin and fork in the background.
          Asparagus Tart
        • The Smoked Turkey Salad is served in a lettuce cup on a green plate with a fork.
          Smoked Turkey Salad
        • Black bean salad with black beans, corn, red peppers, green chiles in a vinagrette.
          Simple Black Bean Salad

        Love this Summer Vegetable Tart? It would be hugely helpful and so appreciated it if you would take a moment to leave a star rating. Thank you.

        A slice of the Summer Vegetable Tart sits on a white plate with a fork on a green background.

        Summer Vegetable Tart

        Helen S. Fletcher
        Summer Veggies in a herb cheese crust is perfect for brunch,lunch, or dinner and comes together quickly. A splash of white balsamic vinegar and hot pepper flakes makes this very now.
        No ratings yet
        Print Recipe Pin Recipe
        Prep Time 45 minutes mins
        Cook Time 20 minutes mins
        Total Time 1 hour hr 5 minutes mins
        Course Entree tart
        Cuisine American
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 314 kcal

        Equipment

        • 9" tart pan with removable bottom
        Prevent your screen from going dark

        Ingredients

        Tart Crust

        • 1 cup all-purpose flour (140 grams)
        • ¾ teaspoon dried oregano
        • ¾ teaspoon dried basil
        • ½ teaspoon dried thyme
        • ½ teaspoon salt
        • ⅛ to ¼ teaspoon cayenne pepper
        • ⅓ cup parmesan cheese, grated (35 grams)
        • 5 tablespoons unsalted butter, refrigerator cold (75 grams)
        • 3 to 4 tablepoons ice cold water

        Summer Vegetable Filling

        • 1 medium red pepper
        • 1 medium yellow pepper
        • 1 small zucchini
        • 1 small yellow squash
        • ½ medium red onion
        • 2 tablespoons canola or olive oil
        • 2 tablespoons white balsamic vinegar
        • 1 7.5 oz. jar marinated artichoke quarters
        • 10 to 12 slices provolone cheese (about ½ pound)
        • crushed red pepper flakes

        Instructions
         

        Tart Crust - please see the Step by Step photos.

        • Preheat the oven to 400°F. Set aside a 9" tart pan with a removable bottom
        • Combine the flour, herbs, salt, cayenne pepper, and cheese in the bowl of a processor.  Pulse several times to mix.
        • Add the cold butter and process until it is indistinguishable.
        • Starting with the lesser amount of water, pour it in a circle over the dry ingredients and process until a ball forms.  If it doesn't form a ball or seems a bit dry, add the remainder of the water 1 teaspoon at a time.
        • Divide the pastry in half (about 145 grams each).  Divide one half into half again (about 70 grams each).  Take a little pastry from each of the three pieces to form a ball about the size of a walnut.  Wrap in film and set aside.
        • Roll one of the smaller pieces of dough into a 15” rope.  Place it along the edge of half of the pan.  Repeat with the second piece.  The edges should overlap.  Wet the edge of both pieces of overlapping dough and press together.  Repeat on the other side.  Press the crust into the side of the pan.
        • Shape the larger piece of pastry into a ball, flatten it and press it into the bottom of the pan.  Moisten the edge of dough on the side of the pan. Join the seam between the edge of the pan and the bottom. Press well together.  Prick the bottom of the crust well with a fork. Freeze until hard.
        • Spray a large piece of foil on the shiny side in the middle.  Place that on top of the pastry in the pan.  Press the edges of the foil into the edges of the crust.  Fill the foil with pie weights or beans to the top.
        • Place on a parchment lined baking sheet.  Bake for 20 minutes.  Remove the foil and beans and bake for another 5 to 8 minutes until completely baked. Do not over bake.
        • If the shell has cracked during baking, immediately upon removing from the oven use the reserved dough to patch the cracks with an offset spatula.  Cool the shell.

        Summer Vegetable Filling

        • Cut the peppers into strips, cross cut into thirds.  Cut the squash into ¼ to ⅓ inch rounds.  Cut the rounds in half or 4ths.  Cut the onion in half. Cut the half into ¼ inch slices and then in half to make half moons.
        • Heat the oil in a large sauté pan.  Place the vegetables in the pan and sauté until somewhat caramelized, stirring often.
        • Toward the end of the cooking, add the balsamic vinegar and saute until the liquid is evaporated.  Cool. Add the drained artichokes.
        • Place 5 or 6 slices of provolone on the bottom of the crust or half the grated cheese.  Place the filling over the cheese, top with 5 or 6 more slices of provolone.
        • Preheat the oven to 400°F.  Place the tart on a parchment lined baking sheet and bake for 15 to 20 minutes if room temperature.  The cheese may benefit from being placed under the broiler for a few minutes.  Be careful not to place the tart so close to the hot coils that the paper catches on fire. Watch it carefully, it can go from browned to burned in a hurry.
        • Cool for a few minutes, release the tart and cut into 4 to 6 pieces.
        • Refrigerate any leftovers.

        Notes

        Notes on Recipe Cards
        There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
         As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
        __________________________________________________
        Add just enough water to make the dough workable. Too much water will make the crust shrink excessively.
        The crust should be completely baked but not over baked. The longer it bakes the more the chances of the crust cracking.
        Don't worry if the crust cracks, it can be easily patched.
        The crust can be made ahead of time and frozen unbaked. Bake from the freezer. 
        Sauté the veggies until tender crisp. This can be done the day ahead if helpful.
        Bake the tart just to heat the veggies and melt the cheese. 
        If the tart is hot but the cheese is pale, place it under the broiler but watch it so it doesn't burn. Just brown it enough to give it some color. 
         

        Nutrition

        Serving: 6servingsCalories: 314kcalCarbohydrates: 22gProtein: 13gFat: 20gSaturated Fat: 12gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 5gTrans Fat: 0.4gCholesterol: 51mgSodium: 519mgPotassium: 282mgFiber: 2gSugar: 2gVitamin A: 1379IUVitamin C: 69mgCalcium: 331mgIron: 2mg
        Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

        Caramel Hot Fudge Brownie Sundae

        Modified: May 1, 2026 · Published: Jun 3, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 3 Comments

        This Caramel Hot Fudge Sundae sits in a clear glass with a container with a scoop of vanilla ice cream with a cherry on top.

        You're going to love the ease of making this Caramel Hot Fudge Brownie Sundae. A couple of bowls, a whisk, and some measuring cups are all you need for this all in one treat. Instead of making brownies, this recipe is based on Hershey’s Hot Fudge Pudding Cake.  There is no need to make a brownie and a hot fudge sauce. This is an all in one recipe with very little prep time.

        This Caramel Hot Fudge Sundae sits in a clear glass with a container with a scoop of vanilla ice cream with a cherry on top.

        I have made chocolate pudding cakes before and they always lacked the punch my Lemon Raspberry Pudding cake has. But this recipe is more of a warm brownie sundae with hot fudge sauce on the bottom and it is outstanding. By adding a few caramels it takes it over the top.

        Other ice cream confections make the Easy Hawaiian Sundae, Magic Shell for Ice Cream, Meringue Shells to hold your ice cream, and the zippy Hot, Hot Fudge Sauce.

        If you are looking for other indulgent individual desserts, try this Peach Mousse with Cinnamon Crunch, Homemade Ice Cream Sandwiches, and my Hawaiian Sundae.

        [feast_advanced_jump_to]

        What is a Pudding Cake?

        Pudding cakes are like magic.  A batter is put in the bottom of a pie plate or bowl and then a topping is added and the whole thing is covered in really hot water.  For the caramel version, 4 Werther’s Soft Caramels are placed on top of each cup before really hot water is poured over everything.

        Then the magic happens. After baking for a few minutes  the fudgy brownie comes to the top and the hot fudge and caramel sauce are on the bottom.   It should be served warm with a big scoop of vanilla ice cream.  The ice cream will melt just enough to make a second sauce.  

        While I made these ice cream sundaes in individual containers it can also be made in a 9” pie pan.  I give you both options.

        Why You'll Want to Make this Recipe

        • It's full of chocolatey, caramel goodness.
        • There's no mixer or processor just a couple of bowls, whisk and utensils.
        • It can be made in individual containers or in a 9" pie plate.
        • It's super easy and quick to make.
        • It's super delicious with very little work.
        • Any typical brownie sundae toppings can be added.

        Recipe Ingredients

        Ingredients for for the Brownie Sundae include sugar, flour, cocoa, baking soda, salt,milk, butter, vanilla, brown suar, hot water, caramels vanilla ice cream and marachino cherries.

        FRONT ROW: Marachino cherries, salt, baking soda, natural cocoa powder, vanilla, unsalted butter.

        MIDDLE ROW: Granulated sugar, brown sugar, all-purpose flour, milk

        BACK ROW: Vanilla ice cream, Werther's caramels, water.

        Important Ingredients

        Werther's Carmels are as close as I can get to my homemade and best ever Caramel. Brach's just isn't the same.

        Natural cocoa such as Hershey's or Ghiradelli 100% Cocoa is what you need for this recipe. Do not use Dutch cocoa.

        Baking Soda is the leavening agent when using natural cocoa.

        If the caramels are difficult to unwrap, place them in the freezer for a few minutes and the papers will come off very easily.

        Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions.

        Step by Step Instructions

        Unwrap all of the caramels first. Set aside.

        The first collage for the Brownie Sundae shows the cocoa, flour, baking soda and salt in a bowl, then whisked together, another bowl with brown sugar, cocoa and granulated sugar.

        Step 1. In a medium size bowl, combine ¾ cup granulated sugar, all-purpose flour, baking soda, salt and ¼ cup natural cocoa. Step 2. Whisk them together and set aside. This is bowl #1. Step 3. In a second bowl, combine the brown sugar, the remaining ¾ cup granulated sugar and remaining ¼ cup natural cocoa Whisk together, making sure to get all the lumps of cocoa incorporated, and set aside. This is bowl 2.

        This collage shows the butter and milk in a 1 cup measure, then melted with the vanilla, the batter made and added to the cups.

        Step 5. Put the unsalted butter and milk in a 1 cup measuring cup or small bowl. Microwave just to melt the butter. Step 6. Stir in the vanilla and let cool to lukewarm. Step 7. When cooled, pour it over the bowl #1 with the flour in it. Whisk until smooth. Step 8. Place ⅓ cup of batter in each of 7 cups. I used a regular measuring cup for this.

        The last collages shows the second dry mixture placed over t he batter,  4 caramels on top of that, hot water poured over the caramels and the baked brownie,

        Step 9. Add 2 tablespoons +1 teaspoon of the mixture in bowl #2 over the batter in each cup. If there is any leftover, just add it to the cups. Step 10. Place 4 caramels in each cup. Step 11. Pour 2 tablespoons + 1 teaspoon boiling water into each cup. Step 12. Bake as called for. The brownie should be set around the edges but the middle should still be wiggly. Cool slightly before serving. Top with scoops of ice cream and a cherry. Store leftovers in the fridge.

        Make Ahead Notes

        • Prep all the ingredients as called for and unwrap all the caramels. Cover bowl #2. Refrigerate the caramels if it's warm to keep them from sticking together.
        • Assemble the cups through Step 8. Refrigerate, covered, up to 2 days ahead.
        • Shortly before serving add the 2 tablespoons +1 teaspoon of the #2 bowl to each of the cups.
        • Add the caramels.
        • Pour the 2 tablespoons +1 teaspoon hot water over and bake as called for.
        • Cool for about 20 minutes, top with ice cream and a cherry and serve.

        Recipe FAQS

        Who invented the brownie?

        Bertha Palmer of the The Palmer House Hotel in Chicago is credited with inventing the brownie in 1893. She wanted a portable, chocolate cake-like dessert for boxed lunches at the World's Columbian Exposition. It is not known who invented the brownie sundae.

        What does they typical brownie sundae consist of?

        While it can vary, the basics are a chocolate brownie, vanilla ice cream, chocolate or hot fudge sauce with a cherry on top. Variations include chopped nuts on top, caramel sauce along with chocolate or instead of the chocolate.

        Why is the Chocolate Pudding Cake version easier?

        Because it is all made together, the brownie and the fudge sauce. No need to make them separately.

        Expert Tips

        • Make sure the water is boiling when you pour it over the top of the ingredients.
        • Making it in individual bowls ensures that everyone gets the same amount of the fudge on the bottom.
        • Chill the caramels briefly if they are warm and difficult to unwrap.
        • Hershey's regular cocoa or Ghiradelli 100% cocoa are both natural cocoas.
        • Dark brown sugar provides the most taste.
        Bowl of the hot fudge sundae with vanilla ice cream and a cherry sundae with a napkin and other cups in the background.

        Great Summer Desserts

        • Cocoa Brownies
          Cocoa Brownies in No Time-or a Little Time!
        • Oreo "Tacos" with Strawberry Salsa
          Oreo "Tacos" with Strawberry Salsa
        • Caramel Cone Ice Cream
          Caramel Cone Ice Cream ala Häagen-Dazs®
        • Finished photo
          S'Mores Revisited

        Love these Caramel Hot Fudge Brownie Sundaes? It would be hugely helpful and so appreciated it if you would take a moment to leave a star rating. Thank you.

        This Caramel Hot Fudge Sundae sits in a clear glass with a container with a scoop of vanilla ice cream with a cherry on top.

        Caramel Hot Fudge Brownie Sundae

        Helen S. Fletcher
        You're going to love the ease of making this Caramel Hot Fudge Brownie Sundae. A couple of bowls, a whisk, and some measuring cups are all you need for this all in one treat.
        No ratings yet
        Print Recipe Pin Recipe
        Prep Time 30 minutes mins
        Cook Time 25 minutes mins
        Total Time 55 minutes mins
        Course Dessert, Ice Cream
        Cuisine American
        Servings 7 servings
        Calories 362 kcal

        Equipment

        • 7 1 cup ramekins or pudding cups
        • OR
        • 1 9" ple plate
        Prevent your screen from going dark

        Ingredients

        • 1 ¼ cup granulated sugar, divided (250 grams)
        • 1 cup all-purpose flour (140 grams)
        • ½ cup natural cocoa* divided (50 grams)
        • ¼ teaspoon baking soda
        • ¼ teaspoon salt
        • ½ cup brown sugar (100 grams)
        • ½ cup milk, whole or 2%
        • 5 tablespoons butter (75 grams)
        • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract
        • 1 ¼ cup boiling water
        • 28 Werther's soft caramels
        • vanilla ice cream
        • Marachino cherries
        • Hershey's or Ghiradelli 100% cocoa are natural

        Instructions
         

        • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Place seven 1 cup ramekins or pudding cups on a rimmed half sheet baking pan. Set aside.
        • Unwrap all of the caramels and set aside. If they are warm and difficult to unwrap, place in the freezer for about 5 minutes. Set aside in a single layer.
        • Whisk together in a medium bowl half the granulated sugar ¾ cup (150 grams), the flour, half the cocoa, ¼ cup cocoa (25 grams), baking soda and salt. Set aside.
        • In a second bowl, whisk together the remaining ½ cup granulated sugar (100 grams), the remaining ¼ cup cocoa (25 grams) and the brown sugar. Make sure the cocoa is mixed in completely. Set aside.
        • In a 1 cup container, microwave the milk and butter just to melt the butter. Cool to lukewarm if necessary. Add the vanilla and whisk together. Pour this over the flour mixture and whisk to make a smooth batter.
        • Place ⅓ cup batter in each ramekin. Alternatively, spread all of the batter into a 9" pie pan.
        • Spoon 2 tablespoons +1 teaspoon of the brown sugar mixture into each other the ramekins over the batter. Alternatively add all of the brown sugar mixture of the batter in the 9" pie pan. Shake the ramekins or pie plate to even out the dry ingredients.
        • Place 4 caramels in each ramekin or all of them in the 9" pie plate on top of the dry ingredients.
        • Boil 1 ¼ cup water. Spoon 2 tablespoons +1 teaspoon over the caramels in the ramekins or all of it over in the pie pan.
        • Bake for about 17 to 19 minutes just until the brownie is set around the edges but the middle is still wiggly. Do not over bake or there won't be any fudge sauce. The 9" pie pan may take longer.
        • Cool about 20 or 30 minutes. Serve with a scoop of vanilla ice cream and top with a cherry.

        Notes

        There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
         As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
        _______________________________________________
        Make Ahead Notes
        1. Prep all the ingredients as called for and unwrap all the caramels. Cover bowl #2. Refrigerate the caramels if it's warm to keep them from sticking together. 
        2. Assemble the cups through Step 8. Refrigerate, covered, up to 2 days ahead.
        3.  Shortly before serving add the 2 tablespoons +1 teaspoon of the #2 bowl to each of the cups.
        4. Add the caramels.
        5.  Pour the 2 tablespoons +1 teaspoon hot water over and bake as called for.
        6.  Cool for about 20 minutes, top with ice cream and a cherry and serve. 
        Notes:
        Make sure the water is boiling when you pour it over the top of the ingredients.
        Making it in ramekins ensures that everyone gets the same amount of the fudge on the bottom. 
        Chill the caramels briefly if they are warm and difficult to unwrap. 
        Hershey's regular cocoa or Ghiradelli 100% cocoa are both natural cocoas.
        Dark brown sugar provides the most taste.
         

        Nutrition

        Serving: 7gCalories: 362kcalCarbohydrates: 69gProtein: 4gFat: 10gSaturated Fat: 6gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.4gMonounsaturated Fat: 3gTrans Fat: 0.3gCholesterol: 24mgSodium: 200mgPotassium: 164mgFiber: 3gSugar: 52gVitamin A: 278IUCalcium: 48mgIron: 2mg
        Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

        Strawberry Buttercream Frosting

        Modified: Jul 25, 2025 · Published: May 31, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 4 Comments

        Cupcakes are finished with a swirl of Strawberry Buttercream.

        This is the Strawberry Buttercream you have always wanted and searched for. Fresh strawberries or strawberry jams are no comparison to this intensely flavored buttercream. This truly is a party in your mouth.  A full pound of fresh strawberries are reduced to 1.2 ounces when freeze dried. Added to a simple buttercream the result is just short of amazing for a recipe that takes only 30 minutes. I am not shy in saying this is the best strawberry buttercream you will ever make.

        Cupcakes are finished with a swirl of Strawberry Buttercream.

        The recipe calls for freeze-dried strawberries - the kind the astronauts took with them. A 1.2 ounce package equals a full pound of strawberries without the juice making them ideal to introduce into a strawberry frosting. 

        A couple of other recipes frosting recipes using freeze dried strawberries include my Strawberry Cake - A Little Slice of Heaven of Heaven, Banana Split Cupcakes and the elegant Chocolate Strawberry Ruffle Cake.

        [feast_advanced_jump_to]

        What are Freeze-Dried Strawberries

        This photo is a package of freeze dried strawberries with the strawberries flowing out.

        These are the most intensely flavored strawberries you can eat. All of the moisture has been taken out of them leaving only the shape, color and pure strawberry taste. Originally developed for astronauts all manner of food was freeze dried. One of my favorites was the ice cream. Today there are all kinds of freeze dried fruits. Trader Joe's has the best price I can find a large variety of flavors. The only one I don't like is the red raspberry. When those are ground, the seeds seem to stay very noticeable.

        A single 1.2 ounce package makes about ½ cup when processed to strawberry powder in the processor which makes for a real strawberry flavor. The strong strawberry flavor keeps the sweetness of the buttercream in check.

        Why You'll Love this Recipe

        • First off, it's quick and easy to make.
        • It truly does taste like strawberries. Strawberry jam or even fresh strawberries can't give buttercream that burst of flavor everyone loves but freeze dried strawberries can.
        • It can be used anywhere frosting is needed. The Strawberry Cake is a perfect example.
        • With the exception of the freeze dried strawberries, this frosting uses simple ingredients which you probably have on hand.

        Variations

        Any flavor of freeze dried fruit can be substituted.....blueberry, raspberry, mango - you get the idea.

        Recipe Ingredients

        Ingredients for the Strawberry Buttercream Frosting include powdered sugar, red food coloring, freeze dried strawberries, butter, milk, and almond extract.

        BACK ROW: Powdered sugar, red food coloring, freeze dried strawberries

        MIDDLE ROW: Unsalted butter

        FRONT ROW: Milk, almond extract

        Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredient list and instructions.

        Step by Step Instructions

        A package of freeze dried strawberries.

        Step 1. Make sure to get freeze dried strawberries and not dried strawberries. Remove the little package of desiccant that may be in the package to keep the strawberries dry.

        Half of the strawberries and powdered sugar are placed in the processor bowl.

        Step 2. Place half of the strawberries and half of the powdered sugar in the bowl of a processor.

        The strawberries and powdered sugar are processed to a fine powder.

        Step 3. Process the powdered sugar and strawberries to a fine powder. Remove and repeat with the second half.

        All of the ingredients have been placed in the bowl of a mixer.

        Step 4. Place all of the ingredients in the bowl of a mixer fitted with the paddle attachment. Whip on low to bring together

        The strawberry buttercream is completely mixed.

        Step 5. Beat the ingredients on medium until they are light and fluffy. Scrape often. Add the red food coloring at the end to the desired red or pink color.

        Recipe FAQs

        Why use freeze dried strawberries?

        Because they introduce the most strawberry flavor to the buttercream. Because they have no juice, just pure flavor, the flavor of the buttercream is more intense.

        What kind of buttercream is this?

        This is an American buttercream which means it is based on powdered sugar and butter as its main ingredients. American buttercream is especially good if the cupcake or cake has to hold up in a warm environment.

        Can granulated sugar be used instead of powdered sugar?

        No. The final product will be grainy. Powdered sugar is just that, powdered. It is made to dissolve completely with no trace of graininess.

        Expert Tips

        • The temperature of the butter is important when making and American buttercream like this. The ideal temperature of the butter to cream or mix well with the powdered sugar is 72° to 75°F. This ensure that the powdered sugar will dissolve easily and completely.
        • If the butter is warmer than this, extra powdered sugar will have to be added to make it stiff enough. This will dilute the flavor.
        • If the buttercream becomes airy while sitting, just stir it vigorously to smooth it out again.
        • Add a little red food coloring at the end of beating to get an attractive bright red. Without the coloring, the buttercream is rather insipid looking.
        Strawberry Buttercream tops cupcakes with fest ribbons around,

        Other Buttercream Recipes You'll Love

        • Classic Birthday Cake Perfections
          Classic Birthday Cake Perfection
        • Slices of the Strawberry Cake sit on a marble plate with fresh strawberries.
          Strawberry Cake - A Little Slice of Heaven
        • A sour cream cake laden with poppyseeds filled with orange curd and finished white chocolate buttercream
          Poppyseed Cake with Orange Curd and White Chocolate Buttercream
        • Malted Milk Frosted Cupcakes
          Malted Milk Frosted Cupcakes

        If you tried this Strawberry Buttercream recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating in the recipe card and let me know how it goes in the 📝 comments below. I love hearing from you!

        Cupcakes are finished with a swirl of Strawberry Buttercream.

        Strawberry Buttercream Frosting

        Helen S. Fletcher
        This is the Strawberry Buttercream you have always wanted. This truly is a party in your mouth.  A full pound of strawberries are added to a simple buttercream and the result is just short of amazing for a recipe that takes only 30 minutes.
        5 from 2 votes
        Print Recipe Pin Recipe
        Prep Time 30 minutes mins
        Total Time 30 minutes mins
        Course Dessert
        Cuisine American
        Servings 10 cupcakes
        Calories 85 kcal
        Prevent your screen from going dark

        Ingredients

        • 1.2 oz pkg freeze dried strawberries (2 cups unprocessed)
        • 1 ¾ cup powdered sugar (235 grams or 7 ounces)
        • ½ cup unsalted butter, softened (114 grams or 4 ounces)
        • ½ teaspoon almond extract
        • 3 to 4 tablespoons milk
        • Red Food coloring as needed, optional

        Instructions
         

        • Remove the package of desiccant in the package if there is one. Place half the strawberries and half the powdered sugar in the bowl of a food processor or blender. Stop several times and stir the ingredients being sure to get to the bottom.
        • Process until completely powdered. Remove from the bowl and repeat with the second half of the strawberries and powdered sugar.
        • Place the ingredients including 3 tablespoons of milk in the bowl of mixer. Mix on low to combine then raise the speed to medium and beat until light and fluffy, scraping often.
        • Add the red food coloring if using to the desired color. Use immediately.

        Notes

        • The buttercream can be used anywhere frosting is needed. The Strawberry Cake is a perfect example.
        • The temperature of the butter is important when making and American buttercream like this. The ideal temperature of the butter to cream or mix well with the powdered sugar is 72° to 75°F. This ensure that the powdered sugar will dissolve easily and completely.
        • If the butter is warmer than this, extra powdered sugar will have to be added to make it stiff enough. This will dilute the flavor.
        • If the buttercream becomes airy while sitting, just stir it vigorously to smooth it out again.
        • Add a little red food coloring at the end of beating to get an attractive bright red. Without the coloring, the buttercream is rather insipid looking
        • With the exception of the freeze dried strawberries, this frosting uses everyday ingredients which you probably have on hand.
         

        Nutrition

        Serving: 10servingsCalories: 85kcalCarbohydrates: 21gProtein: 0.1gFat: 0.1gSaturated Fat: 0.1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.01gMonounsaturated Fat: 0.03gCholesterol: 1mgSodium: 2mgPotassium: 7mgSugar: 21gVitamin A: 7IUCalcium: 6mgIron: 0.01mg
        Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

        My Best Banana Cake Recipe

        Modified: May 8, 2026 · Published: May 27, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · Leave a Comment

        A slice of My Best Banana Cake Recipe sits on a white plate which is on a yellow gingham plate on a blue background.

        My Best Banana Cake Recipe forgoes the heavier banana cakes laden with substantial buttercreams in favor of a light cake filled with caramelized pineapple and topped with fresh strawberries and whipped cream. It's the perfect summer dessert. I have included a Make Ahead Schedule for your convenience.

        A slice of My Best Banana Cake Recipe sits on a white plate which is on a yellow gingham plate on a blue background.

        This cake is unusual in that it uses both butter and oil, each one serving its own purpose. Although lighter in texture it is loaded with banana flavor.

        A few other great lighter cakes include: A Quick and Easy Summer Tea Cake, Strawberry Cake - A Little Slice of Heaven, Lemonade Cake with Blueberry Sauce, Mini Pineapple Upside Down Cakes, and one of the quickest, easiest cakes ever the Orange Almond Teacake. You might also want to take a look at my Two Step Banana Bread. It is truly the easiest and the best.

        Looking for a delicious fruity cupcake recipe? Try this Strawberry Surprise Cupcake Recipe.

        This post is a complete redo of the Fruit Basket Banana Cake originally posted on May 11, 2015. It features a completely updated recipe, new photography and ton of new information to ensure your success.

        [feast_advanced_jump_to]

        Why Butter and Oil?

        While most cakes use one or the other there are definite benefits to using both. The butter is used for flavor while the oil is used to keep the cake moist.

        When I had my bakery, I thought I had to use butter cakes since we were upscale. The problem was they dry out faster than those made with oil, such as chiffon cakes. However, combining the two makes a perfectly balanced cake - flavor and longevity.

        The Caramelized Pineapple Filling

        This recipe starts with fresh pineapple. I was astounded by the high price of fresh pineapple chunks at my grocery store and quickly switched to a whole fresh pineapple which was about a third of the price. I'm going to show you how easy it is to clean and cut the pineapple in just a few minutes.

        It is important use underripe but not totally green pineapple because they don't exude as much juice as ripe pineapple when caramelized. Larger chunks are also recommended so they don't break down when caramelizing.

        One of my favorite ingredients, Golden Syrup, is used to ensure the syrup doesn't granulate and become grainy as it can if just sugar is used. There are several brands of Golden Syrup but Lyle's Golden Syrup is the one I prefer and is easily found on Amazon or in International Food Stores.

        This photo is of Lyle's Golden syrup.

        The Uncooked Fresh Strawberry Topping

        Have you ever marveled at the glossy fresh fruit toppings in stores and wondered how they did it? It's Instant Clearjel! Using Instant Clearjel is an easy way to thicken fresh fruit without cooking it which I believe changes its taste. I'm not a fan of using strawberry jello as it uses artificial flavors which tastes - well, artificial. While I usually go to Amazon for a lot of products, I find their offerings for this product confusing and use Nuts.com to purchase this. Whatever you decide to use make sure it is INSTANT.

        There are two types of Clearjel so it is important to use the correct one. Clearjel has to be cooked to gel and breaks down if frozen and thawed, Instant clear gel does not. It can be frozen and thawed with the item kept in tact. I have used it in several recipes including: Almost No Bake Strawberry Pie which has detailed information on the two types of gel, and the naturally gluten free Lemon Strawberry Cake.

        My Mistake When Finishing the Cake

        I made a rookie mistake and should have known better. I often freeze the layers of a cake before assembling to make it easier or when made ahead. However, they should be thawed to where only the edges remain a bit firm. Consequently, after the cake was assembled the top layer of whipped cream poked out because the cake settled when thawed. So the lesson here is don't do this.

        Also, if making this the day before, the strawberries can bleed into the whipped cream. So finish the cake with whipped cream. Then make the strawberries as called for, putting them in a bowl and covering with plastic wrap. Add to the middle of the cake shortly before serving if you don't want them to bleed.

        The finished cake with the divide between the layers poking out.

        What Makes this Banana Cake Special

        • It's such a great combination of flavors - bananas, strawberries and pineapple - it's hard to go wrong.
        • The cake is light and very easy to make
        • The cake layers can be made ahead of time and frozen for several months, well wrapped,
        • Caramelized Pineapple can be made a week ahead and refrigerated - ready when you are.
        • The fresh strawberry topping requires no cooking.
        • Assembly is simple.

        Make Ahead Schedule

        • Make the caramelized pineapple up to a week ahead and refrigerate. It must be made at least the day before using.
        • Bake the banana cake layers, freeze them, wrap the well in foil and freeze for up to two months.
        • Make the strawberry filling the day ahead of assembling the cake. Place it in a covered container and refrigerate.
        • Whip the cream and refrigerate up to a day ahead of assembling.
        • Fill the cake with the caramelized pineapple.
        • Frost and edge it with the whipped cream. Refrigerate overnight.
        • Several hours before serving, fill the center with the strawberries.

        Recipe Ingredients

        Caramelized Pineapple Filling

        The ingredients for the Caramelized Pineapple are golden syrup, unsalted butter, brown sugar and fresh pineapple.

        Ingredients are: Golden Syrup , unsalted butter, brown sugar, and fresh pineapple.

        Banana Cake

        Ingredients for My Best Banana Cake Recipe are cake flour,  baking soda, baking powder, salt, banana puree, buttermilk, oil, unsalted butter, granulated sugar and eggs.

        Ingredients for the Banana Cake include: Cake Flour, granulated sugar, ripe bananas, oil, buttermilk, eggs, unsalted butter, baking powder, salt and baking powder.

        Filling and Finishing the Banana Cake

        Ingredients to finish the cake are caramelized pineapple, cut strawberries, heavy cream, granulated sugar, powdered sugar, clearjel, water, red food coloring,

        The ingredients are: Caramelized pineapple, fresh strawberries, heavy cream, granulated sugar, powdered sugar, water, red food coloring (optional) and clearjel.

        Key Ingredients

        • Under ripe fresh pineapple is a necessity for this recipe. Canned pineapple does not have the same flavor.
        • Golden Syrup is recommended for the flavor it adds but corn syrup may be substituted.
        • Dark Brown Sugar has a deeper flavor than light brown sugar.
        • Cake Flour is used for its low protein count yielding a lighter cake than using all-purpose flour. I don't recommend using all-purpose flour.
        • Make sure the bananas are ripe. The skins should be speckled or marked heavily with brown. However, do not let the skins become black.
        • The oil can be canola oil or vegetable oil. Olive oil is too strong. The oil helps keep the cake moist.
        • Buttermilk adds moisture to the cake batter.
        • Instant Clearjel is used to set the strawberries and give them a glossy finish as well as sweeten them.
        • Gel Food Coloring works better than the liquid food coloring. It doesn't add additional liquid into the recipe,
        • Heavy Cream is used for its ability to hold its shape without stabilizing it in any way - no cornstarch, no gelatin, no anything. This is how we did it at the bakery.

        Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients and instructions.

        Step by Step Instructions

        Preparing the Fresh Pineapple

        This collages shows the  top and bottom cut from the pineapple, the outside cut away, the pineapple cut from the core and a pile of pineapple chunks.

        Step 1. Cut the top and bottom off the pineapple. Step 2. Stand the cleaned pineapple up. Step 3. Slice the pineapple away from the core one side at a time leaving only the hard core standing. Step 4. Cut the pineapple spears into large chunks. Set aside. This step can be done the day before if desired.

        Caramelized Pineapple

        This should be made at least a day before using so it can set up in the fridge.

        Caramelizing the pineapple shows the butter, golden syrup and brown sugar in a skillet, brought to a boil, the pineapple added to the pan and  the caramelized pineapple finished.

        Step 1. Add the butter, brown sugar and golden syrup to a skillet large enough to hold all the pineapple in one layer. Step 2. Bring the mixture to a rolling boil. Step 3. Add the pineapple chunks. Step 4. Cook over medium heat until most the liquid of the syrup and juice from the pineapple are reduced to a thick syrup that stays apart briefly when separated with a spoon. Cool, place in a container and refrigerate until cold or up to a week ahead of time.

        Banana Cake

        The layers can be made ahead, wrapped and frozen for several months.

        The first collage for My Best Banana Cake Recipe shows the dry ingredients whisked together, The bananas, buttermilk and oil in the processor bowl, processed and the sugar and butter for the cake in a mixing bowl.

        Step 1. Whisk together the dry ingredients - cake flour, baking powder, baking soda and salt. Set aside. Step 2. Break up the bananas and place in the food processor along with the buttermilk and oil. Step 3. Process until liquid. Step 4. Place the softened butter and sugar in the bowl of a mixer.

        This collage shows the butter and sugar creamed, the first egg added, and mixed in, and the first addition of flour.

        STep 5. Cream the butter and sugar together until light and fluffy Scrape the bowl as necessary. Step 6. Add the first egg. Step 7. Beat to combine. Add the second egg and beat to mix well. It may curdle at this point but it will be corrected in the next step. See my post, How to Avoid Curdled Batters for more information. Step 8. Add the first of 3 additions of the flour mixture.

        This collages shows the first addition of flour beaten in, the first addition of banana puree added and beaten in and the second addition of flour added.

        Step 9. Mix the flour in. Step 10. Add the first of two additions of the banana puree. Step 11. Blend completely. Add the second addition of flour and mix completely. Step 12. Add the last addition of banana puree on medium.

        The last addition of flour is added, the batter is finished, then divided between the two pans and the baked layer is being released from the pan.

        Step 13. Add the last addition of the flour mixture. Step 14. Mix on medium, scraping as necessary to make a smooth batter. Step 15. Divide between the two pans. Bake as called for. Cool. Step 16. To release the cake from the pan, place a small, flexible metal spatula between the cake and the edge of the pan. Go around the edge of the pan keeping the spatula pressed against the side of the pan and not the cake. For more information on releasing the cake please see my post, How to Bake a Flat Cake Layer or Cake Pan Prep.

        This collage s hows the sugar and clearjel in a bowl, the water added and then mixed with the cut strawberries mixed with the clearjel.

        Step 17. Combine the sugar and the clear jel in a large bowl. Step 18. Add the ¼ cup water. Step 19. Stir everything together. Step 20. Add the strawberries, stirring to coat them. Set aside.

        This collage shows the powdered sugar and heavy cream in a mixing bowl, the cream whipped, the caramelized pineapple on the cake then spread out evenly.

        Step 21. Combine the powdered sugar and heavy cream in mixing bowl. Step 22. Whip to stiff peaks. Step 23. Place about ¾ of the caramelized pineapple on top of the bottom layer. Step 24. Spread it to within 1" of the edges of the cake.

        The last collage shows the top layer of the cake put on, the cake covered in whipped cream, the bottom being channeled and the top edged with whipped cream and the strawberries in the middle.

        Step 25. Place the top layer on the cake. Step 26. Cover the top and sides with about ⅔ of the whipped cream. Step 27. Make a channel at the bottom of the cake by carefully removing the cream at the bottom of the cake leaving about ⅛" exposed. This will make it much easier to move the cake without damaging the finish. Use 2 pancake turners to lift the cake and place it the serving plate. Step 28. Fit a pastry bag with a #5 open star tip. Fill the bag with the remaining cream. Pipe a wreath around the edge of the cake. Fill the center with the strawberries. Refrigerate for at least 4 hours or overnight.

        Recipe FAQS

        What is the cup measurement of a banana?

        1 large bananas will make ½ cup. The key is large. If in doubt buy 2.

        Why do bananas have to be really ripe for banana cake or bread?

        Really ripe bananas will puree smoothly and have more flavor than under ripened bananas. If the bananas are really firm, they don't puree as smoothly or impart the same level of flavor.

        How can you tell when a banana is ready for baking?

        The skin of the banana will be heavily speckled with brown or will be turning brown. It should not be black just really brown. At that point it's at its maximum flavor.

        Expert Tips

        • Have the cake pans prepped before starting so the batter doesn't sit. This banana cake is leavened with baking powder which is double acting. It starts rising as soon as liquid is added to it which is why looks airy if it the unbaked batter sits too long. The second part acts with heat.
        • Follow my instructions for preparing the cake pans. They will bake into flat layers. See my post on baking flat layers and cake pan prep.
        • Do not bake the layers until they pull away from the pan. At that point they are over baked. Remove them when a cake tester comes out cleanly or the center springs back when lightly touched.
        • Fresh pineapple is key to the caramelized pineapple.
        • Cake flour is necessary for the lightest cake layers.
        • If using red food coloring, use gel colors. They won't add liquid to the recipe.
        • Channneling the bottom of a cake refers to removing the frosting at the bottom of the cake on the cake board. It is easily done by slipping a metal spatula under the cream on the cake board and angling it very slightly to remove the cream leaving an open are in which to insert two pancake turners to move the cake. The channel should be unnoticeable.
        A slice of My Best Banana Cake Recipe sits on a white plate which is on a yellow gingham plate on a blue background.

        More Fruit Oriented Recipes

        • Caramelized Peach Tart
          Caramelized Peach Tart with Brown Sugar Crumble
        • A slice of the Chocolate Strawberry Pie on a white plate.
          Chocolate Strawberry Pie
        • White Wine Amaretto Peach Sauce
          White Wine Amaretto Peach Sauce
        • A potion of Strawberry Rhubarb Crisp sits in a white bowl on a hellow gingham plate with the white pan in the backgournd.
          Simple Strawberry Rhubarb Crisp

        Love this My Best Banana Cake Recipe? It would be hugely helpful and so appreciated it if you would take a moment to leave a star rating. Thank you.

        A slice of My Best Banana Cake Recipe sits on a white plate which is on a yellow gingham plate on a blue background.

        My Best Banana Cake Recipe

        Helen S. Fletcher
        My Best Banana Cake Recipe forgoes the heavier banana cakes laden with substantial buttercreams in favor of a light cake filled with caramelized pineapple and topped with fresh strawberries and whipped cream. It's the perfect summer cake.
        No ratings yet
        Print Recipe Pin Recipe
        Prep Time 2 hours hrs 30 minutes mins
        Cook Time 20 minutes mins
        Total Time 2 hours hrs 50 minutes mins
        Course Cake
        Cuisine American
        Servings 12 servings
        Calories 677 kcal

        Equipment

        • 2 9 x 2" Round Cake pans
        Prevent your screen from going dark

        Ingredients

        Caramelized Pineapple - This should be made at least the day ahead and refrigerated.

        • 1 large pineapple (4 to 4 ½ cups)
        • 3 tablespoons unsalted butter (45 grams)
        • ⅓ cup golden syrup or corn syrup
        • 3 tablespoons brown sugar, packed (25 grams)

        Banana Cake Recipe

        • 1 ½ cups +2 tablespoon cake flour (200 grams)
        • 1 teaspoon baking soda
        • ¾ teaspoon bakng powder
        • ¼ teaspoon salt
        • 1 cup banana puree (from 2 large bananas)
        • ⅓ cup buttermilk
        • ⅓ cup oil
        • ½ cup butter, softened (114 grams or 1 stick)
        • 1 ¼ cups granulated sugar (250 grams)
        • 2 large eggs

        Strawberry Topping and Whipped Cream

        • 1 quart strawberries
        • ½ cup granulated sugar (100 grams)
        • 4 teaspoons instant clearjel
        • ¼ cup water
        • red food coloring, optional
        • 1 cup powdered sugar, divided (130 grams)
        • 2 cups heavy cream

        Assembly

        • Banana cake layers
        • Caramelized pineapple
        • Strawberry Topping
        • Whipped Cream

        Instructions
         

        Caramelized Pineapple - this must be made at least a day ahead of using. See the photos visual instructions.

        • If cleaning a fresh pineapple, cut the top and bottom off. Stand the pineapple up and cut the sides off to expose the flesh. Cut the flesh off on each side. Cut the pineapple into 1 to 1 /2 inch chunks.
        • Place the butter, golden syrup or corn syrup and the brown sugar in a skillet large enough to hold the pineapple in a single layer. Bring the ingredients to a hard boil.
        • Add the pineapple, stirring to coat all of it. Over medium heat, continue to boil the liquid ingredients to reduce them until they just coat the fruit. A spoon run through the pineapple should show the mixture separated and not coming together. Monitor the heat so the pineapple and sauce do not burn.
        • Remove the caramelized pineapple from the pan and cool it. Place in the bowl of a processor and pulse 3 or 4 times. Leave little pieces of pineapple in it. Refrigerate for up to a week. There should be about 2 cups of the filling.

        Banana Cake

        • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Line two 9x2 inch round cake pans with parchment paper. Spray only the middle of the paper. Do not spray the sides. See my post on How to Bake a Flat Cake Layer.
        • Combine the flour, baking soda, baking powder and salt. Whisk to combine. Set aside.
        • Break the bananas up in and place them in the bowl of a processor. Add the buttermilk and oil. Process until smooth, scraping down if necessary.
        • Cream the butter and sugar in the bowl of a mixer until light and fluffy. Add the eggs, one at a time. The mixture may curdle. It will be corrected in the next step.
        • Alternate adding the flour and banana puree starting and ending with the flour. I generally use 3 additions of flour and 2 of banana puree. Mix on low completely each time.
        • Divide among the two cake pans (about 475 grams per pan).
        • Bake for 20 to 22 minutes until a cake tester comes out clean or the center springs back when lightly touched. The layers should not come away from the sides. They are over baked at that point. The layers will be an even medium golden brown.
        • Cool completely in the pans. To release, use a small, flexible, metal spatula and go around the edge of the pan. Keep the spatula to the edge of the pan and not the cake. Turn the layers out.
        • If using immediately, it will be easier to assemble if they are frozen just until firm. Do not let them freeze hard. If using from frozen, thaw jut until firm. Do not use frozen hard.

        Strawberry Topping and Whipped Cream

        • Wash the strawberries and dry them. Cut them into medium size pieces. Set aside.
        • Whisk the Instant Clearjel and sugar together in a large bowl. Whisk in the water. If using the food coloring, add it now. Add the strawberries and stir to coat all of them. Set aside or place in a covered container and refrigerate for use the next day.
        • Combine the whipped cream and powdered sugar in the bowl of a mixer. Beat until stiff peaks just start to form.

        Assembly - See the photos above for additional help.

        • Place about ¾ of the caramelized filling in the middle of the bottom layer of cake. Spread to about 1" in from the edge of the cake layer. The filling should be about ¾" thick. If it is thinner use the remainder of the filling.
        • Place the remaining layer of cake on top. Frost the sides and top of the cake with about ⅔ of the whipped cream. Make sure to force the whipped cream into the open are of the side of the cake.
        • Make a channel on the bottom of the cake by placing a metal spatula on the bottom of the cake board and removing about ⅛" of the whipped cream. This will make it easier to transfer the cake to a serving plate.
        • Fit a piping bag with a #5 open star tip and pipe a wreath around the edge of the cake extending in about 2" in from the edge. Refrigerate overnight or at least 4 to 6 hours before serving.
        • About 2 hours before serving, fill the center of the cake with the strawberry topping. This will keep it from bleeding into the whipped cream. Refrigerate until serving.
        • This cake cuts beautifully when cold. Cut with a serrated knife run under really hot water and dried immediately. Rinse the knife and reheat for each cut.
        • Leftover cake will hold in the refrigerator for a day or two. To keep the cake from drying out, fold a piece of plastic wrap a little higher than the cake and long enough to be pressed against the cut edges.

        Notes

        There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
        As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
        ____________________________________________
        Have the cake pans prepped before starting so the batter doesn't sit. This banana cake is leavened with baking powder which is double acting. It starts rising as soon as liquid is added to it which is why looks airy if it the unbaked batter sits too long. The second part acts with heat.
        Follow my instructions for preparing the cake pans. They will bake into flat layers. See my post on baking flat layers and cake pan prep.
        Do not bake the layers until they separate from the pan. At that point they are over baked. Remove them when a cake tester comes out cleanly or the center springs back when lightly touched. 
        Fresh pineapple is key to the caramelized pineapple.
        Cake flour is necessary for the lightest cake layers. 
        If using red food coloring, use gel colors. They won't add liquid to the recipe. 
        Channneling the bottom of a cake refers to removing the frosting at the bottom of the cake on the cake board. It is easily done by slipping a metal spatula under the cream on the cake board and angling it very slightly to remove the cream leaving an open are in which to insert two pancake turners to move the cake. The channel should be unnoticeable.
        Make Ahead Schedule
        1. Make the caramelized pineapple up to a week ahead and refrigerate. It must be made at least the day before using.
        2. Bake the banana cake layers, freeze them, wrap the well in foil and freeze for up to two months.
        3. Make the strawberry filling the day ahead of assembling the cake. Place it in a covered container and refrigerate. 
        4. Whip the cream and refrigerate up to a day ahead of assembling.
        5. Fill the cake with the caramelized pineapple.
        6. Frost and edge it with the whipped cream. Refrigerate overnight.
        7. Several hours before serving, fill the center with the strawberries. 
         

        Nutrition

        Serving: 12servingsCalories: 677kcalCarbohydrates: 92gProtein: 7gFat: 33gSaturated Fat: 17gPolyunsaturated Fat: 3gMonounsaturated Fat: 11gTrans Fat: 0.5gCholesterol: 104mgSodium: 234mgPotassium: 344mgFiber: 4gSugar: 64gVitamin A: 1025IUVitamin C: 84mgCalcium: 72mgIron: 1mg
        Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

        Crumbed Baked Cake Donuts Recipe

        Modified: May 5, 2026 · Published: May 19, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · Leave a Comment

        Five Crumbed Baked Donuts sit on a bright yellow and olive green plate covered in powdered sugar.

        This Crumbed Baked Cake Donuts Recipe is not only super easy but fantastically good! It requires no special ingredients, is made in minutes and bakes even faster. They are light as a feather and freeze for later. Anyone can make these they are so simple. This is a recipe you don't want to pass up.

        Five Crumbed Baked Donuts sit on a bright yellow and olive green plate covered in powdered sugar.

        Even better, if you don't have a donut pan a regular size muffin pan will do. I'll show you both.

        Interested in more donuts? Check out these recipes: Pumpkin Cake Donut Recipe, Irresistible French Beignets, Apple Cake Doughnuts, Apple Fritters with Speculaas Spice, Carrot Cake Baked Doughnuts, or the best yeasted doughnuts around Fresh as a Daisy Doughnuts.

        [feast_advanced_jump_to]

        So Where are the Crumbs?

        When I initially made these, I put crumbs on the top and on the bottom of the pans. The crumbs on the top just mostly sank into the batter as it rose. But the ones on the bottom were perfect. So they are technically on the bottom but when turned out cover the doughnut perfectly, just in a packed form.

        What if I Don't Have a Donut Pan?

        No worries. A regular size muffin pan works well and the holes are optional.

        What if I Don't Have?

        • If you don't have or don't like nutmeg, substitute cinnamon, cardamom would be super, grate a lemon or orange into the batter, add mini chocolate chips or finely cut nuts. The variations are endless.
        • No cake flour? Sub all-purpose.
        • Out of dark brown sugar? Use light brown sugar.
        • No unsalted butter? Use salted butter and cut the salt in the recipes in half.

        Recipe Ingredients

        Crumb Ingredients

        Ingredients for the crumbs include butter, granulated sugar, dark brown sugar, salt, and cake flour

        Front Row: Salt, granulated sugar,

        MIDDLE ROW: Unsalted butter

        BACK ROW: Cake flour, brown sugar

        Donut Batter

        Ingredients for the Crumbed Baked Donuts Recipe include all-purpose flour, baking powder baking soda, nutmeg, salt, butter, granulated sugar, brown sugar, egg, vanilla and milk.

        FRONT ROW: Baking soda, cinnamon, baking powder, vanilla, salt

        MIDDLE ROW: Unsalted butter, egg, granulated sugar

        BACK ROW: All-purpose flour, brown sugar, milk

        Be sure to see the recipe card below for the ingredients and instructions.

        Step by Step Instructions

        The Crumbs

        The first collage shows the butter, granulated sugar, and brown sugar in a mixing bowl, creamed, scraped down and the crumbs made.

        Step 1. Place the butter, granulated and brown sugars in the bowl of a mixer. Step 2. Cream them together until light. Step 3. Because this is a small mixture, scrape often to keep it at the bottom of the bowl and not stuck to the side of the bowl. Step 4. Add the flour and mix only until crumbs form. Do not over mix and make a paste. Store the crumbs in the fridge while making the batter.

        The second collages shows the butter and sugars creamed, curdled in the mixing bowl. flour added and the batter coming together.

        Step 5. Place the butter, granulated and brown sugars together. Scrape down into the bottom of the bowl. Step 6. Add the egg and vanilla. Beat, scraping down as necessary. It will most like curdle. See my post on How to Avoid Curdled Cake Batter for detailed information. Step 7. Add the first of three additions of flour. Step 8. Beat it on low to bring it together.

        The third collages shows the first addition of millk to the batter, the finished batter, the donut pan and the pan filled with batter.

        Step 9. Add the first of two additions of milk. Mix it in on low then continue with the second addition of flour, the last of the milk and the last of the flour. Scrape down as necessary. Step 10. The finished batter will be very thick. At this point fit a pastry bag with a ¾" plain tip. Step 11. Spray a donut pan or a regular size muffin pan well with a non-stick baking release. Step 12. Divide the crumbs (about 2 tablespoons each) between 9 wells of either pan. Press them firmly down.

        The last collage shows the crumbs in a muffin pan, the donut pan with the batter piped over the crumbs, the baked donuts and then powdered sugared.

        Step 13. Press about 2 tablespoons of crumbs firmly into the bottom of a regular size muffin tin if not using the donut pan. Step 14. Fill the piping bag with the batter and pipe it to cover the crumbs in whichever pan you are using. Step 15. Bake as directed. Cool completely. To easily release them, go around the outer edge with a small, flexible spatula, to lift them out. Place them on a rack over parchment paper. Step 16. Sprinkle heavily with powdered sugar.

        Recipe FAQS

        What's the difference between a regular and cake donut?

        The regular donut is made with yeast and fried and the cake donut uses baking powder or baking soda and is baked. Cake donuts are often smaller also.

        How Long Does it Take to Make Cake donuts?

        They are quite fast since they don't have to rise a couple of times as do yeasted donuts. They can normally be made and baked in about 30 to 40 minutes.

        Which is better - the cake or the regular donut?

        The cake donut is better since it is baked. The yeasted donuts are generally fried which adds many more calories.

        Expert Tips

        • When adding the flour to the crumb mixture do not over-mix or it will form a paste. Stop as soon as the crumbs form.
        • Whole or 2% milk can be used in the batter.
        • Change out the nutmeg for cinnamon, cardamom, or a combination. This is quite variable. Add mini chocolate chips or even finely ground nuts.
        • Press the crumbs firmly into the molds so they stick to the batter.
        • If you don't have a donut pan use a regular muffin pan. They taste just as good without a hole.
        Three donuts made in muffin pasn are on on a yellow plate with olive green trim.

        Other Tasty Treats to Try

        • Pumpkin Muffins on a cooling rack with a blue and yellow cloth and yellow smiley face tea cup,,
          Really Easy Pumpkin Muffins
        • A slice of Lemon Glazed Lemon Twists made with Sixty Second Brioche
          60 Second Brioche
        • An open Cinnamon Roll sits on a flowral plate with a plate of rolls behind it and a blue dotted cup and saucer are off to the side.
          Best Cinnamon Crunch Rolls Recipe
        • Baked or Fried Doughnut
          Fried or Baked Doughnuts - Your Choice

        Love this Crumb Baked Cake Donuts Recipe?  It would be hugely helpful and so appreciated it if you would take a moment to leave a star rating. Thank you.

        Five Crumbed Baked Donuts sit on a bright yellow and olive green plate covered in powdered sugar.

        Crumbed Baked Cake Donuts Recipe

        Helen S. Fletcher
        This Crumbed Baked Cake Donuts Recipe is not only super easy but fantastically good! It requires no special ingredients, is made in minutes and bakes even faster. They are light as a feather and freeze perfectly.
        No ratings yet
        Print Recipe Pin Recipe
        Prep Time 25 minutes mins
        Cook Time 12 minutes mins
        Total Time 37 minutes mins
        Course Donuts
        Cuisine American
        Servings 9 donuts
        Calories 261 kcal

        Equipment

        • Donut pans or regular size muffin tins
        Prevent your screen from going dark

        Ingredients

        Crumb Topping Ingredients

        • 4 tablespoons unsalted butter, softened (60 grams or ½ stick)
        • 2 tablespoons granulated sugar (28 grams)
        • 2 tablespoons dark brown sugar (28 grams)
        • ⅛ teaspoon salt
        • ¾ cup cake flour (90 grams)

        Donut Batter Ingredients

        • 1 cup all-purpose flour (140 grams)
        • 1 ½ teaspoon baking powder
        • ¼ teaspoon baking soda
        • ¼ - ½ teaspoon nutmeg
        • ¼ teaspoon salt
        • 4 tablespoons unsalted butter, softened (60 grams or ½ stick)
        • ¼ cup granulated sugar (50 grams)
        • ¼ cup dark brown sugar (50 grams)
        • 1 large egg
        • 1 teaspoon vanilla
        • ½ cup milk, whole or 2%
        • Powdered sugar as needed

        Instructions
         

        Crumb Topping

        • Combine the butter,, granulated and dark brown sugars in the bowl of a mixer. Cream until very light.
        • Combine the salt and cake flour; add it all at once and mix on medium just until crumbs form. Scrape the sides down and the bottom. Mix briefly.
        • Do not over mix or it will form a paste. Store the crumbs in the fridge while you make the donutbatter.

        Donut Batter

        • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Spray 9 donut wells in the pans with a non-stick baking release or use regular size muffin tins. Set aside,
        • Whisk together the flur, baking powder, baking soda, nutmeg and salt. Set aside.
        • Beat the butter granulated and brown sugars until very light. Mix in the egg and vanilla. It will probably curdle but that's fine. See my post on How to Avoid Curdled Cake Batter for detailed information.
        • Alternate the flour and sugar starting with the flour. Add the flour 3 times and 2 times for the milk. Add ⅓ of the flour mixture and mix it into the creamed mixture. Follow by half the milk. Then another ⅓ of the flour and the rest of the milk. Add the remaining flour, incorporating everything completely. The batter will be very thick.
        • Remove the crumbs from the fridge and divide them between 9 donut or muffin wells using about 2 tablespoons per well. Press them into the bottoms firmly.
        • Fit a piping bag with a ¾" plain pastry tip. Pipe the batter over the crumbs coming to the top of the donut pan. Divide equally if using the muffin tins.
        • Bake for 12 to 15 minutes until a tester comes out clean and the edges of the donuts are browning.
        • Cool completely in the pans. Place the cooling rack over a piece of parchment or waxed paper. To keep the crumbs in tact, carefully go around the edges of the wells with a small flexible metal spatula. Lift each donut out of its well and place bottom side up on a cooling rack whic
        • To keep the crumbs in tact, carefully go around the edges of the wells with a small flexible metal spatula. Lift each donut out of its well and place bottom side up on a cooling rack. The crumbs are now on top. Dust heavily with powdered sugar.
        • These will keep for several days if covered. They will need to be redusted with powdered sugar. Freeze without the powdered sugar, well wrapped for several months. Thaw on a cooling rack and sprinkle with powdered sugar.

        Notes

        There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
        As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
        ________________________________________________
        What if I Don't Have a Donut Pan?  No worries. A regular size muffin pan works well and the holes are optional. 
        If you don't have or don't like nutmeg, substitute cinnamon, cardamom would be super, grate a lemon or orange into the batter, add mini chocolate chips or finely cut nuts. The variations are endless.
        No cake flour? Sub all-purpose.
        Out of dark brown sugar? Use light brown sugar.
        No unsalted butter? Use salted butter and cut the salt in the recipes in half.
        When adding the flour to the crumb mixture do not over-mix or it will form a paste. Stop as soon as the crumbs form.
        Whole or 2% milk can be used in the batter.
        Press the crumbs firmly into the molds so they stick to the batter. 

        Nutrition

        Serving: 9donutsCalories: 261kcalCarbohydrates: 36gProtein: 4gFat: 11gSaturated Fat: 7gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 3gTrans Fat: 0.4gCholesterol: 49mgSodium: 215mgPotassium: 69mgFiber: 1gSugar: 18gVitamin A: 363IUVitamin C: 0.003mgCalcium: 73mgIron: 1mg
        Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

        Asparagus Tart

        Modified: May 1, 2026 · Published: May 12, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 6 Comments

        A slice of the Asparagus Tart on a white plate with a colorful napkin and fork in the background.

        With Asparagus season roaring along, this Asparagus Tart is the perfect recipe for the season. An easy cream cheese pastry, holds a pound of roasted asparagus highlighted with lemon in a low fat quiche mixture topped with parmesan cheese.

        A slice of the Asparagus Tart on a white plate with a colorful napkin and fork in the background.

        For more information on Asparagus, including the different grades see my post, Asparagus Season is Here,

        This is a perfect brunch, lunch or dinner choice and can be made a couple of days ahead of time.

        Be sure to check out other savory tarts on my blog including: the very impressive Tourte Milanese, the every popular Italian Torta Rustica, Greece's favorite Spanokopita as well as one of the favorites from my take out shop,Goat Cheese Pesto Tart, and my Summer Vegetable Tart.

        [feast_advanced_jump_to]

        Why You'll Love this Recipe

        • It comes together quickly.
        • The cream cheese crust is so easy to make and goes into the shell with no rolling.
        • The tart can be made a couple of days ahead and reheated.
        • It's so versatile with it being served for brunch, lunch or a light dinner.
        • It is low fat with no cream being used.

        Recipe Ingredients

        Cream Cheese Crust

        The ingredients for the cream cheese crust are all-purpose flour, cream cheese, butter and salt.

        Ingredients are: Unsalted Butter, salt, cream cheese and all-purpose flour.

        For the Filling

        Ingredients for the Asparagus Tart filling are cornstarch, lemon zest, black pepper, eggs, low fat yogurt, cottage cheese, asparagus and parmean cheese.

        The filling for the tart include: Parmesan cheese, roasted asparagus, cottage cheese, eggs, low fat yogurt, cornstarch or swee rice flour, lemon zest and black pepper.

        Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions.

        Step by Step Instructions

        The first collages shows the roasted asparagus, the flour and salt mixed in the processor, the ubtter and cream cheese added and the crust dough balled up.

        Step 1. Trim the hard stems off the asparagus and toss with a bit of oil. Salt and pepper them and bake at 350°F for exactly 8 minutes. Remove from the oven and cool. Step 2. Place the flour and salt in the processor bowl and pulse several times to mix, Step 3. Add the cut up butter and cream cheese. Step 4. Process until it forms a ball. Divide the ball in 3 or 4 pieces and process again to make sure it is all combined.

        This collage shows the dough being rolled into a rope and lining the side of the tart tin, pressed against the the side and then extended out toward the center.

        Step 5. Divide the dough into 3 parts, 90 grams each. Remove a teaspoon from each part, combine, wrap in film and set aside. This will be used if the crust needs to be patched. Roll two of the pieces into 14 inch legnths. Step 6. Spray the bottom of a 9" quiche or tart pan with a removable bottom with a non-stick baking release. Do not spray the sides. Place the rolls along the sides of the pan with the edges overlapping. Step 7. Moisten the ends of the overlapping dough and press the rolls into the sides of the pan. Step 8. Extend the dough from the sides of the pan into to middle by pushing the dough on the sides down toward the center of the pan as shown.

        These four photos depict the last piece of dough in a circle, the extended dough in the pan moistened, the round of dough placed in the center of the pan and the crust finished.

        Step 9. Using the last piece of dough, form a circle by pressing it out between your hands then placing it on the lightly floured work surface and patting it out large enough to partially cover the extended dough. Step 10. Wet the extension. Step 11. Place the circle of dough over the extension. Step 12. Press the circle over the moistened dough and seal it to the edge of the crust. Chill to firm it.

        This collages hows apiece of foil sprayed with a non-stick baking release, covering the crust with beans inside it, the processor wiped clean and the asparagus cut.

        Step 13. Spray a large piece of of foil with a non-stick baking release. Step 14. Place the sprayed side down over the crust, making sure it fits into the side. Bake as directed and cool. If the crust separates anywhere along the joined line, use the reserved little pastry ball to patch it after it cools. Do not bake again. Step 15. Wipe the inside of the processor bowl out. There is no need to wash it. Step 16. Cut the asparagus into about 1 inch pieces.

        The last collages shows the liquid ingredients  in the processor, the asparagus in the crust, the liquid filling poured into the crust and the tart baked.

        Step 17. Place all the ingredients for the filling, except the asparagus and parmesan cheese, in the bowl of the processor. Process until smooth and liquid. Step 18. Put the asparagus filled crust in a rimmed baking sheet covered with parchment paper. Step 18. Pour the liquid over the asparagus and top with the parmesan cheese. Bake as directed. If the top has not browned, place it under the broiler for a few minutes. Watch it carefully as the cheese can go from golden to burned quickly.

        Recipe FAQS

        What are the three grades of asparagus?

        Pencil thin - about as thin as a pencil - blanch these do not roast or grilll. Standard - the stalk is about ½ inch or slightly more at the bottom - great for roasting or grilling. Jumbo - these are really fat stalks. They need to be peeled with a vegetable peeler to get rid of the toughest part and make them edible. These can be roasted or grillled. See my post, Asparagus Season is Here for in depth information about this vegetable.

        Can I use another cheese?

        Absolutely. Cheddar, fontina, provolone, pepperjack. Swiss gets really stringy and can be difficult to eat as can mozzerlla and the bleu cheese or really strong cheeses are not the best choices.

        What to look for when buying asparagus?

        The stalks should be firm, bright green with tips that are compact and tightly closed. Wilted, dried out, or blemished stalks or the bottom of stalks should be avoided. The ends should be moist and plump.

        Expert Tips

        • Trim any woody stems from the bottom of the asparagus before roasting.
        • The cream cheese crust requires no liquid and is especially easy to work with.
        • Be sure to spray foil and place the sprayed side on top of the crust before filling it with weights. Make sure the weights come to the top of the pan and into to corners. Parchment can tear when lifting the weights from the crust.
        • There is no need to wash the processor between making the crust and making the filling. Just wipe it out.
        This photo shows a slice of the Asparagus tart on a white plate with a colorful napkin and fork behind it.

        Other Savory Items for your Enjoyment

        • A slice Muffaletta Bread layered with meats, cheeses and condiments on a plate with olives and celery.
          Muffaletta Bread
        • Southwestern Seafood Tart
          Southwestern Seafood Tart
        • Chicken Pot Pe
          Easy, Elegant Chicken Pot Pie
        • Finished cut
          Italian Calzones

        Love this Asparagus Tart? It would be hugely helpful and so appreciated it if you would take a moment to leave a star rating. Thank you.

        A slice of the Asparagus Tart on a white plate with a colorful napkin and fork in the background.

        Asparagus Tart

        Helen S. Fletcher
        An easy cream cheese pastry, holds a pound of roasted asparagus highlighted with lemon in a low fat quiche mixture topped with parmesan cheese.
        5 from 2 votes
        Print Recipe Pin Recipe
        Prep Time 40 minutes mins
        Cook Time 25 minutes mins
        Total Time 1 hour hr 5 minutes mins
        Course Main Dish
        Cuisine American
        Servings 6
        Calories 418 kcal

        Equipment

        • 9" tart pan with removable bottom
        Prevent your screen from going dark

        Ingredients

        Cream Cheese Pastry

        • ¾ cup +1T all-purpose flour (114 grams)
        • ½ teaspoon salt
        • 5 tablespoons unsalted butter (75 grams)
        • 3 ounces cream cheese (85 grams)

        Asparagus Tart Filling

        • 1 pound fresh asparagus (454 grams)
        • 2 tablespoons vegetable or olive oil
        • ½ cup low fat cottage cheese
        • 1 cup low fat plain yogurt
        • 3 large eggs
        • 1 ½ teaspoon cornstarch or sweet rice flour
        • ½ to 1 teaspoon salt
        • 1 tablespoon lemon zest
        • ½ teaspoon salt
        • ¼ - ½ teasp cayenne pepper
        • OR
        • ½ teaspoon black pepper
        • 4 ounces parmesan cheese, grated

        Instructions
         

        Asparagus

        • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Spray a 9" tart pan with removable bottom with a non-stick baking spray. Set aside.
        • Trim the bottoms of the asparagus of any woody stalks. Toss the asparagus with the oil making sure all of it is covered.
        • Line a half sheet pan with foil and place the asparagus in a single layer in the pan. Salt and pepper to taste.
        • Bake 8 minutes. Remove and cool.

        Cream Cheese Crust - see the photos in the Step by Step instructions.

        • Place the flour and salt in the bowl of a processor. Pulse several times to blend.
        • Cut the butter into pieces as well as the cream cheese. Add to the processor, placing them in a circle over the flour. Process until a ball forms.
        • Remove from the process and divide into 3 pieces about 90 grams each. Remove 1 teaspoon from each piece, shape into a ball and wrap in plastic wrap. Set the little piece aside.
        • Roll two of the balls into 14" lengths. Place each of them around the rim of the pan with the ends overlapping.
        • Wet the ends lightly and press together. Press the ropes firmly into the sides of the pan. Extend the dough for about 1 ½" from the sides of the pan into to middle by pushing some of the dough on the sides down toward the center of the pan, If this seems confusing - see the pictures.
        • Shape the remaining piece of dough into a round large enough to cover the exposed part of the pan and go over the dough by a couple of inches. i shaped the dough between my hands and then placed it on a lightly floured surface and pushed it out from the center.
        • Moisten the existing dough on the bottom of the tart pan. Place the round over it and press the dough up to the edge of the pan. Make the bottom as even as you can. Freeze for about 10 minutes.
        • Preheat the oven to 400°F.
        • Spray a large piece of foil with a non-stick-baking release. Line the pastry shell with the foil, sprayed side down on top of the pastry. Make sure it fits into the corners well. Pour weights up to the rim of the shell.
        • Bake for 25 minutes on the middle rack of the oven. Remove from the oven and carefully remove the weights by bringing the four corners of the foil together in the middle and lifting them out.
        • Immediately place the tart shell back in the oven on the bottom rack for about 5 minutes more until the crust is set. It does not have to be browned as long as it is firm. If the crust separates at any point, use the small of reserved pastry to patch the cracks after it cools.. Do not bake again.

        Filling

        • Cut the asparagus into ½ to ¾ inch pieces. If any are woody, do not use them.
        • Place them in the bottom of the par-baked pastry shell. Place the tart pan on a half sheet pan lined with parchment paper.
        • Wipe out the processor bowl. There is no need to wash it. Combine all the filling ingredients except the parmesan in the processor bowl. Process until smooth. Taste for salt and either cayenne or pepper. Adjust if necessary.
        • Top the filling with the grated parmesan cheese. Place in the oven and bake for 20 to 25 minutes until it is set or just very slightly jiggly. If the top has not taken on any color, move the sheet pan to under the broiler. Broil until the parmesan browns. Watch it carefully as it can go from golden to burned quidkly.
        • Let it cool to warm on a cooling rack. Serve warm or room temperature with a squeeze of lemon juice over the top.
        • Store any leftovers in the refrigerator. Slices of the tart can be microwaved briefly to warm.

        Notes

        There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
        As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
        _______________________________________________
        Trim any woody stems from the bottom of the asparagus before roasting.
        The cream cheese crust requires no liquid and is especially easy to work with. 
        Be sure to spray foil and place the sprayed side on top of the crust before filling it with weights. Make sure the weights come to the top of the pan and into to corners. Parchment can tear when lifting the weights from the crust.
        There is no need to wash the processor between making the crust and making the filling. Just wipe it out.
         

        Nutrition

        Serving: 6servingsCalories: 418kcalCarbohydrates: 33gProtein: 16gFat: 25gSaturated Fat: 13gPolyunsaturated Fat: 4gMonounsaturated Fat: 6gTrans Fat: 0.4gCholesterol: 59mgSodium: 1065mgPotassium: 358mgFiber: 3gSugar: 5gVitamin A: 1282IUVitamin C: 6mgCalcium: 295mgIron: 3mg
        Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

        Lemon Sugar Buns

        Modified: Aug 25, 2025 · Published: May 5, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 2 Comments

        A single Lemon Sugar Bun sits on a white laced edged plate with a platter of more buns in the background.

        These Lemon Sugar Buns are just in time for Mother's day breakfast in bed or brunch. An enriched European type yeast dough is flavored with lemon zest and takes minutes to make.

        A single Lemon Sugar Bun sits on a white laced edged plate with a platter of more buns in the background.

        Not only does the dough go together quickly but shaping them is just as fast. If the dough rests overnight in the fridge, it is sooooo easy to roll out with no springing back. The Swedish Pearl Sugar lends a crunchy finish and stays white and crunchy even after baking and if frozen and thawed.

        Here are a few sweet roll recipes that also use Swedish Pearl Sugar. Conchas -A Mexican Sweet Roll, Pumpkin Dinner Rolls Two Ways, and, Twice Baked Brioche - A Breakfast Treat. Also check out My All Time Favorite Lemon Recipes.

        [feast_advanced_jump_to]

        What is Enriched Dough?

        In baking, there are lean and enriched doughs. Breads are great examples of lean doughs using water, flour, yeast and salt for the most part. Enriched doughs have sugar, eggs or egg yolks, butter or oil and often milk, sour cream or buttermilk to create softer, more flavorful doughs. Examples of these include brioche, challah, and sweet breads and rolls.

        What is Swedish Pearl Sugar?

        A package of Lars Swedish Sugar.

        Swedish Pearl Sugar is one of my favorite ways to finish baked goods.

        Swedish pearl sugar is made from granulated sugar that is processed by compressing the sugar into larger, round particles that won't dissolve in baked goods, after which they are polished which gives them their name Pearl sugar. These chunky bits of sugar are used mostly for topping baked goods such as Danish pastries, sweet breads, cookies and pastries. Essentially, it's just compressed sugar that doesn't melt in the oven or after freezing. It stays beautifully white and crunchy.

        Belgian sugar is the same thing only much larger. It is used mostly in Liege waffles. They are not interchangeable for decorating.

        There are several Swedish Pearl sugars available. I have always used Lars Swedish Pearl Sugar because it is made in Sweden. It can be found on Amazon as well as other online stores. I am not an affiliate.

        Can I Make These a Different Size?

        Absolutely! You can use a smaller or larger cutter and also vary the thickness. These Lemon Sugar Buns are not only easy but very adaptable. There is no right or wrong.

        This photo shows two different sizes of the buns - one taller than the other.

        A Little Difference Makes a Big Difference

        Some time ago I made a yeast dough and noticed little bumps in it after it was mixed. It was undissolved instant yeast. Ever since I add the instant yeast to whatever liquid is being used while I prep the other ingredients and it dramatically adds to the expansion of the dough.

        Why These will Become a Favorite

        • The recipe is so easy to make.
        • I have included a little trick I have found that makes the yeast more effective.
        • These are very adaptable as far as size and thickness.
        • Despite the sugar topping, they aren't too sweet.
        • The lemon adds a freshness to this yeast bun.
        • They freeze and thaw perfectly and are great to have on hand.
        • They are perfect with a cup of coffee or tea as a breakfast or snack treat.
        • While best the first day as are most yeast products, these are delicious for several days.

        Recipe Ingredients

        Yeast Dough

        Ingredients for the Lemon Sugar buns include instant yeast, milk, unsalted butter, granulated sugar, lemon zest, vanilla, salt,eggs, egg yolks and all-purpose flour.

        Ingredients for the Lemon Sugar Buns include: Lemon zest, vanilla, salt, instant yeast, egg yolks, whole eggs, unsalted butter, granulated sugar, all purpose flour, and milk.

        Finishing

        ingredients for the wash are egg white and Swedish Pearl Sugar.

        Ingredients for the egg wash are egg white and Swedish Pearl Sugar.

        Key Ingredients

        • Milk can be whole or 2%. I generally use 2% since that is what I have on hand.
        • Both whole eggs and egg yolks are used to add richness to the dough
        • Use an egg white from one of the yolks.
        • Instant yeast is used for it's ability to lift heavy doughs.

        Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions.

        Step by Step Instructions

        The first collages shows the yeast in the milk, the sugar, vanilla and lemon zest in a mixing bowl, creamed together and the eggs and  yolks added.

        Step 1. Add the instant yeast to room temperature milk while prepping the other ingredients. Step 2. Place the sugar, softened butter, lemon zest, salt and vanilla in mixing bowl of a mixer fit with the paddle attachment. Step 3. Cream the mixture until light. Step 4. Add the eggs and yolks.

        This collage shows the mixture has curdled, the first addition of flour,it beaten in and the second addition added.

        Step 5. Beat the eggs and yolks in on medium, then high scraping often. Mix in the milk/yeast mixture. It most likely will curdle. See my post How to Avoid Curdled Cake Batter for more information. Step 6. Switch to the dough hook and add half the flour. Step 7. Beat on medium to bring the dough together. Step 8. Add the remaining flour.

        The third collage shows the dough completed, in a container, covered and then risen.

        Step 9. Mix the flour in to complete the dough. Continue beating for 3 to 4 minutes to knead. Step 10. Place it in a large container sprayed with a non-stick baking release. Step 11. Cover the top of the dough with plastic wrap. Step 12. Let the dough rise at room temperature or in the oven with the light turned on for several hours until more than doubled in bulk. It is best to refrigerate it overnight to make rolling out and cutting easier.

        The last collage shows the dough rolled out and chilled, the buns cut out, egg washed and covered with Swedish Pearl sugar then baked.

        Step 13. On a lightly floured work surface roll the dough to the desired thickness. Here it is about ⅓" for thinner buns. Chill the dough or freeze it briefly to firm it up for better cutting. Step 14. Cut rounds from the dough the desired size. I used a 3 ½" round cutter. Cover the rolls and allow them to double in size. Step 15. Beat an egg to combine completely and brush the tops of the risen rolls. Sprinkle heavily with Swedish Pearl Sugar. Press in lightly to make sure they stick. The photo does not show it, but it should be double panned before baking to prevent over browning of the bottom. This often happens with enriched doughs due to the butter, eggs and sugar. Step 16. Bake until lightly browned. Cool.

        Recipe FAQS

        Why do people use Swedish Pearl Sugar?

        It is used for several reasons. Among them is the beautiful white crunchiness of the sugar. It is perfect as a decoration to cookies, sweet buns and rolls, and pastries because it retains it looks and crunchiness after baking. It doesn't melt under high heat or after thawed from the freezer.

        Is there a bigger sugar like the Swedish Pearl Sugar?

        Yes, it is Belgian Sugar and is larger, sometimes as big as a peanut. It's primary use is for Belgian Liege Waffles. Swedish Pearl Sugar is smaller and lighter.

        Is there a substitute for the Swedish Pearl Sugar?

        Sanding sugar can add sweetness but isn't as white or crunchy as the pearl sugar.

        Expert Tips

        • Soak the yeast while prepping the rest of the ingredients to make sure it dissolves in the dough and also increase the height of the baked goods.
        • Refrigerate the dough overnight. The chilled dough will be easy to roll out with no spring back.
        • Chill the dough after first rolling it out to make cutting the rounds easier with cleaner edges.
        • Press the Swedish Pearl Sugar lightly into the egg washed buns to ensures it sticks when baking.
        • If changing the size of the cutters or the thickness of the dough, make sure to adjust the baking time up or down as needed.
        This photo shows a Lemon Sugar Bun opened with more in the background.

        More Fantastic Sweet Rolls

        • An open Cinnamon Roll sits on a flowral plate with a plate of rolls behind it and a blue dotted cup and saucer are off to the side.
          Best Cinnamon Crunch Rolls Recipe
        • Sweet Kolache with pineapple, cream cheese, fig, raspberry fillings
          The Marvelous Variable Kolache
        • Rum Raisin Rolls on a plate with a cup of tea and an iced roll in the background
          Rum Raisin Rolls - A Long Ago Memory
        • A dark chocolate German Chocolate roll intertwined with a coconut pecan fillig sits on a white, green and yellow plate.
          German Chocolate Sweet Rolls

        Love these Lemon Sugar Buns? It would be hugely helpful and so appreciated it if you would take a moment to leave a star rating. Thank you.

        A single Lemon Sugar Bun sits on a white laced edged plate with a platter of more buns in the background.

        Lemon Sugar Buns

        Helen S. Fletcher
        These Lemon Sugar Buns are just in time for Mother's day breakfast in bed or brunch. An enriched European type yeast dough is flavored with lots of lemon zest and takes minutes to make.
        5 from 1 vote
        Print Recipe Pin Recipe
        Prep Time 20 minutes mins
        Cook Time 18 minutes mins
        Rising 4 hours hrs
        Total Time 4 hours hrs 38 minutes mins
        Course Sweet Rolls
        Cuisine American
        Servings 18 servings
        Calories 222 kcal
        Prevent your screen from going dark

        Ingredients

        Lemon Sugar Bun Dough

        • ¾ cup milk, whole or 2%
        • 2 ¼ teaspoons instant yeast
        • ½ cup butter, softened (114 grams or 1 stick)
        • ½ cup + 1 Tablespoon granulated sugar (145) grams
        • 2 to 3 tablespoons lemon zest
        • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract
        • ½ teaspoon salt
        • 3 large eggs
        • 3 large egg yolks
        • 4 ½ cups all-purpose flour (630 grams)

        Sugar Topping

        • 1 large egg white
        • Swedish Pearl Sugar as needed

        Instructions
         

        Lemon Sugar Buns

        • Bring milk to room temperature. Stir in the yeast and set aside while you prep the rest of the ingredients. .
        • In the bowl of a mixer fit with the paddle attachment, cream the butter, sugar, lemon zest, vanilla and salt until fluffy. Scrape the bowl down.
        • Add the whole eggs and egg yolks all at once. Mix on medium speed and then on high until combined, scraping down often. Incorporate the milk/yeast mixture. It will, most likely, curdle.
        • Switch to the dough hook attachment and add half the flour. Mix on the suggested speed of the mixer until the flour is all incorporated. Add the remainder of the flour and mix to blend and then mix for 3 to 4 minutes to knead.
        • Spray a container at least 3 times as big as the dough with a non-stick baking release. Add the dough, turn it over and cover the top with plastic warp. Place the lid on or cover with a towel and mark the time on it. Let it rise until about 2 to 2 ½ times as large. It is best to refrigerate it overnight at this point to make it easier to roll out.
        • When ready to finish, divide the dough in half (about 620 grams). Roll it ⅓ to ½" for thinner rolls and about ¾" for thicker rolls. Place the dough on a parchment paper lined baking sheet and refrigerate or freeze briefly to firm up. Do not freeze hard.
        • Cut out the rounds the size you want. I used a 3 ¾" round cutter. Place them on parchment lined baking sheets leaving at least 1 ½" between them. Cover with a towel and let rise until doubled, about 1 ½ to 2 hours.
        • Preheat the oven to 350°F.
        • Beat the egg white until foamy. Brush 2 or 3 rounds at a time and cover heavily with the Swedish Pearl sugar. Press the sugar in lightly to make sure it adheres. Do not brush more as the sugar won't stick. Double pan the rolls to prevent them from getting too brown on the bottom.
        • Bake for 15 to 18 minutes for the thinner rolls. For thicker rolls about 20 to 22 minutes. They should be golden brown but still soft when removed from the oven.
        • Cool completely. These can be frozen hard, then wrapped individually to keep the sugar intact. Carefully place them in a freezer proof bag where they will keep for several months. Thaw at room temperature and heat briefly at 350° F.
        • The yield depends upon the size of the cutter and the thickness to which the buns have been rolled. Using a 3 ¾" cutter and rolling the dough ⅓" thick yielded about 18 to 20 buns.

        Notes

        There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
        As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
        ________________________________________________
        Soak the yeast while prepping the rest of the ingredients to make sure it dissolves in the dough and also increase the height of the baked goods.
        Refrigerate the dough overnight. The chilled dough will be easy to roll out with no spring back.
        Chill the dough after first rolling it out to make cutting the rounds easier with cleaner edges.
        Press the Swedish Pearl Sugar lightly into the egg washed buns to ensures it sticks when baking.
        If changing the size of the cutters or the thickness of the dough, make sure to adjust the baking time up or down as needed.
         

        Nutrition

        Serving: 18bunsCalories: 222kcalCarbohydrates: 33gProtein: 6gFat: 7gSaturated Fat: 4gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gTrans Fat: 0.2gCholesterol: 76mgSodium: 62mgPotassium: 84mgFiber: 1gSugar: 8gVitamin A: 260IUVitamin C: 1mgCalcium: 29mgIron: 2mg
        Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

        Café au Lait Chocolate Tart

        Modified: Apr 26, 2026 · Published: Apr 29, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 12 Comments

        A slice of the Cafe au Lait tart sits on a white plate that is on a tan plate with a napkin and fork behind it.

        This Café au Lait Chocolate Tart is smooth, rich, sophisticated and is the perfect finish to any meal from BBQ to a formal sit down dinner. No baking is involved and it can be made surprisingly quickly and easily. Inspired by the coffee drink, this evolved from a series of truffles I made when I had the bakery. This coffee flavored tart is the perfect blend of milk chocolate, cream and coffee. Because it is au lait, it is mildly flavored with coffee.

        A slice of the Cafe au Lait tart sits on a white plate that is on a tan plate with a napkin and fork behind it.

        A simple chocolate press in crust is filled with a milk chocolate truffle filling and topped with a wreath of whipped cream finished with cinnamon. It doesn't get easier or better!

        Other tarts you may enjoy include: Individual Brown Butter Tarts, Honey-Thyme Apple Tart, the Chocolate Glazed Bakewell Tart, and No Bake Mini Chocolate Caramel Tarts.

        [feast_advanced_jump_to]

        Why You'll Want to Make This

        • It is sooo good. It's like eating a truffle in a pie wedge.
        • This simple tart is so easy to make but looks so grand - like you spent a lot of time on it.
        • There's just a few ingredients in each part of this - only 4 in the crust, 3 in the filling, and 3 in the topping - all easily accessible.
        • It goes with the most casual to the most elegant of meals.
        • It can be done ahead of time either refrigerated or frozen.

        Recipe Ingredients

        Chocolate Crust

        The crust ingredients include graham crackers, powdered sugar, cocoa powder and unsalted butter.

        The ingredients for the crust include: Graham crackers, powdered sugar, unsalted butter and cocoa powder.

        Café au Lait Truffle Filling

        The chocolate fiillig includes, milk chocolate, cream and instant coffee.

        The filling includes: Milk Chocolate, heavy cream and instant coffee.

        Whipped Cream Finish

        The Whipped Cream Topping includes, heavy cream, powdered sugar, and cinnamon.

        Main Ingredients

        Different Graham Crackers can absorb more or less butter from 8 to 10 tablespoons of butter.

        Either Dutch or Natural cocoa powder can be used. The Dutch cocoa will make a darker crust.

        The quality of the Milk Chocolate is important to the taste of the tart. I use Trader Joe's Pound Plus. It is Belgian chocolate which is among the best in the world and is reasonably priced.

        Heavy Cream should be used for the proper consistency and taste.

        Instant Coffee is used in this recipe. If espresso is substituted, it should be reduced. This tart is not meant to be coffee forward as the coffee drink is equal portions of milk and coffee.

        Korintje Cinnamon is my choice of cinnamon but any can be substituted.

        Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions.

        Step by Step Instructions

        Chocolate Crust

        The first collages shows the graham crackers in the processor, with the powdered sugar and cocoa powder, then ground up and the melted butter added.

        Step 1. Crush the graham crackers and place in the bowl of a food processor. Step 2. Add the powdered sugar and cocoa powder. Step 3. Process to make crumbs. Step 4. Transfer the crumbs to a bowl and add the melted butter.

        This collages shows the crumbs and butter mixed in a bowl, the edges of the tart pan with the crumbs pressed iin, the crumbs in the bottom of the pan and then pressed in.

        Step 5. Start with 8 tablespoons, and using a fork, toss the crumbs and the butter together until completely mixed. Take a small amount and press it together between your fingers. If it sticks together without falling apart, it is fine. Otherwise, add the remaining butter. Step 6. Spray the bottom of the tart pan with a non-stick baking spray and press ⅔ of the crumbs evenly and firmly around the edges of the pan. Step 7. Spread the remainder of the crumbs evenly on the bottom of the pan. Step 8. Press them in firmly and make sure they are attached to the sides of the crumbs. Set aside.

        Café au Lait Filling

        The first collage for the Cafe au Lait Tart shows the cream and coffee in a pot, heated to combine, the chocolate submerged under the hot cream and the filling finished.

        Step 1. Place the heavy cream and coffee in a medium size pan. Step 2. Heat together until steaming, but do not boil. Step 3. Remove from the heat and submerge the chocolate under the cream. Leave it there for 4 or 5 minutes. Step 4. Stir together with a spoon until blended. Do not use a whisk as it will make too many air bubbles that are hard to get out.

        This collage shows the filling poured ito the crust and after chilling the edges of the tart being heated with a blow dryer, release from the pan by sitting on a can to elevated it and then sliding the side down.

        Step 5. Pour the filling into the prepared shell and refrigerate. Step 6. To release the tart from the pan, place a blow dryer about ¼ to ½ inch away from the edge and go around the entire tart to heat the crust. Just slowly turn the tart while heating it. Step 7. Place the tart on a large can to elevate it. Step 8. A gentle tug on the rim of the pan will release it.

        This last collage shows the bottom of the tart being released, the texture of the whipped cream and the cream piped onto the tart.

        Step 9. To release the bottom, place a flat, metal spatula between the bottom of the crust and the metal base of the pan. Go around the entire base and then lift it onto a cardboard circle or plate. Step 10. Place the cream and powdered sugar in the bowl of a mixer. Step 11. Whip until stiff. Step 12. Pipe a wreath of cream around the edge of the tart. At this point, it should be chilled or frozen. If frozen, it is easier to leave the cream off until a day or two before serving. It can be thawed in the refrigerator and then the wreath can be added. Just before serving, sprinkle cinnamon over the whipped cream with a fine meshed strainer.

        Recipe FAQS

        Does this tart have to be baked?

        No, there is no baking anywhere in this tart since it doesn't contain eggs.

        What does Café au Lait mean?

        Coffee with milk.

        Can I use dark chocolate?

        Not if you want it to be a Café au Lait chocolate tart. The Café au Lait drink that his tart refers to is equal parts of coffee and chocolate. As such, darker chocolate would be the predominant taste.

        Storage and Freezer Instructions

        This tart will hold in the refrigerator for several days. It can also be frozen. If freezing, omit the whipped cream finish. Freeze the tart, in its shell, wrap it well in foil and freeze for several months. Thaw in the refrigerator. Then finish with the whipped cream. This can then be held for several days. Store any leftovers in the fridge.

        However, to serve, let it sit at room temperature for a bit while eating. It is best served at room temperature or the coffee flavor is pronounced.

        Expert tips

        • Use a fork to mix the crumbs to keep them fluffy. A spoon tamps them together making it more difficult to distribute them evenly.
        • Do not use all the melted butter at once. Some graham crackers absorb more or less. Start with 8 tablespoons and test it by taking a small amount and squeezing it between your fingers. If it sticks together without being dry or falling apart it is ready. Otherwise, add the remainder of the butter. Instant espresso can be used but only about 1 tablespoon.
        • This tart is lightly coffee flavored and isn't meant to be overwhelmingly coffee flavored.
        • Use a good milk chocolate - Trader Joe's is my go to but Ghiradelli, Callebaut or Guittard or any 55 to 60% fine chocolate is good. Hershey's is not.
        • A 9"x ¾ or 1" tart or quiche pan with a removable bottom is best for this recipe.
        • Do not over heat the cream. Over heating results in a dull chocolate
        • To Cut the Tart, dip the knife in really hot water or run it under really hot water, wipe it off quickly and cut straight down. Repeat for each cut.
        Cafe au lait tart on a white plate that sits on a beige plate with a fork and napkin in the background.

        Other Inviting Tarts for you to Enjoy

        • A slice of the S'more Tart with it's browned marshmallow topping sits on a brown rimmed plate with a fork and napkin in the background.
          How to Make A S'mores Tart
        • Chocolate Caramel Pecan Tart
          Chocolate Caramel Pecan Tart
        • A butter crust holds a raspberry jam filling topped with an almond filling of toasted almonds, sugar, butter, eggs, amaretto, almond and vanilla flavoring. It is finished with a dusting of powdered sugar
          Easy Almond Raspberry Tart

        Love this Café au Lait Chocolate Tart? It would be hugely helpful and so appreciated it if you would take a moment to leave a star rating. Thank you.

        A slice of the Cafe au Lait tart sits on a white plate that is on a tan plate with a napkin and fork behind it.

        Café au Lait Chocolate Tart

        Helen S. Fletcher
        This Café au Lait Chocolate Tart is rich, sophisticated and the perfect finish to any meal from BBQ to a formal sit down dinner. No baking is involved and it can be made surprisingly quickly and easily.
        5 from 3 votes
        Print Recipe Pin Recipe
        Prep Time 55 minutes mins
        Total Time 55 minutes mins
        Course Dessert
        Cuisine American, French
        Servings 12 servings
        Calories 438 kcal

        Equipment

        • 9" tart or quiche pan with removable bottom
        Prevent your screen from going dark

        Ingredients

        Chocolate Crust

        • 1 ⅓ cups graham cracker crumbs (170 grams)
        • ¼ cup cocoa powder (23 grams)
        • ½ cup powdered sugar (65 grams)
        • 10 tablespoons unsalted butter, melted (150 grams)

        Café au Lait Truffle Filling

        • 1 ¼ cup heavy cream
        • 1 ½ tablespoons instant coffee
        • 15 ounces milk chocolate (430 grams)

        Whipped Cream Finish

        • 1 cup whipped cream
        • ⅓ cup powdered sugar (35 grams)
        • cinnamon as needed

        Instructions
         

        Chocolate Crust

        • Please see the photos above to see the steps to make this tart.
        • Place the graham crackers in the bowl of a food processor. Add the cocoa powder and powdered sugar.
        • Process until crumbs form. Pour into a bowl.
        • Add 8 tablespoons (½ cup) of melted butter to the crumbs and toss with a fork. Do not use a spoon as it packs the crumbs too tightly. You want them to stay fluffy.
        • Test the crumbs by taking a few between you fingers and pressing them tightly together. If they stay together firmly without being dry or crumbling, you're done. If not, stir in the additional butter.
        • Spray the bottom of the tart pan with a non-stick baking spray. Press ⅔ of the crumbs (about 210 grams) equally around the sides of the tart pan. Press them in firmly.
        • Pour the remaining crumbs into the bottom of the pan and press in well, making sure they are attached to the sides. Set aside.

        Café au Lait Truffle Filling

        • Chop the chocolate into pieces.
        • Heat the cream and coffee in a medium size saucepan until steaming. Do not let it get any hotter.
        • Submerge the chocolate under the cream and let it sit for 4 or 5 minutes. Stir together with a spoon to mix completely. Do not use a whisk as it will incorporate too many air bubbles which are difficult to remove.
        • Pour it into the reserved shell, breaking any air bubbles with a toothpick. Refrigerate to set up, preferably overnight.
        • When the tart is set, use a blow dryer placed about ¼ to ½ inches from the edge of the tart pan. Go around the entire rim briefly to heat it. Place it on top of a large can and gently pull the rim off. If it is stuck, go around it again with the dryer.
        • To release the bottom, place a medium size metal spatula between the bottom of the crust and the metal bottom of the pan. Go around the entire bottom. Lift it off to a cardboard round or a serving dish.

        Whipped Cream Finish

        • Place the cream and powdered sugar into the bowl of a mixer fitted with the whisk attachment. Beat on medium until it starts to thicken then raise to high. Beat until it is stiff.
        • Fit a pastry bag with a number 5 or 6 open star tip and pipe a wreath around the edge of the tart. Refrigerate.
        • When ready to serve, take it out of the fridge and let it sit at room temperature or the coffee flavor is not pronounced. . Using a fine meshed strainer, dust the cream with cinnamon.
        • To Cut the Tart, dip the knife in really hot water or run it under really hot water, wipe it off quickly and cut straight down. Repeat for each cut.

        Notes

        There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
         As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
        _______________________________________________
        Use a fork to mix the crumbs to keep them fluffy. A spoon tamps them together making it more difficult to distribute them evenly.
        Do not use all the melted butter at once. Some graham crackers absorb more or less. Start with 8 tablespoons and test it by taking a small amount and squeezing it between your fingers. If it sticks together without being dry or falling apart it is ready. Otherwise, add the remainder of the butter.
        Instant espresso can be used but only ab0ut 1 tablespoon  This tart is lightly coffee flavored and isn't meant to be overwhelmingly coffee flavored.
        Use a good milk chocolate - Trader Joe's is my go to but Ghiradelli, Callebaut or Guittard or any 55 to 60% fine chocolate is good. Hershey's is not. 
        A 9"x ¾ or 1" tart or quiche pan with a removable bottom is best for this recipe. 
        Do not over heat the cream. Over heating results in a dull chocolate finish. Just bring it to the point it steams which is just under a simmer.
        To Cut the Tart, dip the knife in really hot water or run it under really hot water, wipe it off quickly and cut straight down. Repeat for each cut.
         

        Nutrition

        Serving: 12servingsCalories: 438kcalCarbohydrates: 40gProtein: 3gFat: 33gSaturated Fat: 20gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 9gTrans Fat: 0.4gCholesterol: 57mgSodium: 76mgPotassium: 195mgFiber: 3gSugar: 30gVitamin A: 690IUVitamin C: 0.1mgCalcium: 43mgIron: 2mg
        Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

        Asparagus Season is Here

        Modified: May 1, 2026 · Published: Apr 22, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 6 Comments

        Fresh asparagus spears on a foil lined pan seasoned with salt and pepper.

        Asparagus Season is here and the freshest and best asparagus spears can be found in April through June. As a precursor to my Spring Tart coming up, I thought this would be a good time to write a short tutorial about this best of all vegetables. Did I mention that roasting asparagus takes a mere 8 to 10 minutes ?

        Fresh asparagus spears on a foil lined pan seasoned with salt and pepper.

        Simply roasted asparagus with salt and black pepper is one of the easiest and most versatile vegetables to be had. From Asparagus soup or Potato Salad to an Asparagus Quiche to a simple sprinkling of parmesan cheese and lemon juice, this vegetables goes from the simplest of meals to the most elaborate.

        Looking for another easy savory recipe? Try these Easy Cheesy Sausage Balls.

        [feast_advanced_jump_to]

        Three Grades of Asparagus

        All asparagus is not equal. There are three grades of asparagus and personal taste is the guide here. There is no right or wrong.

        • Pencil Thin - these spears are literally as thin as a pencil. They are the most tender.
        • Standard - This is the best one for roasting. Generally, it doesn't have to be peeled. It will tender all the way down after trimming. This is the one I seek out.
        • Jumbo - These are the fattest spears and need to be peeled to remove the tough outside of the stalks.

        Varieties Of Asparagus

        Green - this is the one most commonly found in grocery stores and the variety most familiar.

        White asparagus is more tender than green. It is actually green asparagus that has deprived of the sunlight. It is actually grown under the soil to deprive it of chlorophyll that makes plants green. It is considered a delicacy.

        Violet or Purple - this variety can be found mostly in Italy and the United Kingdom. The stalks are quite thick.

        How To Cook Asparagus

        In the past, asparagus was blanched or poached, usually in water. This has pretty much gone out of style and for good reason. The water turns green having leached out some of the flavor, minerals, and vitamins.

        Today, the favored method is roasting or grilling. When asparagus was in season, we sold what seemed like an endless number of stalks. We simply trimmed them, tossed them in oil, salted and peppered then roasted them just to bring out the flavor but not to make them limp or char them. No matter how many times I told people what we did, they always thought I was holding back some secret. Actually, roasting concentrates the flavor which is I guess the "secret".

        A third way is to steam it.

        Step by Step Instructions

        This collage shows the asparagus being held in water in the fridge, the three types of asparagus, trimming it and cutting it.

        Photo 1. The best way to ensure the crispest asparagus is to trim ¼ to ½ inch off the bottoms of the bunch of asparagus and stand them up in water. Store them in the fridge where they will stay crisp for days. When ready to use the, release the rubber bands, rinse the spears, and snap the woody ends off where they naturally break apart. Photo 2. On the plate are the three grades. From left to right are the pencil, standard and jumbo. Photo 3. This photo illustrates the jumbo asparagus being peeled with a vegetable peeler to remove the tough outer skin. Photo 4. The easiest way to cut the asparagus, either raw or roasted is to line them up and just cut across all of them at once.

        This collage shows the asparagus being oiled, on a foil lined sheet pan and baked with salt and pepper,

        Photo 5. Olive oil or canola oil is being poured over the trimmed spears. Photo 6. Each spear is coated in the oil. This is important to the flavor and outcome. Photo 7. A rimmed baking sheet is lined with foil (for easy clean up) and the spears are laid in single layer with none overlapping. Step 8. They are sprinkled with salt and pepper just before going into the oven.

        Recipe FAQS

        Fresh asparagus spears on a foil lined pan seasoned with salt and pepper.

        Asparagus Season is Here

        Helen S. Fletcher
        Simply roasted asparagus with salt and black pepper is one of the easiest and most versatile vegetables that goes from the simplest of meals to the most elaborate.
        5 from 3 votes
        Print Recipe Pin Recipe
        Prep Time 15 minutes mins
        Cook Time 11 minutes mins
        Total Time 26 minutes mins
        Course Vegetable
        Cuisine American
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 77 kcal
        Prevent your screen from going dark

        Ingredients

        • 1 pound asparagus (454 grams)
        • 3 tablespoons olive or canola oil
        • salt and pepper to taste

        Instructions
         

        • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Line a rimmed baking sheet with foil. Set aside.
        • Rinse the asparagus in cold water and pat dry with paper towels. Place in the prepared pan.
        • Pour the oil over the spears and make sure every stalk is oiled, top to bottom. Salt and pepper to taste.
        • Bake for about 10 minutes until bright green and tender crisp. Pencil thin will take less time, jumbo more time.
        • Serve immediately or use as desired.
        • Leftover asparagus can be stored in the refrigerator.

        Nutrition

        Serving: 6servingsCalories: 77kcalCarbohydrates: 3gProtein: 2gFat: 7gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 4gTrans Fat: 0.03gSodium: 2mgPotassium: 153mgFiber: 2gSugar: 1gVitamin A: 572IUVitamin C: 4mgCalcium: 18mgIron: 2mg
        Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

        Mille-Feuille (Napoleon Pastry)

        Modified: Apr 23, 2026 · Published: Apr 16, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 10 Comments

        A slice of Mille-Feuille (Napoleon Pastry) with its white fondant and chocolate chevron desigh sits on a marble late with other slices in the background.

        Mille-Feuille (Napoleon Pastry) contains two building blocks of classic French Pastry - Puff Pastry (Mille-Feuille - pronounced meel-foy) and Crème Pâtissière or pastry cream for one elegant dessert. While puff pastry can be daunting to make at home, it needn't be. See my post on Pithiviers Made with Blitz Puff Pastry, featuring a quicker way to make it.

        A slice of Mille-Feuille (Napoleon Pastry) with its white fondant and chocolate chevron desigh sits on a marble late with other slices in the background.

        While this Mille-Feuille recipe (Napoleon Pastry) may look daunting, you absolutely can do this and I'll show you how.  To make things easier I use an all butter purchased puff pastry which makes everything go much easier and faster.  Puff pastry is baked until it is crisp and then sandwiched with a creamy Diplomat Cream which is simply lightened pastry cream.

        To make this more inviting, the pastry can be frozen completely with the mock fondant top in place.

        However, to speed things along without sacrificing quality, I chose a premade all butter puff pastry for this post. The key word here is all butter. There are other versions made with special shortenings that ensure a high puff but the shortening used coats the mouth and is unpleasant ruining your beautiful Napolean.

        I used Dufour All Butter Puff Pastry which I found at Whole Foods. The single sheet just needs a few turns of the rolling pin to make it the perfect size for this particular method. Alternatively, feel free to make your own.

        My pastry cream is a snap to make and can be made months ahead and stored in the freezer, something that is impossible with cornstarch based pastry cream. It can also be stored in the refrigerator a couple of days ahead.

        A couple of other posts about puff pastry include: A Discussion of Laminated Doughs, Sunny Side Up Apricot Pastries, and Chocolate Marshmallow Cream Horns.

        [feast_advanced_jump_to]

        What is Mille-Feuille?

        Mille-Feuille is a French pastry made from puff pastry and means a thousand leaves due to many layers when it is baked. The butter which is incorporated between many layers of dough (1000 leaves) creates steam when it is baked and causes the dough to rise to great heights, hence the name puff pastry.

        The photos below will guide you through the process and when finished it will impress even the most discerning dessert lovers.

        How My Version Differs

        Long ago when I wrote my first book, The New Pastry Cook, I featured a chapter on puff pastry. In the book I had a revolutionary way of making the puff pastry, much as I do for my Croissants. It took the time down from days to hours. I still use it today.

        How to Stop the Pastry from Shrinking

        When it came to Mille-Feuille (I called it Napoleons in the book) I found a way to stop the the pastry from shrinking as it normally does when baked. I simply hung it upside down over the back of a jelly roll pan and weighted it down. It seems everyone writing about Mille-Feuille is using the weighting down part but the upside down part is just as helpful. See the photos below.

        Docking the Pastry

        It is important to dock the pastry (docking is the technical term bakers use for making small holes in the pastry) This prevents the pastry from rising too much by letting the steam escape or bubbling up and it also helps keep it flat which is important for this recipe. This is easily done at home with a fork.

        Recipe Ingredients

        Pastry Cream

        Ingredients for the pastry cream include egg yolks, granulated sugar, milk, flour, vanilla, water and vanilla.

        Ingredients for the Pastry Cream include: Egg yolks, granulated sugar, milk, all-purpose flour, pure vanilla extract, water and gelatin.

        Mille-Feuille

        A box of Dufour All Butter Puff Pastry.

        Dufour all Butter Puff Pastry

        Mock Fondant

        Ingredients for the mock fondant are powdered sugar, milk, cocoa, and corn syrup.

        Ingredients for the Mock Fondant include powdered sugar, cocoa powder, milk and corn syrup.

        Key Ingredients

        • While I often recommend using McCormicks Imitation Vanilla for some recipes, this is one recipe where I recommend pure vanilla. If you have Tahitian vanilla, it lends an exquistite flavor to the pastry cream.
        • All Butter Puff pastry is a must for this recipe. Those using other shortenings are not comparible.
        • The Mock fondant is a thick powdered sugar glaze that is made with milk and a bit of corn syrup, both of which ensure a shiny finish that will not turn dull as will water. It is the traditional finish to Mille-Feuille and easy to make. The chocolate chevron design is made by adding cocoa to a small amount of the mock fondant.

        Be sure to see the recipe card below for t he full ingredients & instructions.

        Step by Step Instructions

        Pastry Cream

        Please see my post on Pastry Cream Filling for the full set of photographs.

        Mille-Feuille

        The first collage shows the box of pastry pastry, a jelly roll pan turned upside down, the pastry rolled out and the place on the pan and docked with a fork to prevent it from rising too much.

        Step 1. The pastry comes frozen and needs to be thawed. Dufour suggests 3 hours in the refrigerator. I usually put it in the night before but it is a bit soft and care has to be taken to unfold it. Step 2. Turn a jelly roll pan (10x15 inches) upside down. Alternatively place the rolled out dough in a half sheet pan and continue with the same directions. Step 3. Roll the pastry into an 11 x 16 inch rectangle. Step 4. Place it over the back of the jelly roll pan with about 1" hanging down the sides. Dock the pastry with a fork all up and down the pastry about an inch or two apart. Freeze until the pastry is hard.

        This collage shows a pan on top of the pastry to prevent shrinkage, the baked pastry, the pastry turned  upside down and the mock fondant made.

        Step 5. Place a sheet of parchment paper on top of the pastry or spray the bottom of the top jelly roll pan with a non-stick baking release and place it on top of the paper or pastry. Step 6. Bake on the lowest rung of the oven as directed. Step 7. When the pastry comes from the oven, carefully turn it over and bake for 5 to 8 minutes more to bake that side. Cool on a wire rack. With a serrated knife, trim the overhanging pastry off. Cut the pastry into 3 equal pieces legnthwise (about 3" each). Step 8. Combine the ingredients for the Mock Fondant adding additional milk if necessary but keep it thick. It should flow but not run down the sides.

        One piece of pastry is covered with the mock fondant and the cocoa enhanced fondant is piped on across the pastry abut 1" apart, the chilled pastry cream is broken up and then whisked smooth.

        Step 9. Place one of the puff pastry layers on a rack in a sheet pan or over parchment or waxed paper. Reserving about 3 tablespoons of the fondant, spread the remainder over the pastry with an offset spatula, covering it completely as evenly as possible. Immediately, before the fondant sets, add 1 tablespoon of cocoa powder to the reserved fondant, stirring it in well. You will probably need to thin it to piping consistency with a bit of milk. Place the cocoa fondant in a pastry bag fitted with a small open tip (a # 4 or 5) and pipe straight lines across the fondant about an inch apart. Step 10. Using a toothpick, draw a straight line all the way down the fondant. Move over about an inch and make another straight line up the pastry. Repeat twice more. This will give you the traditional chevron design. Allow the fondant to set up 10 to 15 minutes before continuing. Step 11. Remove the pastry cream from the fridge and break it up with a whisk. Step 12. Whisk it until it is smooth. It will be very thick, just keep whisking.

        The last collage shows the whipped cream on top of the pastry cream, piped onto a strip of pastry, the mille-feuille assembled and a shot of the pastry from the bottom showing the layers.

        Step 13. Whip the cream stiffly and fold it into the smoothed out pastry cream to make Diplomat cream.  Step 14. Place the pastry cream into a piping bag fitted with a ½" plain tip and pipe half over each of the two remaining strips of pastry. Alternatively, spoon it on. Step 15. Assemble the pastry by placing the filled pastry strips on top of each other and the fondant finished strip on top. Step 16. If the fondant is not firm, let it set up until it is. Chill the pastry. To cut it, use a serrated knife and saw through the pastry layers about 1 ½" apart. Do not cut straight down. The pastry can also be frozen, entirely finished with the fondant. When the fondant is completely set it will be firm all the way through. Place a piece of plastic wrap directly on top and freeze it whole. When it is frozen, wrap it in foil where it can be stored for a month or so. Remove the foil, leaving the plastic wrap on top. Thaw it in the fridge overnight. Remove the plastic wrap and cut when it is cold or partially thawed for the best slices.

        A note about serving. This is a plated dessert and should be served with a fork. The filling will squish out when cut but it does that with all mille-feuille.

        Recipe FAQS

        Is Mille-Feuille always filled with pastry cream?

        While vanilla pastry cream is traditional, other flavors of pastry cream can be used as well as fruit topping the pastry cream can be used.

        Why is it called Mock Fondant?

        Traditional fondant is made of powdered sugar, water, corn syrup, gelatin and glycerin. It is actually a dough and can be rolled out to cover cakes. Mock Fondant uses powdered sugar, water or milk and corn syrup. It can be used in various thicknesses and poured on. It will dry very firm, almost hard.

        Why is Mille-Feuille referred to as 1000 leaves?

        Puff pastry is a laminated dough meaning it is rolled out with butter between the layers, which when baked, melt, causing steam which pushes the dough upwards. Puff pastry is folded upon itself many times and if made correctly the math says it has over 1000 layers. In fact, the classic French method results in a pastry with approximately 1,500 layers.

        Expert Tips

        • This is one place I definitely recommend pure vanilla. If you have Tahitian, it makes the best pastry cream.
        • For the best results, roll the pastry to the correct size. It will be thin but that is as it should be.
        • Keep the pastry chilled to work with it. Freeze it hard before baking.
        • Some recipes add pie weights to the pan weighing down the pastry. I don't find that necessary, especially with purchased all butter puff pastry.
        • Be sure to flip the pastry over after the initial baking to make sure the underside is baked. If not, return it to the oven for 5 to 10 minutes to bake it.
        • if the Mille-Feuille is refrigerated for several days the pastry will loose some of its crispness but it will still be very good.
        • Freezing and thawing seems to retain the crispness.
        • The pastry cream will be very stiff after it has been chilled. That is how it should be.
        The final photo of the Mille-Feuille shows a slice of the pastry with other slices behind it.

        Other French Pastries for You

        • Croissant
          Croissants - Queen of Breads in France
        • A slice of the Raspberry MascarponeTarte Tropezienne sits on a lace edged white plate with a teal napkin behind it and a gold rimed saucer.
          Raspberry Mascarpone Tarte Tropezienne
        • L'Opera Ice Cream Cake
          L'Opera Ice Cream Cake
        • Gibassier - A French Breakfast Treat

        Love this Mille-Feuille? It would be hugely helpful and so appreciated it if you would take a moment to leave a star rating. Thank you.

        A slice of Mille-Feuille (Napoleon Pastry) with its white fondant and chocolate chevron desigh sits on a marble late with other slices in the background.

        Mille-Feuille (Napoleon Pastry)

        Helen S. Fletcher
        While Mille-Feuille (Napoleon Pastry) may look daunting, you absolutely can do this.  To make things easier I use an all butter purchased puff pastry which makes everything go much easier and faster. 
        3.67 from 3 votes
        Print Recipe Pin Recipe
        Prep Time 1 hour hr
        Cook Time 25 minutes mins
        Chilling time 4 hours hrs
        Total Time 5 hours hrs 25 minutes mins
        Course Dessert
        Cuisine French
        Servings 9 servings
        Calories 207 kcal

        Equipment

        • 2 Jelly Roll Pans (10x15) or 2 half sheet pans
        Prevent your screen from going dark

        Ingredients

        Pastry Cream

        • t teaspoon unflavored gelatin
        • 1 tablespoon cold water
        • 1 ⅓ cups milk
        • 4 large egg yolks
        • ½ cup granulated sugar (100 grams)
        • 3 tablespoons all-purpose flour
        • 1 teaspoon vanilla
        • ½ cup heavy cream

        Mille-Feuille (Napoleon Pastry)

        • 1 14 ounce package Dufour All-Butter Puff Pastry

        Mock Fondant

        • 1 cup powdered sugar (130 grams)
        • 3 to 4 tablespoons milk
        • 1 tablespoon corn syrup
        • 1 tablespoon cocoa

        Instructions
         

        Pastry Cream

        • Before you start, I encourage you to look at the photos in the post which serve as a guide to make this extraordinary pastry.
        • In a very small bowl, add the gelatin to the water, stirring to combine. Set aside.
        • In a small saucepan, heat the milk until very hot but not boiling.
        • In a medium size bowl, whisk the egg yolks and sugar together. Whisk in the flour followed by the hot milk. Pour the mixture through a fine mesh strainer into a saucepan.
        • Place over medium heat and, stirring continuously, bring it to a boil. Cook for 1 minutes, still stirring.
        • Remove from the heat, tear the gelatin into pieces and add to the pastry cream. There is no need to liquify them as the hot pastry cream will melt them. Stir them in after they have melted.
        • Transfer to a storage container, cover the top with plastic wrap, poke a few holes in it and let it come to room temperature. Place a lid on the container. Store in the refrigerator for 3 or 4 days or freeze for several months. Thaw in the refrigerator overnight to use.

        Diplomat Cream or Lightened Pastry Cream

        • To make the Diplomat Cream or Lightened Pastry Cream, beat the ½ cup cream until stiff peaks form.
        • Remove the pastry cream from the fridge and break it up with a whisk. It will be very firm and that is how it should be. Whisk until smooth. Fold in the whipped cream. This can be made ahead of time and stored in the refrigerator for a day or two before using.

        Mille-Feuille (Napoleon Pastry)

        • I encourage you to see the photos above to clarify these instructions as they are different from most.
        • Thaw the puff pastry as directed. Dufour recommends 3 hours in the refrigerator and it's ready. I usually thaw mine overnight but that can make it softer so care needs to be taken to unwrap it, remove the paper and flatten it out.
        • On a lightly floured surface, roll the pastry into a an 11x14 inch rectangle.
        • Turn the jelly roll pan upside down and place the puff pastry on it. It should overhang the pan on every side. Alternatively, use two half sheet pans, placing the pastry rolled as called for in the pan. Continue as directed.
        • Dock the pastry about every inch or so with the tines of a fork. This is important to prevent it from rising excessively. Freeze till rock hard. Place the pan inside of a half sheet pan to easily move it in and out of the oven.
        • Place the oven rack on the lowest rung. Preheat the oven to 400°F.
        • Place a piece of parchment paper on top of the frozen pastry and place another jelly roll pan on top of the paper to weight the dough down.
        • Bake for 10 minutes. Remove the top pan and paper and continue baking for about 15 minutes more until golden brown and baked through.
        • Remove from the oven and very carefully, turn the jelly roll pan right side up. If the pastry has not baked through, return it to the oven for about 5 more minutes until golden brown.
        • Cool completely. When cool, trim the overhanging pastry so you have a flat piece of pastry. Cut it lengthwise into equal parts - about 3 inches each.
        • Place one piece on a cooling rack either in a half sheet pan or over a piece of parchment paper or waxed paper.

        Finishing and Assembly

        • Combine the ingredients for the mock fondant starting with the powdered sugar, corn syrup and 2 tablespoons of milk. Stir with a spoon (don't use a whisk as it incorporates too many air bubbles) until very thick but pourable. Add additonal milk, a bit at a time to thin it out if necesssary.
        • Reserve about ¼ cup of the fondant. Spread the remainder evenly on top of the strip of pastry.
        • Immediately, add the cocoa to the reserved fondant, thinning it with additional milk about ½ teaspoon at a time. It should be of piping consistency.
        • Fit a pastry bag with a medium size writing tip and pipe straight lines across the fondant topped pastry strip. With a toothpick, draw a straight line DOWN the side of the pastry. Move over about 1/12 inches and draw a line straight UP the side of the pastry. Continue across the strip. This forms the traditional chevron design. Let the pastry dry for 20 to 30 minutes.
        • Remove the Diplomat cream from the fridge and place it in a pastry bag fitted with a ½ inch plain tip.
        • Pipe half the pastry cream as shown in the photo to cover each of the 2 remaining strips of pastry. Place one of the pastry cream topped strips on top of the other and place the fondant covered one on top.
        • At this point, there are several options. Refrigerate for a few hours until serving. This will keep the puff pastry crisp. Refrigerate overnight or up to several days but the puff pastry will soften somewhat. The third option is to freeze the assembled pastry but covering the top with plastic wrap directly on top of the fondant. Freeze. Wrap the sides in foil and freeze for a month. Remove the foil but leave the plastic wrap on top. Thaw in the fridge overnight. Remove the plastic wrap to cut. If the fondant has been dried sufficiently, it won't be damaged at all.
        • To cut: Use a serrated knife and cut through each layer of the puff pastry with a sawing motion. Do not cut straight down or the filling can squish out the sides. It is actually easiest to cut this partially frozen. I usually cut the pieces about 1 ½" wide.
        • Be aware that when the mille-feuille is cut with a fork, the filling will squish out because it's very soft and the layers of puff pastry are firm. But I can guarantee after one bit, no one will care.

        Notes

        There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
         As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
        _____________________________________________
        For the best results, roll the pastry to the correct size. It will be thin but that is as it should be.
        Keep the pastry chilled to work with it. Freeze it hard before baking.
        Some recipes add pie weights to the pan weighing down the pastry. I don't find that necessary, especially with purchased all butter puff pastry.
        Be sure to flip the pastry over after the initial baking to make sure the underside is baked. If not, return it to the oven for 5 to 10 minutes to bake it. 
        if the pastry is refrigerated for several days the pastry will loose some of its crispness but it will still be very good.
        Freezing and thawing seems to retain the crispness.
        The pastry cream will be very stiff after it has been chilled. That is how it should be.
        While I often recommend using McCormicks Imitation Vanilla for some recipes, this is one recipe where I recommend pure vanilla. If you have Tahitian vanilla, it lends an exquistite flavor to the pastry cream.
        All Butter Puff pastry is a must for this recipe. Those using other shortenings are not comparible.
        The Mock fondant is a thick powdered sugar glaze that is made with milk and a bit of corn syrup, both of which ensure a shiny finish that will not turn dull as will water. It is the traditional finish to Mille-Feuille and easy to make. The chocolate chevron design is made by adding cocoa to a small amount of the mock fondant.
         

        Nutrition

        Serving: 9servingsCalories: 207kcalCarbohydrates: 31gProtein: 3gFat: 8gSaturated Fat: 5gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gCholesterol: 101mgSodium: 25mgPotassium: 95mgFiber: 0.3gSugar: 28gVitamin A: 370IUVitamin C: 0.1mgCalcium: 71mgIron: 0.4mg
        Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

        Pastry Cream Filling (Crème Pâtissière)

        Modified: Apr 23, 2026 · Published: Apr 13, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 32 Comments

        Swirls of Pastry Cream on an Orange Tart.

        Pastry Cream is one of the most important building blocks of French pastry and can be made in less than 30 minutes. From cream puffs to eclairs, mille-feuille (Napolean pastry), fruit tarts and cake fillings like my American favorite Boston Cream Pie. While basically a thick vanilla custard or pudding, it can be flavored almost any way you can think of.

        This is a deep dive into the fascinating French filling that serves so many purposes.

        Swirls of Pastry Cream on an Orange Tart.
        Swirls of Lightened Pastry Cream highlight an Orange Blossom Tart.

        Cooked on the stove using milk, sugar, egg yolks and a thickener, it becomes a thick, smooth and glossy vanilla pastry cream that is a blank canvas to be used in countless applications.

        For other uses for pastry cream please see: Double Banana Cream Pie, Coconut Cream Pie, Caramelized Peach Tart with Brown Sugar Crumble, Banana Caramel Tarts with Rum Pastry Cream, Sunny Side Up Apricot Pastries, Coconut Cream Pie with a Difference, and The Fruit Basket Cake.

        [feast_advanced_jump_to]

        Why Make Pastry Cream

        All pastry cream is not created equal. Some pastry creams will not survive freezing. This one will. Some have a starchy, off putting taste, this one doesn't. Some are soft to the point they won't hold a ridge when piped, this one will. Some pastry creams will not hold up at room temperature, this one will. I wanted to come up with a pastry cream that did everything I said and this one will.

        Bo Friberg, the noted PastryChef/Instructor describes pastry cream in his book, The Professional Pastry Chef, as: "Making pastry cream is one of the basic techniques that anyone involved with cooking (pastry shop or otherwise) should master, because pastry cream has so many applications. In an emergency, it can be thinned and used as a sauce; it is a base for soufflé, it is filling and flavoring for cakes; and it can be used as a topping for Danish or other pastries. In the pastry kitchen, there should always be a supply of pastry cream in the refrigerator."

        Can it Freeze? Mine Can!

        It depends upon the recipe. Most recipes specify cornstarch instead of the original thickener, flour, citing a pasty, floury after taste with which I agreed. However, cornstarch breaks down if frozen and thawed. So the answer is no if you're using cornstarch as your starch.

        Because we froze many of the items we sold wholesale to restaurants, hotels and caterers, we needed to find an answer to this problem. What I ended up doing was cutting the flour way back and using gelatin to complete the thickening. As a result, this pastry cream freezes and thaws beautifully taking all the last minute work out of it and allowing us to sell desserts with pastry cream as a component.

        The gelatin serves two purposes. It held the pastry cream at room temperature plus when caterers and hotels plated desserts ahead of time it didn't break down. So my recipe includes some flour and gelatin in proportions that make a smooth, rich pastry cream without a rubbery texture that either one alone can produce.

        Basic Ingredients

        The basic ingredients for my pastry cream recipe include egg yolks, sugar, milk (whole or 2%), flour, gelatin and vanilla. Other flavors may be substituted. That's it for mine. I have seen recipes that add a bit of butter although it is not one of the original ingredients and I don't.

        What Cooking Pot to Use

        It is important to make pastry cream in any pot other than aluminum or cast iron which can discolor the final result producing a grayish pastry cream that is not very appealing.

        Storing

        After the pastry cream is made it should be covered directly which simply means placing plastic wrap on top of the pastry cream so it doesn't form a skin. Poke a few holes in it. Cool to room temperature and then chill or freeze it. It will last about 5 days in the refrigerator or it will freeze for months if put in a freezer proof container. Thaw in the refrigerator to use.

        Flavors of Pastry Cream

        Pastry Cream can be flavored many different ways including melted white, milk or dark chocolate, coffee, with liqueurs, citrus zest or any extracts, although vanilla remains the most common. soufflé This is one place I recommend using really good vanilla. If you want to flavor yours like professionals, use tahitian vanilla with its light, floral essence.

        Why You Should Make This Pastry Cream

        • The most important difference is that this pastry cream can be frozen and thawed without harm to the product.
        • The recipe can be increased in direct proportion which means just multiply the ingredients - no changes are necessary.
        • Super easy is an understatement. Just follow the pictures and the instructions and you'll be an expert in no time.
        • This is so much better than taking a shortcut and using a mix.
        • It takes less than 30 minutes.

        Variations

        • Lemon, Lime or Orange - Peel the rind of a lemon or orange, cut it into large pieces and place it in a pan with the milk. Bring it to a simmer, turn off the heat and bring it to room temperature. Remove the rind and use the milk which is now flavored. For extra flavor, refrigerate the milk and rind overnight. This will give a lot of flavor without making bumps in your pastry cream as adding the grated zest of the fruit.
        • Coffee - Add a tablespoon of instant coffee or a couple of teaspoons of expresso to the milk when heating it.
        • Cinnamon - Either steep several cinnamon sticks in the hot milk or add a teaspoon of ground cinnamon to the pastry cream when making it.
        • Liqueur - Omit the vanilla and add 2 tablespoons of any liqueur to the finished pastry cream.
        • Extracts - Whisk in ½ to 1 teaspoon of any extract into the hot, finished pastry cream. Taste and add more to taste. Remember it will not taste as strong when cold.
        • Chocolate - Add 3 ounces of white, dark or milk chocolate.
        • Crème Légère or Lightened Pastry Cream is pastry cream that has whipped cream added to it. While the traditional proportions are 2 parts pastry cream to 1 part whipping cream, less whipped cream is often used.
        • Diplomat Cream is a mix of pastry cream and whipped cream that has been stabalized with gelatin. It’s lighter than pastry cream, and richer than whipped cream. Since my pastry cream already has gelatin in it, adding whipped cream to it makes it Diplomat Cream.

        Recipe Ingredients

        Basic Pastry Cream

        Ingredients for the pastry cream include egg yolks, granulated sugar, milk, flour, vanilla, water and vanilla.

        Ingredients for the Basic Pastry Cream include: Egg yolks, granulated sugar, milk, water, vanilla, all-purpose flour and gelatin.

        Lightened Pastry Cream (Diplomat Cream)

        Lightened pastry cream ingredients are pastry cream in a bowl and heavy  cream in a measuring cup.

        The ingredients are: Pastry Cream and heavy cream

        Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients& instructions.

        Step by Step Instructions

        The first collage for Pastry Cream shows the egg hyolks and sugar in a bowl, whisked together, the flour added and all whisked.

        Before starting, combine the gelatin and water in a small bowl. Set aside. Heat the milk with the split vanilla bean pod if using to a simmer. Set aside. Step 1. Combine the egg yolks and sugar together in a medium bowl. Step 2. Immediately whisk the together. Step 3. Add the flour. Step 4. Whisk everything until smooth.

        The second collages shows the milk being added, a strainer over a pot and the mixture poured through the strainer to catch anything that has not been incorporated.

        Step 5. Add the hot milk to the egg mixture. Step 6.Whisk it in making sure to get into all of the corners until it is all combined. Step 7. Place a fine mesh strainer over a medium saucepan. Step 8. Pour the mixture through the strainer. You can see some of the unincorporated egg yolk which would have caused lumps had they not been strained out.

        This collage features the strained  pastry cream in the saucepan, cooked, and the vanilla added

        Step 9. Place the pan over medium heat. Step 10. Stir constantly until the pastry cream comes to a boil. Boil 1 minute. Step 11. Remove from the heat and add the vanilla. Step 12. Stir it in completely.

        This collages shows the gelatin congealed in a bowl, removed from the bowl, added to the hot pastry cream and put in a container to cool,

        Step 13. The gelatin in the bowl and bloomed and is a flexible blob at this time. Step 14. When the pastry cream is finished, remove the gelatin from the bowl. Step 15. Tear it into small pieces and add it to the hot pastry cream. Let it melt and then stir it in. Step 16. Pour it into a container, cover the top with plastic wrap and poke a few holes in it. Let it come to room temperature; then refrigerate or freeze.

        Lightened Pastry Cream (Diplomat Cream)

        The Lightened Pastry Cream collage shows the pastry cream in a bowl, being whisked, the whipped cream on top and the finished lightened pastry cream.

        Step 17. Place the cold pastry cream in a bowl. Step 18. Whisk it until it is smooth. It will be very chunky in the beginning, just keep whisking. Step 19. Whip the cream until stiff. Add it to the pastry cream. Step 20. Fold it in until it is all incorporated and smooth. This can be stored in the refrigerator for 2 or 3 days before using.

        Recipe FAQS

        Is pastry cream hard to make?

        Absolutely not. It is simply egg yolks and sugar mixed together, milk is added along with flour or cornstarch and it is heated until it thickens. Vanilla or other flavoring is added, then chilled.

        Why do some recipes call for whipped cream?

        Stiffly whipped cream is added to lighten the pastry cream and add another dimension to it.

        What is pastry cream?

        Pastry cream is actually a thick custard that is made on the stove top. It's versatility as to flavoring and uses is many fold including cream puffs, eclairs, St.Honore, cakes, tarts, and just about anything that needs a smooth, luscious filling.

        Expert Tips

        • It is most important to mix sugar and egg yolks together immediately or they can clump together and become small hard blobs. This happens because sugar is hygroscopic, and as such, it attracts the water from the egg yolks and makes it gelatinize. Once this happens the mixture cannot be reversed and the only option is to throw them away and start over.
        • Pastry cream needs to be made in any pot that is not aluminum or cast iron unless it is coated.
        • Using flour and gelatin as the thickening agents in pastry cream allows the cream to be frozen.
        • In the olden days, pastry cream would be made and then it would be shoved through a chinois or strainer. This is actually backwards. Strain it before it is cooked to make your life easier.
        A bowl of pastry cream sits on a white background.

        A Few Other Pastry Cream Desserts

        • The finished Coconut Cream Cake sits on a gray plate with a flower vase in the background ready to be cut.
          Coconut Cream Cake - The Perfect Easter Dessert
        • Individual Apple Crostatas with Pastry Cream
          Individual Apple Crostatas
        • Banana Tart with Rum Pastry Cream
          Banana Caramel Tart with Rum Pastry Cream and Praline
        • Caramelized Peach Tart
          Caramelized Peach Tart with Brown Sugar Crumble

        Love this Pastry Cream? It would be hugely helpful and so appreciated it if you would take a moment to leave a rating. Thank you.

        Swirls of Pastry Cream on an Orange Tart.

        Pastry Cream

        Helen S. Fletcher
        Pastry Cream is one of the most important building blocks of French pastry. From cream puffs to eclairs, mille-feuille (Napolean pastry), fruit tarts and our American favorite Boston Cream Pie.
        5 from 1 vote
        Print Recipe Pin Recipe
        Prep Time 15 minutes mins
        Cook Time 15 minutes mins
        Total Time 30 minutes mins
        Course Pastry
        Cuisine French
        Servings 2 cups
        Calories 681 kcal
        Prevent your screen from going dark

        Ingredients

        Pastry Cream

        • 1 teaspoons gelatin
        • 1 tablespoon cold water
        • 1 teaspoon pure vanilla extract or 1 vanilla bean split
        • 1 ⅓ cup very hot milk
        • 4 large egg yolks
        • ½ cup sugar (100 grams)
        • 3 tablespoons flour (26 grams)

        Diplomat Cream

        • 1 recipe pastry cream
        • ½ cup heavy cream

        Instructions
         

        • Soften the gelatin in the water and set aside.
        • If using the vanilla bean, scrape out the seeds and add to the milk along with the pod; heat the milk until hot but not boiling.
        • Whisk the egg yolks and sugar together in a non-reactive saucepan. Whisk in the flour. Remove the pod from the milk. Add the milk slowly, whisking well and scraping the corners of the pan with a rubber spatula to make sure all of the egg yolk mixture is incorporated.
        • Place over medium heat and, stirring constantly, bring to a boil. Boil for 1 minute, stirring constantly. Remove from the heat and add the vanilla (if using extract). Tear the dissolved gelatin into small pieces and stir it into the hot liquid (there is no need to liquefy it, the heat of the mixture will do this for you).
        • Pour into a storage container, cover the surface with plastic wrap, poke a few holes in it and refrigerate overnight to chill or freeze.
        • Yield: about 2 cups (490 grams)

        Diplomat Cream

        • Place the cold pastry cream in a bowl. Whisk it until it is smooth. It will be very chunky in the beginning, just keep whisking to smooth it out.
        • Whip the cream until stiff. Fold it in until it is all incorporated and smooth. This can be stored in the refrigerator for 2 or 3 days before using.

        Notes

        There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
        As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
        _______________________________________________
        It is most important to mix sugar and egg yolks together immediately or they can clump together and become small hard blobs. This happens because sugar is hygroscopic, and as such, it attracts the water from the egg yolks and makes it gelatinize. Once this happens the mixture cannot be reversed and the only option is to throw them away and start over.
        Pastry cream needs to be made in any pot that is not aluminum or cast iron until it is coated. 
        Using flour and gelatin as the thickening agents in pastry cream allows the cream to be frozen.
        In the olden days, pastry cream would be made and then it would be shoved through a chinois or strainer. This is actually backwards. Strain it before it is cooked to make your life easier.
        Variations
        Lemon, Lime or Orange - Peel the rind of a lemon or orange, cut it into large pieces and place it in a pan with the milk. Bring it to a simmer, turn off the heat and bring it to room temperature. Remove the rind and use the milk which is now flavored. For extra flavor, refrigerate the milk and rind overnight. This will give a lot of flavor without making bumps in your pastry cream as adding the grated zest of the fruit.
        Coffee - Add a tablespoon of instant coffee or a couple of teaspoons of expresso to the milk when heating it. 
        Cinnamon - Either steep several cinnamon sticks in the hot milk or add a teaspoon of ground cinnamon to the pastry cream when making it.
        Liqueur - Omit the vanilla and add 2 tablespoons of any liqueur to the finished pastry cream.
        Extracts -  Whisk in ½ to 1 teaspoon of any extract into the hot, finished pastry cream. Taste and add more to taste. Remember it will not taste as strong when cold. 
        Chocolate - Add 3 ounces of white, dark or milk chocolate.
        Crème Légère or Lightened Pastry Cream is pastry cream that has whipped cream added to it. While the traditional proportions are 2 parts pastry cream to 1 part whipping cream, less whipped cream is often used. 
        Diplomat Cream is a mix of pastry cream and whipped cream that has been stabalized with gelatin. It’s lighter than pastry cream, and richer than whipped cream. Since my pastry cream already has gelatin in it, adding whipped cream to it makes it Diplomat Cream.
         
         
         
         
         
         

        Nutrition

        Calories: 681kcalCarbohydrates: 73gProtein: 17gFat: 37gSaturated Fat: 20gPolyunsaturated Fat: 3gMonounsaturated Fat: 11gCholesterol: 476mgSodium: 102mgPotassium: 361mgFiber: 0.4gSugar: 60gVitamin A: 1657IUVitamin C: 0.4mgCalcium: 291mgIron: 2mg
        Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

        My Easter Bread

        Modified: May 12, 2026 · Published: Apr 8, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 10 Comments

        Easter Bread sits on a peach rimmed plate with a green plant in the background.

        Easter Bread is traditional in many European countries including Russia, Greece, Poland and more. Usually a slightly sweet bread filled with dried or candied fruit, it can be glazed or not.

        These are easy to make rich in butter and eggs and area the focus of the breakfast or brunch table. This is my version of a European Easter Bread.

        Easter Bread sits on a peach rimmed plate with a green plant in the background.

        Usually made in tall molds, I did not have one but I did have a French Charlotte Mold which I took when we left our house - and am very glad I did. Any 8 to 9 cup pan will do such as a bundt pan, angel food pan, or deep pan - the shape isn't as important as what is in it.

        The dried fruit can be anything you wish. I used raisins, dried cranberries and dried apricots.

        For more great Easter recipes, check out A Last Minute Easter Roundup.

        [feast_advanced_jump_to]

        Why You'll Want to Make this Easter Bread

        • It goes together really fast.
        • It just might become an Easter tradition in your house.
        • Easter Bread is a great center piece - it's as delicious as it is beautiful.
        • The bread can be made ahead.
        • It has minimal ingredients and maximum flavor.

        Variations

        Arlene, one of my readers was thoughtful enough to send this to me and I want to share it with you. Here are Easter breads from different parts of the world. Thank you Arlene.

        1. for Paska (Easter Bread from the Canadian Prairie regions), omit the fruit, but add the juices and zests of a lemon and an orange
        2. for Italian Columbo di Pasqua, go plain, or add candied fruit, or chocolate chips, zest and juice of lemons and oranges, and top the loaf with almonds
        3. for Portuguese Folar de Pascoa -- add a little anise seed
        The variations are endless, but this recipe will provide the foundation for your creativity in the kitchen.

        Recipe Ingredients

        Bread Ingredients

        The Easter Bread contains unsalted butter, yeast, water, milk, sugar, salt, egggs, vanilla, lemon zest, bread flour raisins, dried cranberries and dried apricots.

        The Easter Bread contains, unsalted butter, yeast, milk, granulate sugar, salt, eggs, vanilla, lemon zest, bread flur, raisins, dried cranberries, dried apricots.

        Glaze Ingredients

        Ingredients for the glaze are powdered sugar, milk and corn syrup.

        Glaze ingredients are powedered sugar, milk and corn syrup

        Important ingredients

        • Unsalted butter
        • Whole or 2% milk can be used.
        • Any combination of dried or candied fruit can be used.
        • I use instant yeast, but active dry yeast can be used also.
        • For the Glaze milk and corn syrup is used to give the bread a shiny finish that lasts and won't become dull.

        Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions.

        Step by Step Instructions

        The first collage shows the raisins in hot water, the butter, milk and sugar in a small saucepan, the melted butter mixture in the mixing bowl and the eggs, vanilla and lemon zest added.

        Step 1. Soak the raisins and cranberries in really hot water while the rest of the recipe is prepared. Step 2. Place the milk, sugar and butter in a small saucepan. Heat to melt the butter and cool to lukewarm. Step 3. Pour the liquid into a mixing bowl. Step 4. Add the eggs, vanilla, yeast, and lemon zest.

        This collages shows the dgg mixture beaten, half the flour added, and mixed and the raisins draining.

        Step 5. Whisk together the egg mixture in the mixing bowl. Step 6. Add half the flour Step 7. Beat on medium until combined. Step 8. Drain the raisins then squeeze all the water from them.

        In this collage the raisins have been added to the mixed fruit, the al added to the mixing bowl, the remainder of the four added and the completed bread dough.

        Step 9. Add the raisins to the cranberries and apricots. Step 10. Pour the fruit into the mixing bowl. Step 11. Add the remainder of the flour. Step 12. Add the fruit to the mixing bowl and beat on medium until it is mixed in.

        The last collages shows the risen dough in a container, the shaped dough in small bake proof cups, the whole dough in a charlotte pan and the dough risen.

        Step 13. Place the dough in a sparyed container at least 3 times the size of the dough, cover it with film and place the top on. Mark the time on it and allow it to rise until doubled in bulk, about 2 hours. At this point it can be shaped immediately or refrigerated up to 3 days before shaping and baking. Step. 14. The dough is shaped into balls of different sizes to fit into bake-proof cups. Step 15. The dough is formed into a ball and placed in a container that has been sprayed with a non-stick baking release. Step 16. The dough is risen and ready for the oven. After baking, it is cooled and the glaze is applied.

        Recipe FAQS

        Why is yeast dissolved in liquid before using?

        Before instant yeast, active dry yeast was dissolved in liqiud to soften it so it would become one with the rest of the ingredients. While it is technically not necessary to dissolve instant yeast, I still add it to liquid to give it a good start.

        Is bread flour always used with yeast?

        Not always, but it is often specified because it is stronger than all-purpose flour, it rises higher when baked.

        Does dried fruit always have to be soaked.

        It depends upon how dry it is. Generally, raisins are always soaked but other dried fruit such as dried cranberries and dried cherries can be or not, depending upon their moisture content.

        Expert Tips

        • Use Bread flour to get the highest rise and lightest texture.
        • As a rich dough (one that has butter, eggs and sugar), this can be a slow riser. If it is, put in an oven with the light turned on. Place an instant thermometer in the oven with the bread. Check it in about 45 to 60 minutes to make sure it is not too hot. It should not be hotter than about 80° to 85°F. If it is, prop the door open with a wood spoon.
        • Any 8 to 9 cup bake-proof container can be used, especially if it is tall. If the pan is shorter, like a bundt pan, the baking time may have to be reduced.
        Small rolls in colorful bake-proof paper containers in front of a green plant.

        Other Special Breads

        • Four Hot Cross Buns sit on an Irish plate with a white background and decorated with little bees and flies.
          Hot Cross Buns Revisited
        • Sweet Kolache with pineapple, cream cheese, fig, raspberry fillings
          The Marvelous Variable Kolache
        • An open Cinnamon Roll sits on a flowral plate with a plate of rolls behind it and a blue dotted cup and saucer are off to the side.
          Best Cinnamon Crunch Rolls Recipe

        Love this Easter Bread? It would be hugely helpful and so appreciated it if you would take a moment to leave a rating. Thank you.

        Easter Bread sits on a peach rimmed plate with a green plant in the background.

        My Easter Bread

        Helen S. Fletcher
        Easter Bread is traditional in many European countries including Russia, Greece, Poland and more. Usually a slightly sweet bread filled with dried or candied fruit, it can be glazed or not.
        4.34 from 3 votes
        Print Recipe Pin Recipe
        Prep Time 25 minutes mins
        Cook Time 40 minutes mins
        Rising time 2 hours hrs
        Total Time 3 hours hrs 5 minutes mins
        Course Bread
        Cuisine American
        Servings 12
        Calories 367 kcal
        Prevent your screen from going dark

        Ingredients

        Easter Bread

        • 1 cup milk*
        • ½ cup unsalted butter (114 grams or 1 stick)
        • ½ cup granulated sugar (100 grams)
        • ½ teaspoon salt
        • 3 large eggs
        • 1 teaspoon vanilla
        • Zest from 1 medium lemon
        • 2 ¼ teaspoons instant yeast
        • 4 cups bread flour (560 grams)
        • 1 ½ cups dried or candied fruit**
        • *if using active dry yeast, dissolve it in ¼ cup water and use ¾ cup milk
        • **I used ½ cup raisins, ½ cup dried cranberries and ½ cup dried apricots

        Glaze

        • 1 ½ cup powdered sugar (200 grams)
        • 1 tablespoon corn syrup
        • 3 to 4 tablespoons milk
        • Multi colored nonpareils as needed.

        Instructions
         

        Easter Bread

        • If using dried fruit such as raisins, dried cranberries, dried cherries soaked in them in really hot water while preparing the rest of the recipe.
        • If using active dry yeast, add it to ¼ cup warm water and reduce the milk to ¾ cup adding it where called.
        • If using instant yeast, use 1 cup of milk.
        • Heat the milk, butter, sugar and salt in a small saucepan until the butter is melted. Cool to lukewarm and pour it into a mixing bowl fitted with a douogh hook. .
        • Whisk the yeast, eggs, vanilla and lemon zest into the milk mixture.
        • Add half the flour and beat on medium until completely combined and smooth.
        • Drain the soaked fruit very well and squeeze out any water. Mix it with the other fruit. Add the fruit to the batter along with the remaining flour. Beat until smooth; beat for 3 minutes more.
        • Spray a container at least 3 times as big as the bread. Spray it with a non-stick baking release and put the dough in. Cover with plastic wrap and cover the container, marking the time on it. Allow it to rise until at least doubled,
        • This is a rich dough and, as such, can be a slow riser if the room is cool. If so, place the container in the oven with the light on and an instant thermometer. Check in about 45 to 60 minutes to make sure the temperature is no higher than 85*F. If it is, prop the oven door open with a wooden spoon.
        • At this point the dough can be worked right away or it can be refrigerated for up to 3 days.
        • When ready to shape, spray your pan well. Shape the dough into a ball and place it in the pan, pressing it down to flatten it. The dough should come up about half way or a bit more. Cover and let it rise for about 1 to ½ hours or until it is light and risen.
        • For the small individual Easter Bread I used 40 grams for a 2 ounce container and 90 grams for the 5 ounce container, Be sure to spray the containers. Cover and let rise for about 1 ½ hours.
        • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Bake the large Easter Bread for 35 to 40 minutes until deeply browned. Cover the top loosely with foil if it browns too quickly. Bake the smaller breads about 20 to 25 minutes. Cool before glazing.

        To Glaze

        • Mix the ingredients together with a spoon A whisk incorporates too many air bubbles. You want this to run down the sides of the bread, but still be decently thick on top. Add milk sparingly if needed.
        • To finish the large bread, pour the glaze in the middle and push it over the edge so it runs down the sides a bit. Sprinkle with the nonpareils immediately,
        • Do the same, in smaller amounts for the small ones. Springle with the nonpareils immediately.
        • Allow the glaze to dry.

        Notes

        There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
        As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure. For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
        ________________________________________________
        Use Bread flour to get the highest rise and lightest texture. 
        As a rich dough (one that has butter, eggs and sugar), this can be a slow riser. If it is, put in an oven with the light turned on. Place an instant thermometer in the oven with the bread. Check it in about 45 to 60 minutes to make sure it is not too hot. It should not be hotter than about 80° to 85°F. If it is, prop the door open with a wood spoon. 
        Any 8 to 9 cup bake-proof container can be used, especially if it is tall. If the pan is shorter, like a bundt pan, the baking time may have to be reduced. 
         

        Nutrition

        Serving: 12servingsCalories: 367kcalCarbohydrates: 60gProtein: 9gFat: 11gSaturated Fat: 6gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 3gTrans Fat: 0.3gCholesterol: 70mgSodium: 129mgPotassium: 154mgFiber: 2gSugar: 28gVitamin A: 344IUVitamin C: 0.1mgCalcium: 54mgIron: 1mg
        Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

        Mexican Chocolate Brownies

        Modified: Sep 16, 2025 · Published: Mar 31, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 9 Comments

        Multiple Mexican Chocolate Browines sit on a white lattice tray with more on a white cake stand with a glass of milk in an orange glass.

        These irrestible Mexican Chocolate Brownies are easy enough to whip up on the spur of the moment and are sure to please chocolate lovers. Brimming with flavor these are neither fudgy brownies nor cakey. They are the perfect brownie to top with the Hot Honey Ganache. These brownies are rich with the warmth of cinnamon and cayenne pepper that enhance the chocolate and guarantee a kick of flavor in every bite.

        Multiple Mexican Chocolate Browines sit on a white lattice tray with more on a white cake stand with a glass of milk in an orange glass.

        Inspired by Mexican Hot Chocolate, these sophisticated brownies contain both cocoa powder and semisweet chocolate for a deeply chocolate flavor that are best enjoyed in small squares. Although they could be served plain, the Hot Honey Ganache takes them to another level and makes these stand out brownies like no other.

        if you're looking for more delicious brownies and bars, see: Bajadera-A no Bake Cookie Bar, Quick, Easy, Versatile Rugelach Bars, Cocoa Brownies, No-Bake Peanut Butter Bars, Mocha Kahlua Brownies, Snicker Brownies, Santa Fe Brownies or Caramel Hot Fudge Brownie Sundaes.

        [feast_advanced_jump_to]

        Why You'll Love This Recipe

        • It uses a few simple ingredients that are probably in your pantry.
        • They taste incredible.
        • Although packed with flavor, they are easy to make.
        • They are perfect for snacking or gifting.
        • These show stoppers are boldly flavored.
        • The Mexican Chocolate Brownies are an indulgent treat with a delicious twist.

        Variations

        • A half cup of toasted pecans or walnuts can be added.
        • Certainly chocolate or cinnamon chips work well here.
        • The spice level can be adjusted by adding more or less cayenne pepper. As the recipe is written, you know the cayenne pepper is there but it doesn't overwhelm or set your mouth on fire.
        • If you're not into heat, omit the cayenne pepper.
        • The ganache can be omitted if desired for a simpler brownie.

        Recipe Ingredients

        Mexican Chocolate Brownies

        Ingredients for the brownies include, granulated sugar, eggs, semisweet chocolate, unsalted butter, all-purpose flour, cocoa powder, cayenne pepper, vanilla extract, and cinnamon.

        Hot Honey Ganache

        Ingredients for the Hot Honey Ganache include semisweet hocoalte, heavy cream, cayenne pepper, butter and honey.

        Ingredients for the Hot Honey Ganache are semisweet chocolate, heavy cream, cayenne pepper, unsalted butter and honey.

        Key Ingredients

        • My go to all-purpose chocolate is the one I used in my professional baking career - Callebaut #811 Semisweet Chocolate Callets. They look like chocolate chips but are pure chocolate with no stabilizers as are found in regular chocolate chips.
        • Size large eggs are used.
        • Regular honey, often referred to as "Raw" is used.
        • The cinnamon I use is Korinje for its intense flavor. However, if you can't find it use what you have.

        Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients and instructions.

        Step by Step Instructions

        Mexican Chocolate Brownies

        The first collage for the Mexican Chocolate Brownies includes the 9" square pan lined wih parchment, a bowl with chocolate and butter, then melted and the dry ingredients in a strainer.

        Step 1. Line a 9" square pan with parchment paper allowing overhang as shown. Spray the paper and the sides of the pan with a non-stick baking release. Set aside. Step 2. Combine the butter and the chocolate in a bowl. Step 3. Melt the butter and chocolate at half power in the microwave for about 3 minutes depending upon the microwave. Stir to combine. Step 4. Place the flour, cocoa powder, cinnamon and cayenne in a strainer.

        The second collages shows the dry ingredients sifted, unsifted cocoa in the strainer, everything but the flour in the bowl of a mixer and beaten smooth.

        Step 5. Sift the dry ingredients into a bowl on onto a piece of waxed paper. Step 6. Cocoa has a tendency to cake up as show. Push those through the strainer with the back of a spoon onto the dry ingredients. Step 7. Combine the chocolate/butter granulated sugar, vanilla and eggs in the bowl of a mixer. Step 8. Mix on medium until everything is combined.

        The flour is added to the mixer, the thick batter is poured into the pan and the last photo is of the baked brownies

        Step 9. Add the flour to the chocolate mixture in the mixing bowl. Step 10. Beat on low to mix in the flour and then on medium high to incorporate everything The brownie batter will be very thick. Step 11. Spoon the batter into the pan and level it. Bake as directed. Test for doneness using a toothpick inserted in the middle of the chocolatey Mexican brownies. A few moist crumbs should stick to the toothpick. Step 12. Cool the brownies before glazing with the ganache.

        Hot Honey Ganache

        The last collage shows the Hot Honey Ganache being made with the buttter, cream, honey, and cayenne pepper in a saucepan and heated, the chocolate is added to the pan to melt, it is stirred smooth and finally tops the brownies.

        Step 13. Place the cream, butter, honey and cayenne pepper in a small saucepan. Heat until steaming but do not let it boil. Step 14. Remove the pan from the heat and add the chocolate. Submerge it under the cream and let it sit for about 5 minutes. Step 15. Stir gently with a spoon until smooth and everything is completely combined. Do not use a whisk as air bubbles can form which will ruin the look of the ganache on the brownies. Step 16. Remove the brownies from the pan and the parchment paper. Turn it bottom side up on a cooling rack over wax paper or parchment paper. Pour the ganache into the center of the brownies and smooth out with an offset spatula to cover. Let the ganache set up for a couple of hours before cutting. It will become firm. If you're in a hurry, place it in the fridge for 30 or 40 minutes. Bring it to room temperature. It may not be as shiny when removed but it will be just as good. Cut it 4 across and 4 down with a serrated knife dipped in hot water and dried off quickly for the cleanest cuts. Repeat for each cut.

        Recipe FAQS

        Why are these called Mexican Brownies?

        They are based on the flavors of Mexican Hot Chocolate which includes mexican
        chocolate, cinnamon and cayenne pepper.

        Which makes a recipe taste more chocolatey? Cocoa or chocolate?

        While it would seem that chocolate would, actually cocoa makes a darker baked item as well as one that has a deeper chocolate taste.

        Which cocoa should I use, Dutch or natural?

        Dutch cocoa bakes up darker than natural cocoa. If which cocoa is not specified in a recipe either one can be used. However if a chemical leavening agent is used it is important to use baking powder with Dutch cocoa or baking soda with natural cocoa.

        Expert Tips

        • Beat the brownies only until everything is completely combined.
        • Don't over bake them. A few moist crumbs should adhere to the tester when done.
        • The ganache will set up firmly is left for a few hours. Chill briefly to hurry it along.
        • Bittersweet chocolate can be used if desired.
        • Be sure to sift the dry ingredients because cocoa is often lumpy and those lumps don't always mix well in the finished dish.
        • Either Dutch or natural cocoa can be used. Dutch cocoa will make a darker brownie.
        Several Mexican Chocolate brownies sit on a white lattice plate with a white cake plate with more brownies behind it and an orange glass of milk.

        More Bars and Brownies to Tempt You

        • Ready to eat Spritz bars piled up.
          Spritz Bars - Easier than The Cookies
        • A fudgy brownie on the bottom with a chocolate and butterscotch chip cookie on top.
          Brownie+Cookie=Easy Brookie Recipe
        • Spice bars ready to eat surrounded by spices.
          Spice Bars
        • Honey Diamond cookies
          Honey Diamonds - A cookie? A small cake?

        Love this Decadent Chocolate Snack Cake? It would be hugely helpful and so appreciated it if you would take a moment to leave a rating. Thank you.

        Multiple Mexican Chocolate Browines sit on a white lattice tray with more on a white cake stand with a glass of milk in an orange glass.

        Mexican Chocolate Brownies

        Helen S. Fletcher
        These irresitible Mexican Chocolate Brownies are easy enough to whip up on the spur of the moment. Brimming with flavor these are neither fudgy nor cakey. They are the perfect brownie to top with the Hot Honey Ganache.
        4.75 from 4 votes
        Print Recipe Pin Recipe
        Prep Time 30 minutes mins
        Cook Time 30 minutes mins
        Ganache 20 minutes mins
        Total Time 1 hour hr 20 minutes mins
        Course Brownies
        Cuisine American
        Servings 16
        Calories 349 kcal

        Equipment

        • 9x9 inch square pan
        Prevent your screen from going dark

        Ingredients

        Mexican Chocolate Brownies

        • 7 ounces semisweet chocolate (200 grams)
        • ¾ cup unsalted butter (170 grams or 1 ½ sticks)
        • 3 tablespoons cocoa (Dutch or natural)
        • 1 teaspoon cinnamon
        • ¼ teaspoon cayenne pepper
        • 1 ½ cups granulated sugar (300 grams)
        • 2 teaspoons vanilla
        • 4 large eggs
        • 1 cup all-purpose flour (140 grams)

        Hot Honey Ganache

        • ¼ cup heavy cream
        • 2 tablespoons honey
        • 1 tablespoon unsalted butter
        • ⅛ teaspoon cayenne pepper
        • 5 ounces semisweet chocolate (140 grams)

        Instructions
         

        Mexican Chocolate Brownies

        • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Line a 9x9" square pan with parchment paper, allowing the sides of the paper to overhang the pan. Spray the paper and the pan with a non-stick baking spray. Set aside.
        • Melt the chocolate and butter together in the microwave or in a pan on top of the stove. If melting on the stove, it is best to use a double boiler. Stir to mix throughly. Cool to lukewarm.
        • In the meantime, sift the flour, cocoa, cinnamon and cayenne pepper together.
        • Place the chocolate mixture, granulated sugar, vanilla and eggs in the bowl of a mixer fitted with the paddle attachment. Beat on medium low to mix completely.
        • Add the flour mixture and beat on medium to blend, scraping down as necessary. After removing the bowl from the mixer, use a plastic spatula to stir from the bottom up to make sure everything is well mixed. This is a very thick batter.
        • Scoop the batter into the prepared pan and smooth it out. Bake for about 30 minutes until a tester inserted in the center comes out with just a bit of moist crumbs clinging to it.
        • Cool completely before glazing.

        Hot Honey Ganache

        • Combine the cream, honey, butter and cayenne in a small saucepan. Heat until steamy but to not boil.
        • Remove from the heat and submerge the chocolate under the liquid. Let it sit for about 5 minutes. Stir it gently to combine so air bubbles don't form. Do not whisk as they creates air bubbles.
        • Release the brownies from the pan and turn them upside down on a cooling rack that is placed over waxed paper. This will make the flatest layer for glazing.
        • Pour the glaze in the center of the brownies and spread it to the edges with an offset spatula. Allow it to set up for several hours. If in a hurry, place it in the fridge for 30 or so minutes until set. It may not be as shiny as letting it sit at room temperature but it will still look good and taste the same.
        • The ganache will set up firmly and stay that way. Cut 4 across and 4 down for 16 brownies.
        • Store covered, in a single row. They will last for 4 days at room temperature.
        • It is best to freeze the brownies whole. Wrap well and freeze for several months. Thaw at room temperature and finish with the ganache.

        Notes

        There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
        As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
        _____________________________________________
        Beat the brownies only until everything is completely combined.
        Don't over bake them. A few moist crumbs should adhere to the tester when done. 
        The ganache will set up firmly is left for a few hours. Chill briefly to hurry it along.
        Bittersweet chocolate can be used if desired. 
        Be sure to sift the dry ingredients because cocoa is often lumpy and those lumps don't always mix well in the finished dish. 
        Either Dutch or natural cocoa can be used. Dutch cocoa will make a darker brownie.
        A half cup of toasted pecan pieces can be added.
        Certainly chocolate or cinnamon chips work well here.
        The spice level can be adjusted by adding more or less cayenne pepper. As the recipe is written, you know the cayenne pepper is there but it doesn't overwhelm or set your mouth on fire.
        If you're not into heat, omit the cayenne pepper.
        The ganache can be omitted if desired for a more plain brownie.
         

        Nutrition

        Serving: 16servingsCalories: 349kcalCarbohydrates: 39gProtein: 4gFat: 20gSaturated Fat: 12gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 6gTrans Fat: 0.4gCholesterol: 77mgSodium: 23mgPotassium: 171mgFiber: 2gSugar: 29gVitamin A: 440IUVitamin C: 0.1mgCalcium: 29mgIron: 2mg
        Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

        Simple Strawberry Rhubarb Crisp

        Modified: Jul 25, 2025 · Published: Mar 24, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 2 Comments

        A potion of Strawberry Rhubarb Crisp sits in a white bowl on a hellow gingham plate with the white pan in the backgournd.

        Simple Strawberry Rhubarb Crisp heralds the beginning of Spring. This super easy dessert goes together in minutes. If you're not familiar with rhubarb it is actually a vegetable with long red stalks used most often in pies, jams, cobblers, sauces and the like. The one thing to keep in mind is the leaves are poisonous to eat. However, they are usually cut off in the grocery stores.

        A potion of Strawberry Rhubarb Crisp sits in a white bowl on a hellow gingham plate with the white pan in the backgournd.

        If you've never worked with rhubarb before this is a great place to start. It's almost impossible to go wrong. This dessert is like a strawberry rhubarb pie with no crust. How easy is that?

        There's a great article on rhubarb in Southern Living that tells you all you need to know about this vegetable that is treated like a fruit.

        Looking for more easy spring desserts featuring strawberries or rhubarb? Here are a few to get you going: Simple Strawberry Rhubarb Crisp, Rhubarb Cream Tart with Strawberry Sauce, Strawberry Balsamic Granita, Strawberry Rhubarb Galette and Strawberry Brownies.

        [feast_advanced_jump_to]

        Why You'll Love This Recipe

        • It's super easy. Who doesn't like that?
        • With the exception of the fruit, the rest of the simple ingredients are most likely in your pantry.
        • This is a great last minute dessert.
        • It's perfectly balanced between sweet and tart.
        • The combination of strawberries and rhubarb is a classic combination and with good reason.
        • It's a great beginner's recipe.

        Recipe Ingredients

        Strawberry Rhubarb Filling

        The ingredients for the Strawberry Rhubarb filling include, strawberries,rhubarb, granulated sugar, all-purpose flour, salt, vanilla and almond extract.

        FRONT ROW: Table salt, vanilla, almond extracts

        MIDDLE ROW: Fresh strawberries, granulated sugar, all-purpose flour

        BACK ROW: Rhubarb stalks

        Crisp Topping

        Ingredients for the crisp topping are: all-purpose flour, brown sugar, old fashioned oats, unsalted butter, baking powder,  and baking soda,

        FRONT ROW: Baking powder, baking soda

        MIDDLE ROW: Unsalted butter

        BACK ROW: All-purpose flour, brown sugar, old fashioned oats (not quick)

        Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions.

        Step by Step Instructions

        The first collage for the Strawberry Rhubarb crisp shows the rhubarb stalks, the rhubaarb cut, the strawberries and rhubarb combined in a bowl and the sugar, salt and flour mixed for the thickener and sweetner.

        Step 1. Stalks of red rhubarb waiting to be cut. If there is a choice, pick the reddest stalks for the sweetest, deepest flavor. Step 2. Wash the stalks and cut them into about ½" to ¾" pieces. Step 4. Combine the sugar, flour and salt in a bowl.

        This collage shows the dry ingredients beinga added to the cut fruit, everything stirred together, the brown sugar, cutter, oats, flour baking powder and baking soda in the mixing  bowl, then mixed into crumbs.

        Step 5. Add the dry ingredients to the fruit. Step 6. Stir it in well and let it sit while you prepare the rest of the recipe - at least 10 to 15 minutes stirring from time to time. Step 7. Add all of crisp ingredients to a mixing bowl. Step 8. Mix on low to bring together and then raise to medium high and mix until crumbs form. Do not over mix.

        The last collage shows the fruit in the baking pan, covered with the crisp topping, and baked with the juices bubbling out.

        Step 9. Arrange the fruit and juices in the prepared pan. Step 10. Cover the fruit evenly with the crisp mixture. Step 11. Bake the Strawberry Rhubarb crisp until the crumbs are nicely browned and the fruit is tender. Step 12. When the crisp is done, the juices will bubble out from the edges of the pan.

        Recipe FAQS

        What does rhubarb taste like?

        Rhubarb is quite tart and crunchy with some saying it's sour. Tart apples, lemons, and sour cherries are often suggested. However, it has a very distinct taste of its own. It isn't usually eaten raw but cooked or baked with sugar to balance the tartness.

        Why is rhubarb considered poisonous?

        The leaves contain a chemical called oxalic acid, and ingesting even a small amount can lead to some unpleasant side effects, like nausea and vomiting. Grocery stores usually cut the leaves off before selling. But if buying from a farmer's market, make sure to cut the leaves off and throw them away.

        What is used for?

        First and foremost is used with pies, on its own or combined with strawberries, or other fruits. It is popular for crisps, cobblers, crumbles, and bars as well as sweet and savory sauces.

        Expert Tips

        • Buy the reddest rhubarb you can find. Avoid green stalks as they are not as tasty.
        • The peak season for rhubarb is in April and it is in its prime then.
        • Don't be fooled by large strawberries. The smaller ones have the most flavor and the best texture.
        • Make sure to use old fashioned oats. The quick oats are precooked and don't taste the same in the crisp.
        • Be sure to put the unbaked pan on a parchment lined half sheet pan. This makes it much safer to remove from the oven when it is hot and the juices are bubbling over. It also helps keep the oven clean.
        This photo of the Strawberry Rhubarb Crisp shows it in a white bowl with a scoop of ice cream  which sits on a yellow bowl

        Other Fruit Recipes You're Sure to Enjoy

        • A slice of No Bake Strawberry Pie finished with whipped cream, sits on a white plate with a yellow gingham background.
          (Almost) No Bake Strawberry Pie
        • Sunny Side Up Apricot Pastries
          Sunny Side Up Apricot Pastries
        • Slice of Blueberry Lemon Pizza
          Blueberry Lemon Pizza in a Brioche Crust
        • Cinnamon Bun Apple Pie slice on a plate with the pie plate in the background.
          Cinnamon Bun Apple Pie

        Love this Simple Strawberry Rhubarb Crisp? It would be hugely helpful and so appreciated it if you would take a moment to leave a rating. Thank you.

        A potion of Strawberry Rhubarb Crisp sits in a white bowl on a hellow gingham plate with the white pan in the backgournd.

        Strawberry Rhubarb Crisp

        Helen S. Fletcher
        This Simple Strawberry Rhubarb Crisp heralds the beginning of Spring. This super easy dessert goes together in minutes. You're sure to add this to your spring favorites.
        4 from 1 vote
        Print Recipe Pin Recipe
        Prep Time 25 minutes mins
        Cook Time 35 minutes mins
        Total Time 1 hour hr
        Course Dessert
        Cuisine American
        Servings 8
        Calories 418 kcal
        Prevent your screen from going dark

        Ingredients

        Strawberry Rhubarb Prep

        • 1 ½ pounds strawberries (680 grams)
        • 1 ½ pounds rhubarb (680 grams)
        • ⅔ to ¾ cup granulated sugar (130 to 150 grams)
        • 3 to 4 tablespoons all-purpose flour
        • ¼ teaspoon salt
        • ½ teaspoon almond extract
        • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract

        Crisp Topping

        • ¾ cup Old fashioned oats (not quick oats) (75 grams)
        • ¾ cup brown sugar (150 grams)
        • ¾ cup all-purpose flour (105 grams)
        • ¼ teaspoon baking soda
        • ¼ teaspoon baking powder
        • 6 tablespoons unsalted butter, softened (85 grams)

        Instructions
         

        Strawberry Rhubarb Filling

        • Preheat the oven to 375°F. Spray a 9x9" square baking pan with a non-stick baking release. Set aside.
        • Rinse the strawberries and rhubarb. Cut the strawberries into quarters or more if they are large. Cut the rhubarb into ½" to ¾" pieces. Combine in a large bowl. Add the almond and vanilla extracts.
        • Combine the granulated sugar, flour, and salt. Add it to the fruit, stirring it well to coat all of the fruit. Allow to sit about 15 minutes to juice, stirring several times.

        Crisp Topping

        • Made sure the butter is softened. Combine all the ingredients in the bowl of a mixer. Mix on low speed to bring together and then raise to medium to medium high speed and mix until crumbs form.

        Assembly

        • Stir the fruit well and spread it evenly into the prepared baking dish. Spread the crisp evenly over the fruit.
        • Place the pan on a parchment lined baking dish. Bake for 35 to 40 minutes until the crumbs are browned, the fruit is soft and juices are bubbling out. This makes it much safer to remove from the oven when it is hot and the juices are bubbling over. It also helps keep the oven clean.
        • Cool to warm to serve. If it is room temperature, microwave each portions to warm or warm the whole in a 350°F oven for 15 to 20 minutes.
        • The crisp can be stored at room temperature overnight or refrigerated as you chose.

        Notes

        There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
        As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
        _________________________________________________
        Buy the reddest rhubarb you can find. Avoid green stalks as they are not as tasty.
        The peak season is in April and it is in its prime then.
        Don't be fooled by large strawberries. The smaller ones have the most flavor and the best texture. 
        Be sure to use old fashioned oats. The quick oats are precooked and don't taste the same in the crisp.
        Be sure to put the unbaked pan on a parchment lined half sheet pan. This makes it much safer to remove from the oven when it is hot and the juices are bubbling over. It also helps keep the oven clean.
         
         

        Nutrition

        Serving: 8servingsCalories: 418kcalCarbohydrates: 82gProtein: 4gFat: 10gSaturated Fat: 6gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gTrans Fat: 0.3gCholesterol: 23mgSodium: 132mgPotassium: 450mgFiber: 4gSugar: 61gVitamin A: 359IUVitamin C: 57mgCalcium: 120mgIron: 2mg
        Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!
        • « Previous Page
        • 1
        • 2
        • 3
        • 4
        • …
        • 14
        • Next Page »

        Hi, I'm Helen! Being a self-taught baker and owning a bakery for over 25 years, I found many ways to make baking more successful and less intimidating. Even busy people can bake as in many cases, recipes can be done over days. The goal is to make your baking life easier, more enjoyable, with great outcomes on a consistent basis.

        More about me →

        Subscribe to receive our free ebook

        SUBSCRIBE

        Spring Baking

        • Slices of the Strawberry Cake sit on a marble plate with fresh strawberries.
          Strawberry Cake - A Little Slice of Heaven
        • Irish Apple Cake dusted with powdered sugar on a white and green tray
          Irish Apple Cake
        • Blueberry poke cake is a 9x13" cake that has holes poked in it and filled with a blueberry compote. It is finished with whipped cream and blueberry filling
          Blueberry Lemon Poke Cake
        • An Individual Italian Tiramisu sits on a cream colored plate and dark beige and silver trim with a cup of tea and a plater of tiramisu in the background,
          Individual Italian Tiramisu
        • A whole coffee cake muffin sits on a wite plate with a colored mug on the plate and more muffins in the background.
          Coffee Cake Muffins (Bakery-Style & Moist)
        • Chocolate Strawberry Mousse Torte on a golden plate.
          Chocolate Strawberry Mousse Torte

        Popular Recipes

        • This Mini Pineapple Upside Down Cake features a pineapple slice with a cherry in the middle on top of a yellow cake sitting on a blue and white plate.
          Mini Pineapple Upside Down Cakes
        • A plate of Cuccidati, fig and nut filled Italian Cookies sprinkled with multi-colored nonpariels.
          Cuccidati - Italy's Finest Cookie
        • This picture shows a slice of the coffee cake on a white, lace edged plate on a marble counter.
          Apricot Crumb Coffee Cake
        • Langue de Chat cookies in a bowl.
          Langue de Chat
        • Angel food Cake
          Perfectly Easy Angel Food Cake
        • Large nut pieces for Chopping Nuts
          Chopping Nuts - A Quicker Way

        Available Now

        Available on Amazon, Barnes & Noble, Apple Books, as well as other sites and in book stores.
        AUTOGRAPHED COPIES ARE AVAILABLE
        Click here to purchase an autographed copy.

        Footer

        ↑ back to top

        About

        • About Helen
        • Privacy Policy

        Newsletter

        • Sign Up! for emails and updates

        Contact

        • Contact
        • Press
        • Facebook
        • Pinterest
        • Instagram
        • Threads
        • Bluesky

        COPYRIGHT © 2026 PASTRIES LIKE A PRO

        Rate This Recipe

        Your vote:




        A rating is required
        A name is required
        An email is required